OF  THE 

U N I VERS  ITY 
or  ILLINOIS 

794- 

P5l« 

IB7- 


Return  this  book  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign  Alternates 


https://archive.org/details/gameofbilliards00phel_0 


LIBRARY 
Of  IHf 

UNIVERSITY  Of  lUlNuiS 


S/r  "by  Ja-c3sin.a:ii]Srew''Sofk.. 


THE 


GAME  OF  BILLIARDS, 


BY 

MICHAEL  PHELAN. 


TENTH  EDITION. 

ttOVISED,  ENLAEGED,  AND  BICHLT  EMBELLISHED  Wmi  ILLESTRATIOKB 


NEW  YORK: 

DICK  & FITZGERALD,  PUBLISHERa 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  jear  1868,  by 
H.  W.  COLLENDEK 

In  the  Clerk’s  office  of  the  District  C3ourt  of  the  United  States,  for  tie 
Sonthem  District  of  New  York. 


4/24/ 41g  ' B *0  -Staley 


INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  EIGHTH  EDITION. 


Since  tlie  first  appearance  of  this  work,  the  number  of 
devotees  of  the  polite  art  of  Billiards  has  increased  a 
hundredfold  on  this  continent ; and  in  the  past  few  years 
the  tastes  of  A^nerican  players  have  undergone  a marked 
change.  Up  to  1855,  the  hazard  or  pocket  game — 
“ spot  ball,”  as  it  was  sometimes  termed — was  the  favorite 
mode  of  play  with  our  people.  Now,  the  more  artistic, 
more  versatile,  and  decidedly  more  beautiful  carom  game 
is  in  vogue ; the  six-pocket  table  has  fallen  into  comparative 
disuse,  its  place  being  filled  by  the  table  with  four  pockets  ; 
and,  finally,  the  tables  of  large  dimensions  are  rapidly 
being  superseded  by  those  of  a size  intermediate — the 
American  and  French  standards — viz.,  eleven  feet  in  length, 
by  five  and  a half  in  width.  By  discarding  the  side-pockets, 
much  has  been  added  to  the  playing  surface  of  the  cushions, 
which  are  now  available  for  angular  combinations  previously 
impracticable ; and  by  reducing  the  size  of  the  table,  much 
of  the  labor,  discomfort,  and  dissatisfaction  to  which  that 
billiard-player,  who  is  an  amusement-seeker  merely,  is  sub- 


I 1 4424  I 


11 


INTEODUCTION. 


jected  on  a full-sized  table,  has  been  obviated.  These 
changes,  however,  do  not  call  for  the  slightest  alteration  or 
modification  of  the  contents  of  this  volume.  The  principles 
governing  American  Billiards  remain  the  same,  though  the 
appliances  are  somewhat  different.  Hazards  have  been 
abandoned  by  our  best  amateur  and  professional  players,  it 
is  true ; but  even  in  the  earliest  edition  of  this  Manual, 
which  was  published  at  a time  when  hazards  were  the  rule, 
and  caroms  the  exception,  the  former  were  treated  of  very 
sparingly.  The  author,  foreseeing  that  hazards  must  ulti- 
mately give  w^ay  to  caroms,  preferred  to  anticipate  public 
opinion,  and  so  confined  his  illustrations  and  instructional 
remarhs  chiefly  to  the  latter  style  of  strokes.  It  was  his 
aim  to  create  and  foster  a taste  for  caroms ; and  if,  through 
the  medium  of  this  book,  he  has  been  successful,  that  success 
is  the  more  gratifying  to  him  because  in  other  ways  and  in 
other  places — in  the  public  journal,  in  the  public  billiard-room, 
in  the  school  of  instruction,  in  conversation,  and  in  his  corres- 
pondence— he  has  for  twenty  years  labored  to  install  caroms  in 
the  place  of  hazards.  But  one  other  change  is  needed,  and 
then  the  American  or  four-ball  game,  which,  being  more  anala- 
gous  to  the  habits  of  the  American  people,  bas,  after  many 
years  of  trial,  been  found  better  adapted  to  their  tastes  than 
any  other  system  of  play,  may  unquestionably  challenge 
comparison,  even  in  a purely  artistic  sense,  with  the  French 
or  three-ball  game.  I mean,  of  course,  the  excision  of  the 
“pushing”  stroke, — a stroke  which,  whether  difficult  or  not, 
appears  extremely  simple  to  the  unpractised  eye,  and  in  so 
far  is  availed  of  as  a reproach  to  the  American  game  and 
the  American  professional  player.  It  is  not  properly  a part 


INTRODUCTION*. 


iii 


of  American  Billiards,  and  at  one  time  a penalty  was 
exacted  for  playing  it.  For  this  reason,  therefore,  if  for 
no  other,  the  author,  who  has  always  opposed  it  as  a need- 
less and  unjustifiable  innovation,  would  prefer  to  see  its  use 
abandoned,  more  particularly  in  trials  of  skill  between  master 
players. 

" The  vast  increase  in  the  number  of  players  during  the 
past  few  years  is  due  to  a great  extent  to  the  sojourn  among 
us  of  two  justly  celebrated  French  experts,  who,  by  their 
masterly  expositions  of  the  beauties  of  the  carom  game, 
opened  up  to  the  mass  of  American  amateurs,  and  to 
many  professionals  as  well,  a new  field  for  experiment — a 
field  wherein  they  were  vouchsafed  an  inexhaustible  fund  of 
amusement,  and  at  the  same  time  afibrded  the  broadest 
latitude  for  study. 

Though,  of  itself,  the  game,  of  which  the  French  experts 
are  the  recognized  expositors,  took  no  permanent  hold  upon 
our  players,  it  must  be  admitted  that  their  exhibitions  in  our 
chief  cities  have  tended  greatly  to  popularize  Billiards — not 
so  much,  perhaps,  because  of  the  number  who  have  seen 
their  fantastic  performances  with  cue  and  balls,  as  of  the 
greater  number  who  have  read  or  heard  of  them.  It  must 
also  be  acknowledged  that  the  National  Tournament  of  1863 
contributed  not  a little  to  develop  the  latent  aptitude  of  our 
people  for  this  most  fascinating  and  engaging  of  pastimes. 
If  it  did  not  advance  the  interests  of  Billiards  in  any  other 
way,  the  National  Tournament  certainly  left  its  ineflaceable 
impress  for  good,  and  not  for  evil,  when  it  introduced  the 
four-pocket  table  and  conferred  ofilcial  sanction  upon  the 
carom  game.  But  to  the  State  Tournament,  most  of  all,  is 


iv 


INTEODUCTIOIS'. 


due  the  surprising  progress  of  Billiards  since  1863.  This 
institution,  having  for  its  object  the  creation  and  maintenance 
of  a wholesome  spirit  of  rivalry  among  leading  players,  is 
of  Connecticut  birth.  The  tournament  held  in  Hartford  for 
the  Billiard  championship  of  the  State  was  the  first  event  of 
the  kind,  and  led  to  similar  contests  in  Massachusetts, 
Pennsylvania,  Canada  West,  Maine,  Maryland,  Virginia, 
Ohio,  Illinois,  Indiana,  Missouri,  UJanada  East,  and  likewise 
in  innumerable  towns,  cities,  and  counties.  By  means  of 
these  tournaments,  a local  interest  in  Billiards  has  been 
engendered,  which,  by  gradual  expansion,  is  permeating 
the  entire  continent ; and  by  this  means,  too,  our  players 
are  rapidly  becoming  proficient — so  much  so,  that  where 
twenty  years  ago  there  were  but  three  or  four  who  could 
lay  claim  to  excellence,  there  are  now  hundreds. 

But  it  is  in  the  home  circle  that  Billiards,  rising  superior 
to  the  prejudices  that  once  trammelled  it,  has  of  late  years 
found  its  most  ardent  devotees.  In  no  country,  if  we  except 
France,  is  there  a greater  number  of  female  billiard-players. 
It  must  be  taken  into  account,  however,  in  forming  an  esti- 
mate of  the  comparative  favor  with  which  Billiards  is 
regarded  in  the  two  countries,  that  in  America  it  is  yet 
in  its  swaddling-clothes ; while  France,  pardonably  boasting 
of  thousands  upon  thousands  of  lady-players,  claims  the 
delightful  game  as  her  own,  by  virtue  of  invention  centu- 
ries ago.  By-and-by,  as  the  superior  advantages  of  Bil- 
liards, both  as  an  amusement  and  an  exercise,  become  more 
generally  known  here,  even  France,  in  the  chief  city  of 
which  there  are  said  to  be  no  less  than  twenty-seven 
thousand  billiard-tables,  will  be  behind  this  country  in 


INTEOBUCTIOIT. 


V 


the  matter  of  female  players.  As  it  is,  no  fashionable 
residence  is  now  erected  without  due  provision  being  made 
for  a billiard-room  ; and  in  families  whore,  but  a few 
years  ago,  Billiards  was  a play  unknown,  the  billiard  table 
is  now  the  most  honored  of  the  household  gods.  Indeed, 
nearly  one-half  the  tables  now  manufactured  are  for  dwell- 
ing-houses. 

Michael  Phelan. 

New  York,  December^  1866. 


'■1 


P E E F A C E. 


Several  years  ago,  the  present  author  had  prepared  a 
collection  of  diagrams  and  notes,  out  of  which  it  was  his 
earnest  desire  to  compile  such  an  Essay  on  Billiards' as  might 
really  promote  the  scientific  development  of  the  noble  game. 

But  being  at  the  time  too  closely  engaged  to  devote  the 
necessary  amount  of  labor  to  such  a production,  the  work 
fell  short,  in  every  way,  of  his  just  expectations — though  he 
has  heard  from  many  good  authorities  that,  ^'with  all  its 
imperfections  on  its  head,”  it  was  nevertheless  the  most  com- 
plete and  thorough  manual  that  had  previously  been  issued 
on  the  subject. 

Apart  from  the  friendly  partiality  of  these  critics,  the 
author  has  since  reviewed  the  work,  with  as  little  prejudice 
as  the  circumstances  would  permit ; and  he  has  found  that 
although  a majority  of  the  principles,  and  nearly  all  the 
examples  therein  laid  down,  are  correct — still,  as  a whole, 
the  treatise  lacks  that  systematic  arrangement,  in  the  ab- 
sence of  which  it  is  impossible  to  arrive  at  scientific  deduc- 
tions by  legitimate  means.  . The  thread  of  the  argument  is 
correct  enough,  but  it  needs  to  be  unravelled : there  are 
nearly  all  the  materials  for  a fine  building  there,  but  the 
Scientific  Edifice  is  still  unfinished  and  unfurnished. 

Now,  at  a time  when  kinder  fortune  has  placed  more 
leisure  at  his  command,  he  has  undertaken  the  present  vol- 
ume, with  a serious  desire  to  correct  the  inaccuracies  and 
inadvertencies  which  disfigure  his  former  essay.  Whether 
successfully  or  not,  he  has  devoted  his  best  care,  and  the 


ORIGINAL  PREFACE. 


VI 

whole  teachings  of  his  experience,  to  make  this  bool  a prac- 
tical help  and  guide  to  every  student  of  the  game — whether 
that  student  be  a mere  novice,  for  the  first  time  handling  his 
cue,  or  a player  of  high  standing,  who  has  won  matches 
where  the  billiard-fame  of  his  country  was  at  stake.  It  is 
the  property  of  every  science  to  be  infinite  ; and  the  best  of 
us  are  but  students,  who  can  learn  fresh  lessons  every  hour, 
if  our  eyes  are  not  blinded  by  the  idea  that  we  have  already 
arrived  at  perfection. 

In  the  diagrams  which  illustrate  the  text,  he  has  confined 
himself  to  such  positions  as  are  best  calculated  to  explain 
the  essential  principles  of  the  game  ; and  has  avoided  those 
curious  or  “fancy  shots,”  as  they  are  called,  which,  though 
of  interest  to  the  accomplished  player,  it  is  almost  impossible 
to  explain  or  render  credible  to  the  uninitiated,  except  by 
ocular  demonstration. 

The  code  of  rules  drawn  up  for  simplifying  and  giving 
uniformity  to  the  various  games  of  billiards,  as  played  in  the 
United  States,  will  be  found,  the  author  confidently  believes, 
the  most  ample  and  satisfactory  ever  laid  before  the  public. 

Finally  : in  that  portion  of  the  treatise  which  is  purely 
rudimentary — the  quantities  of  motive  power,  the  different 
kinds  of  stroke,  and  so  forth — the  present  volume  must 
necessarily  have  much  in  common  with  its  predecessor  ; but 
the  similarity  is  rather  superficial  than  exact,  for  even  in 
these  matters  many  points  will  now  be  found  elucidated, 
which  the  haste  and  insuflBciency  of  the  former  work  left 
either  vaguely  or  erroneously  accounted  for. 

With  these  few  remarks — made  rather  to  anticipate 
attacks  than  to  boast  of  what  is  here  accomplished — the 
author  would  subscribe  himself, 

The  public^s  most  obedient  servant, 

MICHAEL  PHELAN. 


CONTENTS. 


Preface... 9 

Chapter  1 13 


Introductory  and  General — some  account  of  the  Origin  of 
Billiards,  and  an  Appeal  to  the  Ladies  of  America  in  its 
favor,  13. 

Chapter  II 29 

On  the  Machinery  of  Billiards — the  Table  and  its  Appur- 
tenances— improvements  in  the  Cue  and  Cushions  — 
the  Cue,  30.  The  Balls,  33.  The  Counters,  Chalk, 
and  Artificial  Bridge,  34.  A Billiard  Room — its  proper 
Dimensions — on  the  Arrangement  of  the  Lights,  35.  The 
Cushions,  their  Importance  and  Scientific  Requirements, 

36.  Faultiness  of  India  Rubber,  and  other  Cushions — 
opinion  of  Edward  Russell  Mardon  thereon,  38. 

Chapter  III 4. 

The  General  Principles  of  the  Game  defined,  with  a view 
to  their  Practical  Application — conditions  of  a Good 
Attitude,  43.  How^  to  make  the  Natural  Bridge,  45. 

The  Lady’s  Attitude  in  Playing  Billiards,  46.  The 
Cue,  its  Weight,  &c.,  49.  The  Cue  Leather,  on  the 
Selection  of,  51 


Vlil 


CONTENTS. 


Plate  of  Cue-Positions 52 

The  Centre,  Follow,  Jump,  Perpendicular  Force, 
and  Force,  52.  Principal  Sections  or  Points,  in  which 
the  Ball  should  be  struck  to  produce  Different  Effects — 
illustrated  by  Plate,  57. 

Chapter  IV 65 

Definition  of  Technical  Phrases  employed  in  the  Game 
of  Billiards  — Hazard,  Carom,  Kiss,  Scratch,  Force, 
Follow,  Jump,  Bank,  Miss,  Miscue,  Burst,  Privilege, 
Taking  a Hazard,  Killed  or  Dead  Ball,  Playing  for 
Safety,  Hug,  Jaw,  Doublet  or  Cross,  Foul  Stroke  or 
Shot,  Full  Ball,  Quarter  Ball,  Half,  Fine  or  Cut-Ball, 
Owm  or  Cue-Ball,  and  Object-Ball,  Break,  Stringing  for 
Lead,  Discount,  Playing  Spot-Ball,  Billiard  Sharp  (a  full 
description  of  the  animal).  Love  Game,  Count,  &c.,  &c.  ^ 

A Table  of  the  Motive  Powers, 75 

To  be  used  in  Executing  the  Different  Problems,  which 
follow.  Plate  of  Illustrations,  77. 

Diagram  No.  I 82 

Simple  Angles,  produced  by  Playing  with  Different  Quan- 
tities of  Power. 


Diagram  No.  II 86 

On  Double,  or  Compound  Angles. 

Diagram  No.  Ill 90 

On  the  Change  of  Axis,  and  its  Effect  on  the  Angles. 

Diagram  No.  IV 94 


On  the  Effect  of  the  Different  Degrees  of  Strength  when 
two  Balls  come  in  Contact. 

Diagram  No.  V 97 

The  Principles  of  a Follow’,”  and  a “ Force.” 


COKTEKTS.  ix 

Diagram  No.  VI 100 

Further  Illuetratioii  ot  the  “ Follow’'  and  “ Force.” 

Diagram  No;  VII 106 

On  Twisting  Shots. 

Diagram  No.  VIII 110 

On  the  Effect  the  Side-Stroke  will  have  on  the  Cue-Ball, 
after  contact  with  the  Cushion. 

Diagram  No.  IX 113 

Effect  of  the  Side-Stroke  and  Twist  continued. 

Diagram  No.  X 117 

Further  Illustration  of  the  Side-Stroke. 

Diagram  No.  XI 119 

Illustrations  of  the  “Kiss”  and  Side-Stroke. 

Diagram  No.  XII 122 

Further  Illustrations  of  the  “ Kiss”  and  Side-Stroke. 

Diagram  No.  XIII 126 

Further  Illustrations  of  the  “Kiss”  and  Force. 

Diagram  No.  XIV 129 

More  of  the  “ Kiss.” 

Diagram  No.  XV 182 

Forming  Cuiwes  by  a Follow  and  a Force. 

Diagram  No.  XVI 135 

On  Managing  the  Balls  so  as  to  leave  good  Breaks. 

Diagram  No.  XVII 131 


Another  Illustration  of  Managing  or  “Nursing”  the  Balls. 


X 


CONTEXTS. 


Diagram  No.  XVIII 140 

Further  llluetration  of  iSurBiiig  or  Managing  the  Balls. 

Diagram  No.  XIX 144 

Taking  Advantage  of  the  Chances  for  making  Points. 

Diagram  No.  XX 148 

Some  Fancy  Shots  in  Common  Use. — J.  N.  White’s  Favor- 
ite Shot,  Fig.  4,  same  Diagram. 

Diagram  No.  XXT 154 

Advantages  of  the  Perpendicular  Stroke. 

Diagram  No.  XXII 157 

On  Execution  and  Judgment. 

Diagram  No.  XXIII 160 

A Stroke  from  the  “Billiard  Cue.*' 

Diagram  No.  XXIV 1C3 

A Shot  of  Mr.  C.  Bird’s. 

Diagram  No.  XXV 166 

Showing  the  Position  of  the  different  Spots  on  the  Billiard 
Table — also  the  Semicircles  or  Playing  Points  for  the 
English  and  French  Games. 

Chapter  V 169 

A Code  to  Regulate  and  Reduce  to  Uniformity  the  differ- 
ent Games  of  Billiards,  as  Played  in  the  United  States 
and  elsewhere. 

A Code  to  Regulate  thf  American  or  Four-Ball  Game ....  172 

On  Stringing  for  the  Lead,  172.  On  Leading,  and  on  Open- 
ing of  the  Game,  173.  On  Foul  Strokes,  173.  On  For- 
feitures, 177.  On  Cases  W’here  the  Balls  are  in  Contact, 

179.  On  Withdrawing  from,  without  Finishing,  a Game, 


CONTENTS. 


XI 


180.  On  Cases  in  which  the  Marker  must  Replace  the 
Balls,  if  called  on,  as  Nearly  as  Possible  in  their  Former 
Position,  181.  On  the  Duty  of  Players  to  Each  Other, 
and  of  the  Marker  and  Spectators  to  the  Players,  183. 

On  the  Marker’s  Duties  in  Particular,  184.  Further 
Rules  for  the  Foregoing  Game,  when  Played  as  a Four- 
handed  Game,  186.  Further  Rules  for  the  same  Game, 
v/hen  played  by  three  Independent  Players,  187. 

A Code  to  Regulate  the  GaxMe  op  Fifteen-Ball  Pool 188 

With  Full  Instructions  for  Every  Question  that  can  arise 
in  its  Course. 

Rules  for  the  Dou-blet,  or  French  Game 191 

With  .the  Same. 

Rules  for  the  Three-Ball,  or  French  Carom  Game 194 

With  the  Same. 

Diagram  XXVI 199 

Illustrating  the  Three-Ball  Carom  Game. 

Diagram  XXVII 202 

On  the  Same. 

Diagram  XXVIII 205 

Further  Illustrating  the  Same. 

Rules  for  the  Russian  Game 207 

With  the  Same. 

Rules  fo*r  the  Spanish  Game 209 

With  the  Same. 

Rules  for  the  English  Game 210 

Rules  for  Two-Ball  Pool 215 


xii  CONTENTS. 

Holes  for  Pin  Pool 220 

As  Played  in  New  York. 

Rules  Observed  in  Playing  Pin  Pool 226 

At  Michael’s  Billiard  Rooms,  in  San  Francisco. 

Rules  for  the  Game  op  English  Pool 232 

Rules  for  Pool  Playing  at  the  Last  Player 232 

Rules  for  the  Nearest  Ball  Pool 237 

Instructions  to  the  Marker 239 

For  Keeping  the  American,  or  Four-Ball  Game. 

Chapter  YI 241 

General  Summary  of  Instructions.  Conclusion. 

Appendix 247 

« Attitude  is  Everything” 247 

"With  Illustrations. 

Shakspeare  a Billiard  Player 253 

Ancient  and  Modern  Billiards 256 

With  Illustrations. 


THE  GAME  OF  BILLIARDS. 


CHAPTER  1 

INTRODUCTORY  AND  GENERAL — SOME  ACCOUNT  OP  THE  ORIGIN  OP  BIL- 
LIARDS, AND  AN  APPEAL  TO  THE  WIVES  AND  SISTERS  OP  AMERICA  IN 

ITS  PAVOR. 

Man  does  not  live  that  lie  may  work — at  least  lie 
ought  not  so  to  live  in  a well-regulated  condition  of 
society.  On  the  contrary,  we  should  rather  work  that 
we  may  live ; and  whatever  system  of  political  economy 
does  not  embrace  certain  hours  of  relaxation,  and  cer- 
tain methods  of  amusement,  is  a false  and  pernicious 
idolatry,  having  Mammon  for  its  God,  and  man’s  best 
energies  and  happiness  as  the  victims  to  be  sacrificed 
upon  its  unholy  altar. 

There  are  two  extremes  of  population,  in  which  the 
sanitary  needs  of  amusement  stand  a chance  of  being 
overlooked  or  crowded  down  by  still  sterner  necessities. 

Where  the  population  is  so  dense  as  we  find  it  in  the 
manufacturing  districts  of  England,  not  a moment  can 
be  spared  from  the  incessant  demands  which  compe- 
tition makes  on  toil : labor  is  there  so  redundant  that 

it  loses  its  proper  value,  and  nothing  but  the  strictest 
[18] 


14 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


and  most  unremitting  devotion  to  business  can  secure 
even  tlie  barest  necessaries  of  life.  Where  wealth  is 
monopolized  in  the  hands  of  a few,  while  the  millions 
are  forever  hovering  on  the  very  brink  of  starvation, 
it  would  be  absurd  to  look  either  for  a general  diffu- 
sion of  intelligence,  or  for  any  system  of  amusement 
superior  to  that  afforded  by  the  gin-palace  and  the  dog- 
fight. 

Again,  on  the  other  hand,  where  the  population  is 
disproportionately  small  when  compared  with  the  vast 
resources  which  lie  around  it,  in  a new  and  undeveloj^ed 
country — where  wealth  runs  to  waste  on  every  hand 
for  the  want  of  labor  to  collect  and  garner  it — where 
every  man  is  free  to  become  his  own  master  and  create 
a future  for  himself  independent  of  any  other  help, — 
in  such  a condition  of  society  toil  rises  to  an  unnatural 
importance ; we  reckon  time  not  by  hours,  but  by  dollars ; 
and  hence  it  is  we  find,  that  in  the  earlier  settlement  of 
our  country,  the  grim,  puritanical  spirit  of  the  original 
immigrants  not  only  discouraged  ‘‘unprofitable  amuse- 
ments” by  preaching  and  denunciation  from  the  pulpit, 
but  even  went  so  far  as  to  prohibit  the  most  innocent 
recreations  by  positive  and  penal  enactments. 

How  short-sighted  such  a policy ! what  ignorance  of 
man’s  real  nature  is  betrayed  in  this  bigoted  and  narrow 
course ! For  the  desire  for  amusement  has  been  im- 
planted in  man,  and  in  all  other  animals  as  well,  as  one 
of  the  primitive  instincts,  and  for  the  most  important 
purposes : it  teaches  us  in  childhood  the  use  of  our  vari- 
ous faculties — it  inspires  us  with  ambition  and  dexterity, 
and  helps  to  unfold  the  mind  by  bringing  it  into  con- 


The  Game  of  Billiabds. 


15 


tact  and  rivalry  witli  the  minds  of  kindred  yonth.  In 
manhood  it  is  the  best  promoter  of  bodily  health,  and 
enables  us  to  sustain  those  serious  toils  which,  if  un- 
relieved by  some  more  pleasing  stimulant,  would  soon 
succeed  in  degrading  us  to  the  level  of  mere  human 
machines. 

Instead,  therefore,  of  railing  against  the  popular  de- 
sire for  amusement,  true  wisdom  would  rather  seek  to 
encourage  the  spirit,  and  direct  it  into  such  channels  as 
would  best  promote  the  objects  for  the  accomplishment 
of  which  we  were  endowed  with  it  by  nature ; and  true 
policy  would  suggest,  that,  instead  of  adopting  the  Eo- 
man  plan,  where  the  circuses,  or  public  games,  embraced 
the  mortal  struggles  of  the  gladiators  and  the  deadly 
contests  between  men  and  wild  beasts,  we  should  return, 
as  much  as  possible,  to  the  old  Egyptian  system,  by 
which  the  public  recreations  were  made  the  vehicle  of 
imparting  all  the  most  important  scientific  truths,  in  a 
form  so  agreeable  and  simple,  that  the  very  meanest  in- 
tellect was  capable  of  appreciating  and  recollecting  their 
cogency.  Thus  the  original  game  of  cards,  as  taught  by 
the  builders  of  the  pyramids,  conveyed  a knowledge  of 
the  whole  system  of  practical  astronomy — the  court 
cards,’’  as  we  call  them  now,  representing  the  different 
constellations  which  rule  the  year,  and  the  numerals 
being  marked  in  such  a manner,  as  to  indicate  precisely 
the  different  periods  for  the  overflow  and  subsidence 
of  the  Nile,  and  the  various  agricultural  operations 
thereon  dependent. 

But  cards  have  long  since  lost  their  character  of 
primitive  simplicity  and  instruction ; they  have  degen-* 


16 


The  Game  of  Billiaebs. 


crated  to  far  different  service;  and,  tliongli  still 
valuable,  in  some  slight  degree,  for  the  arithmetical 
combinations  which  they  illustrate,  it  is  felt,  in  the  first 
place,  that  their  use  is  fraught  with  peril ; and,  in  the 
second,  that  they  are  destitute  of  that  bodily  exercise, 
without  which  amusement  ceases  to  be  healthful. 

Chess  is  indeed  a splendid  game,  and  may  be  called 
the  tournament  of  intellects ; it  affords  a field  for  the 
development  of  the  very  highest  efforts  of  genius — its 
capacities  are  infinite,  and,  if  worked  out  in  a legitimate 
spirit,  would  form  a mental  discipline,  not  one  whit  in- 
ferior to  the  abstrusest  propositions  of  mathematics.  It 
is,  in  fact,  so  much  of  a discipline,  that  it  almost  ceases 
to  be  a game ; it  is'  exhaustive  of  the  brain,  and  Sir 
Walter  Scott  declared,  as  his  reason  for  abandoning 
chess  (of  which,  like  Napoleon,  he  had  been  passionate- 
ly fond),  that  ‘‘the  last  game  he  played  with  Lockhart, 
his  son-in-law,  cost  him  more  mental  labor,  and  left  his 
faculties  more  prostrate,  than  the  composition  of  the 
best  novel  he  had  ever  written.” 

Chess,  therefore,  though  an  excellent  exercise  for  the 
mind,  is  too  rigorous  and  concentrated  to  be  considered 
an  amusement;  it  is  merely  an  intellectual  combat, 
which  calls  for  no  muscular  energj^,  or  physical  accom- 
plishment ; it  teaches  neither  quickness  to  the  eye  nor 
readiness  to  the  hand;  and  its  nature  is  so  sedentary  and 
intense,  as  to  be  absolutely  prejudicial  to  health,  if  pur- 
sued to  any  great  extent.  But  it  possesses  this  advantage 
over  cards — an  advantage  to  which  we  wish  to  call  partic- 
ular attention — that  its  intrinsic  intellectual  excitement 
is  so  strong,  as  to  render  unnecessary  the  money  inter- 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


17 

est,  or  money  bets,  wliicb  are  found,  to  a great  ex- 
tent, essential  to  the  full  enjoyment  of  the  others. 
Again,  in  the  game  of  Bowling,  we  have  great  physi- 
cal energy  displayed,  while  the  mind  is  left  in  almost 
utter  inactivity.  A certain  physical  knack  is  to  be 
acquired,  for  the  purpose  of  impelling  a ball  of  a cer- 
tain weight,  to  hit  an  object  at  a certain  distance,  in  a 
certain  way ; but  when  once  this  difficulty  is  mastered, 
we  exhaust  the  whole  resources  of  the  game.  The 
physical  exercise  is  often  too  severe,  and  there  is  not 
variety  enough  to  afford  a natural  excitement — in  the 
absence  of  which  we  are  all  too  apt  to  apply  ourselves 
to  the  money-interest  of  a bet,  to  make  up  for  the  de- 
ficiency which  is  inherent  in  the  nature  of  the  game. 

From  the  preceding  remarks — if  we  have  caused  our 
meaning  to  be  understood — it  will  be  seen  that  a game, 
to  satisfy^  all  the  requirements  and  avoid  all  the  dan- 
gers of  a public  amusement,  should  contain  within 
itself  the  following  indispensable  prerequisites: 

/In  the  first  placey  it  should  exercise  and  discipline 
the  faculties  and  resources,  both  of  the  mind  and  body, 
without  exhausting  or  disgusting  either ; and. 

In  the  second  place^  it  should  contain  within  itself 
sufficient  mental  excitement  and  ambition  to  render  the 
extrinsic  interest  of  a money  bet  superfluous  to  its 
full  enjoyment. 

These,  as  we  understand  the  matter,  are  the  two  es- 
sential points  to  be  consulted  in  the  selection  of  a game 
to  be  adopted  as  a public  and  national  amusement; 
and  these  we  confidently  affirm,  and  the  experience  ot 
the  world  will  support  our  assertion,  are  to  be  found 


18 


The  Game  or  Billiakds. 


alone  in  their  perfection  in  that  which  has  worthily 
been  styled 

‘‘THE  HOBLE  GAME  OF  BILLIARDS.” 

This  game  is  peculiarly  in  harmony  with  the  me* 
chanical  genius  of  our  people  ; it  combines  science  with 
gymnastics,  teaching  the  eye  to  judge  of  distances,  the 
mind  to  calculate  forces,  and  the  arm  to  execute  with 
rapidity  and  skill  whatever  the  mind  and  eye  combine 
to  dictate  for  its  execution ; it  expands  the  chest,  while 
giving  grace  and  elegance  to  the  form,*  and  affords 
even  to  the  illiterate  mind  a practical  basis  for  the  ap- 
preciation of  mathematical  and  geometric  truth.  Al- 
ready this  game  is  the  most  popular  in  the  thickly- 
settled  parts  of  the  country;  and  there  is  a growing 
disposition  to  adopt  it  as  one  of  the  national  character- 
istics. Thousands  of  our  wealthiest  and  most  in- 
telligent citizens  no  longer  consider  their  mansions 
complete  without  a billiard-room ; and  when  we  con- 

* According  to  the  best  opinion  of  anatomists,  there  are  in  the 
neighborhood  of  four  hundred  muscles  in  the  human  body  ,*  and 
beauty  of  person,  as  well  as  health,  will  much  depend  upon  each  of 
these  muscles  being  brought  into  action  under  proper  circumstances, 
and  to  a suitable  extent.  Now,  the  game  of  Billiards  calls  into  ac- 
tion each  and  every  one  of  the  sinews,  tendons,  joints  and  muscles 
of  the  frame,  as  any  one  who  will  take  the  trouble  to  watch  a single 
game,  must  be  satisfied  for  himself.  In  walking,  striking,  stretch- 
ing, stooping,  and  leaning  back,  the  requirements  of  an  ordi- 
nary game  place  the  player  in  almost  every  attitude  that  it  is 
possible  to  conceive.  To  this  testimony  of  our  own  senses,  we  could 
add  that  of  the  best  medical  authors,  if  we  thought  that  such  were 
needed  to  give  weight  to  a proposition  Which  demonstrates  itself. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


19 


eider  the  sedentary  habits  into  which  our  American 
ladies  have  lately  fallen,  we  cannot  fail  to  rejoice  for 
tneir  sakes,  that  their  homes  will  henceforth  be  adorned 
with  a means  of  recreation,  which  will  pleasantly 
compel  them  to  take  the  needful  exercise,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  so  largely  contribute  to  make  home  attrac- 
tive to  the  sex  upon  whose  presence  their  enjoyments 
to  a great  extent  depend. 

The  origin  of  this  delightful  game,  like  the  birth- 
place of  Homer,  is  a contested  point,  and  its  antiquity, 
like  that  of  many  elderly  spinsters,  is  involved  in  con- 
siderable doubt.  By  some  it  is  supposed  to  have  been 
imported  from  the  Persians  during  the  Consulship  of 
the  Eoman  Lucullus ; by  others,  the  honor  of  intro- 
ducing it  into  Europe  from  the  East,  is  assigned  to  the 
Emperor  Caligula. 

But  be  these  things  as  they  may,  we  have  no  au- 
thentic record  of  its  existence,  until  the  return  of  the 
Knights  Templars  to  Europe,  on  the  termination  of 
the  first  crusade ; so  that,  if  known  at  all  to  the  Eo- 
mans,  as  is  generally  supposed,  it  must  have  perished 
along  with  many  other  noble  arts  on  the  overthrow  of 
their  empire ; and  unless  the  diggers  at  Herculaneum 
and  Pompeii,  bring  us  up  the  charred  remains  of  a bil- 
liard-table, the  matter  must  forever  remain  a subject 
of  uncertain  speculation. 

In  all  probability,  however,  the  game,  like  that  of 
chess,  has  an  eastern  origin;  the  Templars  brought  it' 
back  with  them  from  the  Holy  Land,  and  it  soon  be- 
came the  favorite  amusement  and  means  of  health  to 
which  the  cloistered  monks  of  that  period  were  permit- 


20 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


ted  by  their  superiors  to  hare  recourse : and  however 
much,  in  these  latter  days,  it  may  have  come  to  be  re- 
garded as  a ‘‘carnal  amusement,”  we  have  abundant 
evidence  that  it  was  cradled  in  the  monasteries,  which 
were  then  the  fountain  heads  and  only  sources  of  the 
Christian  faith. 

Having  been  introduced  into  Europe  by  the  Knights 
Templars,  the  game  of  billiards  shared  their  fate ; and 
• when  the  power  and  wealth  of  that  chivalric  order 
tempted  the  cupidity,  and  prompted  the  jealousy  of 
the  European  monarchs  to  their  overthrow,  the  game 
disappeared  along  with  the  fortunes  of  its  masters, 
nor  was  it  again  revived  until  the  peaceful  disposition 
of  Louis  XI.  of  France  induced  him  to  prefer  its  plea- 
sant emulation  to  the  bloody  tournaments  that  were 
then  the  pastimes  of  his  court. 

By  one  of  his  successors,  Henry  III.,  it  was  still  more 
widely  patronized;  and  to  that  monarch  it  stands  in- 
debted for  its  appellation  of  “ The  noble  game.”  The 
kings  of  France  were,  at  all  times,  its  most  powerful 
and  steadfast  friends. 

Again  we  find  that  the  unfortunate  Mary  Stuart, 
Queen  of  Scots,  complains  in  a letter  to  the  Archbishop 
of  Glasgow,  dated  Fotheringay,  and  written  the  very 
evening  before  her  death,  that  her  “Billiard  table  has 
just  been  taken  away  from  her,  as  a preliminary  step 
to  her  punishment.”  Doubtless,  Mary  having  been 
married  to  the  Dauphin  of  France,  was  introduced  to 
the  game  during  her  stay  in  Paris. 

You  see,  therefore,  ladies,  that  you  will  run  no  risk 
of  being  considered  “too  masculine  in  your  tastes,”  if 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


21 


you  devote  yourselves  to  this  delightful  household  re- 
creation ; for  a woman,  and  a queen,  whose  misfortunes 
are  only  surpassed  by  the  lustre  of  her  accomplish- 
ments, has  here  set  you,  many  centuries  ago,  an-  ex- 
ample of  loving  it  with  a fervor  which  even  the  near 
approach  of  death  could  not  efface.  No  doubt  also. 
Queen  Elizabeth,  who  was  chiefly  emulous  and  jealous 
of  her  cousin’s  superior  beauty  ajid  accomplishments, 
must  have  been  a passionate  votary  of  the  game ; and 
in  this  manner  only  can  we  explain  the  anachronism 
which  Shakspeare  commits  when  he  makes  Cleopatra 
(Act  II.  scene  5)  exclaim  to  Charmian,  ‘‘Let  us  to 
billiards!” 

Beyond  question,  this  was  one  of  the  compliments 
to  the  whims  and  caprices  of  his  mistress,  with  which 
the  poet  was  in  the  habit  of  interlarding  such  compo- 
sitions as  he  wished  might  find  favor  in  her  eyes.  On 
this  point,  see  a pleasant  article,  entitled  “ Shakspeare 
a Billiard  Player,”  which  will  be  found  in  Appendix. 

Indeed,  we  have  often  thought  that  whoever  would 
start  a good  calisthenic  academy,  with  billiard  tables, 
and  other  apparatus  for  the  physical  recreation  of  the 
gentler  sex,  would  entitle  himself  to  be  looked  upon  as 
a public  benefactor.  The  majority  of  complaints,  con- 
sumption included,  which  afflict  the  female  world,  arise 
almost  exclusively  from  the  want  of  exercise,  and  suit- 
able amusements.  We  are  told  so  by  the  doctors,  and 
we  know  it  from  our  daily  experience. 

Now,  the  game  of  billiards,  though  a very  gentle  one, 
calls  every  muscle  of  the  body  into  active  life ; its 
attitudes  are  as  diversified  as  the  position  of  the  balls 


22 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


upon  the  board,  and  yet  there  is  not  one  of  them  that 
is  not  fraught  with  easy  gracefulness  and  vigor.  In 
the  ordinary  course  of  an  hour's  billiard  playing,  a 
person  will  walk  from  two  to  three  miles  round  the 
table,  besides  exerting  every  sinew  of  his  body  in 
other  and  different  directions ; and  yet  so  frequent  are 
the  pauses,' and  so  absorbing  the  interest,  that  the  idea 
of  fatigue  is  the  very  Jast  that  will  enter  the  head.* 

The  grand  feature  which,  we  trust,  will  eventually  lead 
to  the  general  adoption  of  billiards,  as  the  game  for 
home — ^the  game  to  be  introduced  into  the  houses,  and 
shared  with  the  families  of  all  who  are  wealthy  enough 
to  afford  such  an  inexpensive  luxury — is  this : that  it 
will  admit  of  being  enjoyed  in  common  by  both  the  male 
and  female  members  of  the  family  or  circle.  Neither 
sex  can  enjoy  an  amusement  so  rationally,  or  innocently, 
when  alone : for  they  exert  a happy  influence  on  each 
other  when  in  company,  and  more  than  one  half  of  the 
vices  and  follies  which  affect  society,  result  from  the 
separation  of  the  sexes  in  the  pursuit  of  their  different 
amusements.  Those  giant  plague-spots  of  society,  as 
at  present  constituted,  gambling  and  intemperance, 
seldom  dare  to  show  their  features  in  the  drawing-room, 

* Exercise  to  be  efficacious  for  good  even  in  tbe  healthy,  must  be 
excited,  sustained,  and  directed  by  that  nervous  stimulant  or  odic 
force,  as  it  is  called,  which  gives  the  muscles  the  chief  part  of  their 
strength,  and  contributes  to  the  sustenance  of  the  parts  in  a state 
of  activity.  In  short,  to  obtain  the  full  advantage  of  the  nervous 
stimulus  in  exercise,  we  must  be  interested  in  what  we  are  doing. 
Billiards  supplies  this  excitement,  and,  therefore,  it  is,  that  the  exer- 
cise which  we  take  at  the  game  is  so  particularly  healthy. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


23 


while  they  often  obtrude  their  unwelcome  presence  into 
places,  from  which  ladies  are  excluded. 

Look,  ladies,  at  the  billiard  table  as  a means  of  do- 
mesticating your  husbands  and  brothers — as  a means 
of  making  home  so  agreeable  that  they  will  seldom 
care  to  leave  it,  except  on  business  or  in  your  society 
— and  say,  if  the  general  introduction  of  the  game  as 
a household  appendage  be  not  worth  your  very  serious 
consideration. 

A first-class  table,  furnished  with  all  the  modern 
improvements,  would  cost  much  less  than  the  price 
of  a good  piano ; it  would  permit  any  number  from 
two  to  ten  to  play  on  it  at  once  with  ease,  and  would 

* We  have  often  heard  gentlemen  regret  that  they  could  not  have 
a billiard  table  in  their  own  houses,  on  account  of  a prejudice  which 
their  wives  entertained,  that  the  game  was  connected  with  gambling. 
No  illusion  could  be  more  baseless,  or  more  prejudicial  to  the  best 
interests  of  families  : baseless,  for  the  game  is  no  more  a gambling 
one  than  chess — its  intellectual  interest  sufiSces  without  the  un- 
natural stimulus  of  a bet ; and  the  ladies  might,  with  much  more 
reason,  object  to  the  election  of  a President,  because  we  know  that 
large  sums  are  constantly  staked  upon  the  siiccess  of  the  rival  can- 
didates. It  is  prejudicial,  we  add,  because  everything  that  makes 
home  less  agreeable  to  the  head  of  a family,  tends  in  so  much  to 
alienate  him  from  that  sphere  in  which  his  pleasures  should  be  found. 
If  the  true  domesticating  influence  of  billiards  were  understood, 
every  wife  would  be  most  anxious  to  provide  her  husband  with  a 
table ; for  the  mind  needs  amusement  after  the  business  of  the  day, 
and  persons  who  have  been  sitting  for  eight  or  ten  hours  at  the  desk 
or  in  the  library  need  exercise ; the  game  of  billiards  combines 
these  two  essentials  in  their  most  pleasing  form,  and  what  wife 
would  not  rather  see  her  husband  enjoy  himself  at  home  than  find 
him  obliged  to  go  abroad  for  relaxation  ? 


24 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


likewise  afford  amusement  and  a certain  amount  of 
mathematical  instruction  to  as  many  as  could  con 
veniently  sit  round  and  watch  the  progress  of  the 
game. 

In  France  and  Germany,  and  in  this  country  also  to 
a growing  extent,  the  ladies  have  for  many  years  par- 
ticipated in  this  noble  game.  The  greatest,  the  wisest, 
and  one  of  the  purest  of  modern  women,  the  celebrated 
Madame  de  Stael,  was  an  enthusiastic  advocate  of  bil- 
liards, and  one  of  the  most  brilliant  players  of  her  age ; 
even  when  exiled  to  Switzerland  by  order  of  Napoleon 
she  overstayed  the  time  limited  for  her  departure  from 
Paris,  in  order  that  she  might  personally  superintend 
the  removal  of  her  billiard  table.  The  late  Duchess 
de  Berri  was  also  very  fond  of  the  game,  and  highly 
skilled  i‘n  its  execution  ; her  example  gave  the  tone  to 
Parisian  fashion,  and  to-day  the  billiard  room  is  re- 
garded as  an  indispensable  adjunct  to  every  chateau  of 
any  pretension  on  continental  Europe. 

In  country  houses,  removed  from  the  theatres  and 
operas,  the  balls  and  soirees  of  metropolitan  society, 
the  “ noble  game  would  supply  the  place  of  these  ex- 
citements with  something  healthier  and  purer.  We 
should  all  sleep  more  soundly,  if  we  made  it  a rule  to 
play  billiards  for  an  hour  or  two  each  evening,  before 
going  to  bed.  Our  wives  and  children  would  be  more 
healthy  and  happy,  more  affectionate  and  fond  of 
home ; for  there  is  nothing  which  endears  the  family 
circle  so  intimately,  as  the  recollection  of  amusements 
shared  in  common— of  games  in  which  we  all  took 
part. 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


25 


it  the  game  of  billiards,  more  than  at  any  other 
g-c  ne  or  exercise  within  our  knowledge,  the  observer 
of  national  characteristics  will  have  an  opportunity  of 
studying  those  peculiarities  of  the  individual  whose 
aggregate  is  the  character  of  his  country.  Thus  we 
find  that  the  Frenchman,  whose  artistic  eye  and  mathe- 
matical genius  make  him  the  best  military  strategist  of 
all  the  European  nations,  is  also  by  far  the  most 
brilliant  billiard  player  to  be  found  in  the  world : his 
conceptions  are  daring,  and  his  execution  has  all  the 
finish  and  rapidity  of  one  with  whom  it  would  be  pre- 
sumption for  a less  gifted  player  to  contend : his  open- 
ing is  a succession  of  coups  d^etat^  and  if  Ave  did  not 
know  that  his  pace  was  a ‘‘killing  one,’’  we  should 
feel  tempted  to  throw  down  the  cue  in  despair,  and  ask 
the  marker  how  much  we  had  to  pay  for  the  table  ? 
But,  alas  I his  success  is  his  destruction ; his  most  bril- 
liant coup  de  main  only  accelerates  his  ruin : he  is  in- 
toxicated by  the  triumph  his  own  genius  has  in  part 
achieved,  and  the  vivacity  of  his  play  evaporates  before 
the  game  is  half  concluded.  For  single  strokes  of 
almost  miraculous  adroitness  he  puts  forth  all  the  skill 
he  is  master  of ; but  for  the  patient  foresight  and  self- 
restraint  which  are  necessary  to  a prudent  management 
of  the  balls,  he  is  utterly  unfit.  He  would  not  forego 
the  chance  of  a brilliant  shot,  even  though  he  knew 
that  it  must  leave  the  balls  in  a position  from  Avhich 
his  adversary  may  make  an  easy  run  to  game:  he 
cares  not  to  win,  so  long  as  he  can  make  it  clear  that 
he  could  Avin,  if  he  chose  always  to  play  as  carefully  as 
he  does  upon  occasion:  so  long  as  he  is  confessed  to  be 
2 


26  The  Game  of  Billiards. 

tlie  “most  brilliant  billiard  player,”  be  cares  not  who 
is  called  “the  best.” 

The  Englishman,  on  the  other  hand,  in  this,  as  in 
almost  everything  else,  is  the  direct  reverse  of  his  late 
imperial  and  imperious  ally  : he  looks  to  the  result,  and 
does  not  care  the  snap  of  one  of  his  portly  fingers  by 
what  means  the  victory  has  been  gained,  so  long  as  it 
is  his,  de  facto:  he  knows  that  his  conceptions,  though 
profound,  are  far  from  lively  ; and  he  flatters  his  tardy 
execution  by  the  maxim  that  “ all  great  bodies  move 
slowly.”  He  is  the  very  essence  of  patience  and  labor- 
ious foresight  in  his  play ; if  care  could  win  a game 
the  Englishman  would  never  lose.  But  he  is  so  op- 
posed to  “rashness”  of  every  kind— so  averse  to  those 
progressive  ideas  which  he  in  general  sums  up  under 
the  head  of  “impracticable,”  that  he  would  lose  a 
stroke  which,  though  difficult,  is  probable,  rather  than 
forfeit  that  reputation  for  prudence  upon  which  he  es- 
pecially prides  himself.  He  “forgets  to  remember,” 
as  the  saying  is,  that  it  was  care  killed  the  cat ; and 
though  his  game  is  a very  strong  one,  and  perhaps  of 
the  two  more  safe  than  the  Frenchman’s,  still  it  is 
marred  by  excess  of  caution,  and  numberless  counts 
are  lost  from  the  timidity  which  will  not  stretch  forth 
its  hand  to  grasp  them. 

Halfway  between  these  two,  and  combining  the  pe- 
culiarities of  each,  stands  the  American  billiard  player. 
With  much  of  the  Frenchman’s  vivacity,  and  all  his 
hardihood,  his  conceptions  are  bold  enough  to  seize  all 
the  possible  advantages  of  a stroke,  and  his  manipula- 
tion, though  less  delicate  than  the  Frenchman’s,  is  su- 


The  Game  of  Billiabbs. 


27 


penor  to  the  Englishman’s  in  quickness,  ease  and 
force.  On  the  other  hand,  he  is  proverbially  a man 
that  calculates  the  cost  of  his  whistle  before  sitting 
down  to  enjoy  it : the  problem  of  each  stroke  passes 
rapidly  through  his  head  before  he  strikes ; and  though 
he  does  not  “manage  the  balls”  (as  a general  rule)  so 
exactly  as  the  plodding  Englishman,  he  foresees  the  posi- 
tion in  which  they  will  be  placed  clearly  enough  for 
all  practical  purposes,  and  his  judicious  audacity 
gives  him  counts,  which  the  more  timid  player  would 
lose  for  the  simple  want  of  trying. 

It  has  always  been  an  easy  task  to  speak  well  of  the 
Athenians  in  Athens ; but  we  cannot  be  accused  of 
flattering  our  readers,  when  we  simply  state  a fact, 
which  every  observer  of  experience  must  have  long 
since  noted : to  wit,  that  the  Frenchman  is  the  most 
brilliant,  the  Englishman  the  most  careful,  the  Ameri- 
can the  most  successful — and  therefore,  if  that  be  any 
argument,  as  it  is  commonly  admitted  to  be  the  most 
conclusive — the  very  best  of  billiard  players. 

The  German  game  is  by  far  too  ponderous  and  spec- 
ulative a theme  for  us,  to  attempt  its  discussion : its 
theories  are  no  doubt  correct— at  least,  in  the  absence 
of  other  proof,  we  must  believe  them  so ; but  as  all  hu- 
man attainments  fall  short  of  the  ideal,  their  execution 
does  not  bear  any  due  proportion  to  the  amount  of 
thought  that  has  been  expended  on  the  solution  of  each 
problem.  They  are  continually  attempting  fantastic 
strokes,  which  have  little  else  except  their  difficulty 
to  recommend  them ; and  their  play  has  all  the  labori- 
ousness of  the  Englishman’s,  without  being  directed  to 


28 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


a purpose  of  the  same  practical  u^e.  Their  minds  are 
too  metaphysical  for  a game  in  which  manual  dexter- 
ity, and  mathematical  precision  of  the  eye,  are  the  two 
grand  essentials  of  success ; and,  however  excellent 
their  speculations  on  the  abstract  science  of  the  game 
may  be,  we  find  that  they  are  frequently  aroused  there- 
from by  an  announcement  that  the  of  their  oppo- 
nent has  turned  their  dream  of  victory  into  a dream 
that  is  never  to  be  realized. 

Italian  players  play  very  much  as  the  French ; and 
we  have  never  seen  enough  of  the  Eussian  mode  of 
play  to  pronounce  an  opinion. 

Not  only  national  character,  but  individual  as  well, 
may  be  profitably  studied  in  a billiard  saloon ; for  un- 
der the  genial  and  exciting  influence  of  the  game,  he 
must  be  a very  cold-blooded  or  designing  man  indeed, 
who  will  not  sulfer  his  real  nature,  at  some  moment  of 
interest,  to  break  through  and  exhibit  itself. 

Having  made  these  prefatory  remarks  in  a spirit  of 
conciliation,  and  with  a hope  that  they  may  help  to 
dissipate  some  of  the  well-meaning  but  mistaken  prej- 
udice, which  persists  in  confounding  this  truly  scien- 
tific game  with  the  blind  and  reckless  chances  upon 
which  the  gambler  stakes  and  loses  all  he  has  on  earth 
— health,  character  and  fortune — we  shall  now  pro- 
ceed, as  well  as  we  are  able,  to  a more  particular  con- 
sideration of  the  game  of  billiards  as  an  art. 


CHAPTEE  n. 


ON  TIIE  MACHINERY  OF  BILLIARDS — THE  TABLE  AND  ITS  APPURTEN- 
ANCES— IMPROVEMENTS  IN  THE  CUE  AND  CUSHIONS — THE  OPINION 
OP  A GOOD  AUTHORITY. 

We  will  suppose  that  our  reader  is  a perfect  novice 
in  the  noble  game — one  who  does  not  know  a billiard 
from  a faro  table,  but  imagines  that  there  is  a very 
dangerous  similitude  between  the  morals  and  appear- 
ance of  the  two. 

Let  us  now  strive  to  dissipate  his  ignorance. 

The  Billiaud  Tables  commonly  in  use  are  twelve 
feet  long  by  six  across.  The  length  may  vary,  but  the 
proportions  must  remain  the  same ; that  is  to  say,  the 
table  must  be  twice  as  long  as  it  is  broad. 

The  frame  of  the  ordinary  table  is  made  of  rosewood, 
oalc,  mahogany,  or  other  woods,  at  the  option  of  the 
purchaser.  The  bed  or  surface  of  the  table  is  of  timber, 
marble,  or  slate,  and  should  stand  at  an  elevation  of 
some  two  and  thirty  inches  from  the  floor.  This  bed 
is  covered  with  a fine  green  cloth,  and  around  its  sides 
run  cushions  made  of  some  elastic  substances,  and 
covered  with  a similar  protection.  At  the  four  corners 
of  the  table  there  are  holes  made  large  enough  to  re- 
ceive the  ivory  balls,  and  beneath  these  holes  are 
pockets  of  silken  netting,  into  which  said  balls  may 
safely  drop.  At  each  side,  exactly  in  the  middle  of  the 

m 


80 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


length,  there  are  similar  pockets,  making  six  in  all ; 
and  along  the  top  of  the  sides  you  will  observe  little 
pieces  of  ivory  or  mother-of-pearl  imbedded  at  regular 
intervals,  as  if  to  mark  some  particular  distance  on  the 
board.  These  are  called  the  “sights,”  and  their  use 
will  be  explained  hereafter;  it  is  enough  for  the  pres- 
ent to  observe  that  there  are  six  of  them  along  each 
side^  and  three  at  top  and  bottom. 

Formerly  each  table  had  a “passe”  or  iron  arch 
affixed  to  it,  through  which  the  balls,  at  particular 
periods  of  the  game,  were  obliged  to  be  played ; but 
this  obstructive  and  useless  appendage  has  long  since 
disappeared,  and  its  place  is  supplied  by  what  is  called 
the  “string,” — an  imaginary  line  drawn  across  the  top 
of  the  board,  midway  between  the  corner  and  side 
pockets. 

The  Cue  is  a long,  straight,  tapering  pole  of  well- 
seasoned  white  ash,  tipped  with  leather,  varying  in 
length  from  five  feet  to  five  feet  five  inches,  and  in 
weight  from  seven  to  twenty  ounces.  It  is  very  desir- 
able to  establish  uniformity  in  everything  connected 
with  the  game,  as  otherwise  a change  of  instruments 
may  disarrange  our  previous  calculations,  and  render 
our  experience  futile ; for  this  purpose  we  lay  it  dov/n 
as  a general  rule,  that  the  cue  should  be  two  and  a half 
times  the  weight  of  the  ball  with  which  we  play. 

The  improved  cue,  though  the  scientific  perfection 
of  the  game  depends  so  much  upon  its  mastery,  is 
comparatively  a modern  innovation,  and  was  assailed 
in  its  infancy  with  the  same  arrogant  and  blinded 
venom  which  we  find  in  our  own  day  displayed 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


81 


towards  other  improvements  of  fully  equal  import 
ance.  Be  it  known,  then,  that  up  to  the  com- 
mencement of  the  present  century,  the  mace  was  the 
instrument  with  which  the  game  of  billiards  was 
almost  universally  played.  This  mace  consists  of  a 
square-fronted  box-wobd  head,  attached  to  a fine  ash 
pole,  of  some  four  or  five  feet  in  length ; it  is  still  much 
used  by  ladies  and  children,  in  their  first  attempts  to 
learn  the  rudiments  of  the  game.  But  to  return  to  the 
cue  as  it  was  known  to  our  grandfathers  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  present  century  ; it  was  an  improv(j 
ment  omthe  mace,  we  admit,  being  little  more  than  the 
mace  without  the  head ! It  was  a simple  wooden  pole, 
not  tipped  with  anything  to  break  the  harshness  of  the 
stroke,  and  its  improvement  over  its  predecessor  con- 
sisted chiefly  in  the  fact,  that  in  playing  with  it  the 
idea  of  making  a natural  ‘‘bridge”  with  the  left  hand 
on  the  table  was  first  eliminated. 

When  this  step  in  advance  had  been  made,  it  was 
confidently  asserted  that  the  force  of  progress  could 
no  farther  go;  the  game  of  billiards  had  already 
reached  its  gi'and  climacteric— its  zenith,  and  any  fur- 
ther attempt  at  an  advancement  would  be  a step  in  the 
downward  course. 

And  yet,  at  that  very  time,  a new  discoverer  was 
preparing  to  effect  a thorough  revolution  in  the 
game,  and  one,  which  has  undoubtedly  increased 
the  scientific  capacities  of  play  to  an  immense 
extent.  Monsieur  Minguad,  to  whom  we  are  in- 
debted for  the  present  wonder  working  capabili- 
ties of  the  cue,  was  a professional  billiard  player, 


32 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


who  had  frequent  reason  to  lament  the  ‘^miscues’’  or 
false  strokes  which  were  unavoidable,  where  hard 
wood  came  in  contact  with  slippery  ivory.  To  soften 
down  the  harshness  of  his  stroke  and  to  avoid  these 
slips,  he  conceived  the  idea  of  covering  the  end  of  his 
cue  with  leather ; and  we  can  only  compare  the  dis- 
coveries which  followed,  to  those  made  by  Aladdin, 
when,  in  attempting  to  clean  the  lamp  of  the  genii,  he 
rubbed  it,  and  found  that  by  rubbing  he  had  created  a 
spell  which  placed  an  army  of  magicians  under  his 
control.  No  theoretical  deduction  suggested  to  Min- 
gaud  the  wonderful  phenomena  that  would  result  from 
the  apparently  unimportant  change ; but  we  must  give 
him  credit  for  the  untiring  and  indefatigable  boldness 
with  which  he  pursued  his  chance-made  discoveries  to 
their  legitimate  conclusion. 

How  astonished  were  the  billiard  players  and  the 
billiard  table  manufacturers  of  Mingaud’s  day,  by  the 
results  of  his  invention ! These  latter  gentlemen  then 
thought,  as  still  they  seem  to  think,  that  unto  them 
belonged  a patent  monopoly  for  all  the  improvements 
that  were,  or  could,  or  might  at  any  time  hereafter  be 
made  in  the  noble  game ; and  when  the  cue  with  a leather 
tip  was  first  brought  before  their  august  consideration, 
they  did  not  fail  to  lavish  on  the  discoverer  such  epi- 
thets as  “innovator,”  “dreamer,”  and  others  of  an 
equally  complimentary  character. 

But  facts  are  chiels  that  winna  ding, 

And  downa  be  disputed,” 

as  Eobert  Burns  said  long  ago ; and  when  the  inde- 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


83 


pendent  amateurs  of  Paris  saw  tlie  practical  operation 
of  Mingaud’s  disco  very — when  they  saw  the  ordinary 
laws  of  motion  apparently  reversed  in  obedience  to  the 
whim  of  the  person  wielding  the  (then  modern)  cue — 
when  they  saw  him,  with  a perfect  mastery  of  his  own 
ball,  sometimes  force  it  to  describe  a curve  around  a 
hat  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  board — sometimes 
compel  it  to  make  angles  diametrically  opposed  to  the 
ordinary  laws  as  hitherto  expounded  and  believed — 
when  they  saw  the  same  ball  apparently  possessing 
scarce  enough  force  to  arrive  at  a cushion,  suddenly 
gather  strength  at  the  moment  of  contact,  and  fly  off 
with  increasing  velocity.  When  they  saw  these  things, 
we  say,  it  seemed  to  them  like  magic,  and  it  was  lucky 
for  Mingaud  that  the  statutes  against  sorcery  had  been 
repealed  before  his  day. 

These  miracles,  as  they  then  seemed,  have  since  be- 
come familiar  and  explainable.  Their  exact  principles 
and  practice  will  be  illustrated  in  our  subsequent  engrav- 
ings ; and,  with  such  simple  instructions  as  we  mean 
to  give,  the  merest  neophyte  of  the  present  day  will 
be  enabled,  after  a few  experiments,  to  perform  such 
strokes  as  would  have  won  him  a wide  renown  in  the 
days  of  his  respected  grandfather. 

The  balls  should  be  of  a uniform  size,  and  from 
tv  o and  a quarter  to  two  and  a half  inches  in  diame- 
ter. Those  of  two  and  three-eighths  in  diameter,  if 
made  of  the  best  East  India  ivory,  close-grained  and 
properly  seasoned,  will  average  a weight  of  seven 
ounces  each,  and  are  those  best  suited  to  the  game, 
and  now  most  commonly  in  use.  Great  care  should 
2* 


34 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


be  used  in  tbe  selection  of  the  ivory  out  of  which  these 
balls  are  turned ; for  if  not  perfectly  dry,  or,  in  other 
words,  seasoned,  when  put  upon  the  lathe,  the  moisture 
will  be  drawn  forth  by  the  heated  atmosphere  of  the 
billiard  room,  and  either  an  imperceptible  bias  or  a 
perceptible  crack  will  be  the  result.  In  either  case  the 
ball  will  be  rendered  useless  for  the  purposes  of  scien- 
tific play.  The  ivory  brought  from  the  island  of  Cey- 
lon is  the  best  that  can  be  used  for  billiard  balls,  the 
tusks  being  far  more  solid  than  those  from  Africa,  less 
friable  than  those  from  Continental  Asia,  and  more 
elastic  in  proportion  to  their  density  than  any  other. 
They  are  dreadfully  dear,  however ; and  if  any  invent- 
ive genius  would  discover  a substitute  for  ivory,  pos- 
sessing those  qualities  which  make  it  valuable  to  the 
billiard  player,  he  would  make  a handsome  fortune  for 
himself,  and  earn  our  sincerest  gratitude. 

The  Artificial  Bridge  is  an  instrument  that  should 
never  be  used,  when  it  is  any  way  possible,  without 
serious  inconvenience,  to  form  a natural  bridge  by 
stretching  forward  across  the  table.  It  is  made  of  an 
ash  pole  inserted  in  a cross-head  of  a bridge  form,  with 
three  or  more  notches  in  its  upper  side.  In  any  of 
these  notches  we  may  rest  the  cue,  when  the  balls  are  in 
such  a position  as  not  otherwise  to  be  readily  reached. 

The  Chalk  should  be  carefully  selected  from  the 
best  French  brands;  for  if  impure,  or  retaining  any 
of  the  grit  or  grease  which  we  sometimes  find  in  com- 
mon grocer’s  chalk,  it  is  worse  than  usel^s,  and  will 
rather  increase  than  diminish  the  chances  of  a miscue. 

The  Counters,  if  for  a public  room,  should  be  hung 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


35 


upon  a wire  about  four  and  a balf  feet  above  the  table, 
and  running  lengthwise  with  it.  When  placed  trans- 
versely, as  is  sometimes  done,  they  are  more  apt  to 
distract  the  player’s  eye.  For  a private  room,  where 
no  marker  is  kept,  a light  mahogany  frame  with  the 
counters  hung  on  wires  across  it,  will  be  found  the  most 
convenient : it  can  be  placed  upon  the  chimney-piece, 
or  on  a stand  at  either  end  of  the  table. 

A Billiard  Eoom  for  a single  table  should  be 
twenty-four  feet  long  by  eighteen  wide — ^but  twenty- 
two  by  sixteen  would  do  upon  a pinch.  Why  will 
not  our  architects,  in  their  plans  for  modern  mansions, 
make  suitable  provision  for  that  amusement,  without 
which  no  gentleman’s  establishment  (more  especially 
if  a country  one)  can  now  be  considered  perfect  T 
Even  if  the  builder  of  a house  have  no  taste  for  the 
game  himself,  he  should  look  beforehand,  and  consider 
that  such  an  accommodation  might  form  an  important 
item  in  the  price  which  a succeeding  tenant  would  be 
willing  to  pay  for  it.  For  two  tables,  the  room  ought 
to  be  twenty -four  by  thirty  ; for  three,  twenty-four  by 
forty-two,  and  so  on,  in  proportion  to  the  number  of 
tables.  The  light,  if  possible,  should  descend  from 
above,  through  ample  skylights,  so  as  to  bring  the 
table  within  a general  focus,  and  thus  prevent  any 
shadow  being  thrown  from  the  balls  or  cushions.  The 
gas-light  should  be  raised  about  three  feet  six  inches 
from  the  bed  of  the  table,  and  supplied  with  horizontal 
burners,  as  by  such  an  arrangement  no  shadow  is  cast 
from  the  pipe.  The  floor,  if  carpeted  at  all,  should  be 
covered  with  some  thick  soft  material,  to  prevent  injury 


86 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


to  the  balls  in  case  of  their  ‘^jumping”  the  cushions. 
If  not  carpeted,  as  by  some  preferred,  particular  care 
should  be  taken  to  have  the  heads  of  the  nails  in  the 
floor  driven  down,  for  a like  reason. 

The  Cushions  of  the  table  are  the  last,  but  by  no 
means  the  least,  of  the  appurtenances  of  billiards,  to 
which  we  devote  our  attention.  Indeed,  we  purposely 
omitted  them  from  their  natural  connection,  in  order  to 
give  a clearer  view  of  their  importance,  when  taken  in 
connection  with  the  whole. 

The  game  of  billiards,  as  we  know,  is  a series  of 
mathematical  combinations  and  effects,  depending  in 
part  upon  the  laws  of  motion,  and  in  part  upon  a just 
appreciation  of  the  angles  of  incidence  and  reflexion 
which  are  made  by  the  balls,  as  they  bound  from  side 
to  side,  across,  and  up  and  ^ down  the  board.  Every 
motion  of  the  balls,  supposing  the  machinery  of  the  ta- 
ble to  be  correct,  can  be  calculated  beforehand,  with 
the  precision  of  an  astronomical  thesis.  The  weight  of 
the  ball  is  so  much — the  force  applied  to  it  is  so  much 
— the  angle  at  which  it  strikes  is  one  of  so  many  de- 
grees— and  the  result  must  infallibly  be  so  and  so.  If, 
therefore,  we  could  suppose  the  whole  machinery  of  the 
billiard  table  brought  up  to  the  standard  of  absolute 
perfection,*  and  that  an  automaton  player,  equally 

* We  find,  in  a work  written  by  Edward  Eussell  Mardon,  a cel- 
ebrated English  player,  to  whom  we  shall  have  occasion  to  refer 
hereafter,  a true,  and  most  amusing  account  of  the  origin  of  India- 
rubber  cushions.  It  is  so  good,  that  we  make  no  apology  for  quot- 
ing it  in  extenso : 

One  of  the  inventors  of  the  India-rubber  cushions,  being  a bil- 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


87 


perfect,  could  be  made,  tbe  game  would  then  lose  ‘‘tlio 
delightful  flavor  of  uncertainty”  which,  even  with  the 
best  of  players,  gives  to  it  its  present  excitement  and 
zest,  and  would  become  a congeries  of  propositions,  as 
dry  and  uninteresting  as  the  tables  of  arithmetic.  To 
the  imperfections  of  our  physical  and  mental  nature — 
to  the  variability  of  our  nervous  condition,  and  the 
misjudgments  of  the  eye,  we  owe  that  admixture  of  un- 
certainty which  forms  the  highest  zest  of  all  cultivated 
and  refined  amusements. 

Until  very  recently  indeed,  the  cushions  used,  were 
notoriously  and  grossly  defective.  Those  made  of 
cloth,  from  their  undue  passiveness  and  want  of  elas- 

liard-table  manufacturer,  as  well  as  an  excellent  player,  and  quite 
capable  of  judging  correctly,  respecting  the  precision  of  an  angle, 
placed  his  maiden  cushions  on  a table  of  his  own,  and  proceeded,  ere 
they  were  exhibited,  to  try  their  effect.  The  balls  had  not  been 
many  times  struck,  before  the  incorrectness  of  the  angle  became  ap- 
parent, and  their  immediate  removal  was  contemplated.  The  table, 
however,  having  been  engaged  by  gentlemen  at  a given  hour,  and 
the  intervening  time  not  allowing  of  their  being  replaced  by  others, 
the  cushions  were  permitted  to  remain.  The  gentlemen  arrived — they 
commenced  playing.  The  speed,  the  extraordinary  speed,  filled  them 
with  amazement ; and,  as  the  games  went  on,  their  delight  kept 
pace  with  their  surprise.  The  inventor  smiled,  and,  if  I am  rightly 
informed,  thus  expressed  himself:  ‘If  the  public  is  pleased,  the 
cushions  may  as  well  remain.’  But,  had  the  table,  upon  which  the 
experimental  cushions  were  been  first  played  uponhy  scientific 

players,  the  absurdity  would  have  been  at  once  condemned ; their 
removal  would  instantly  have  taken  place ; and  cushions,  too  fast  to 
be  correct,  would  never  have  disgraced  a game,  whose  beauties  and 
scientific  properties  are  governed  by,  and  wholly  dependent  up 014. 
the  truth  of  an  angle.” 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


d8 

ticity,  had  the  effect  of  deadening  the  original  force,  to 
an  extent  which  made  the  angle  of  reflexion  incalcula- 
bly more  obtuse  than  that  of  incidence  : while,  on  the 
other  hand,  those  made  of  India-rubber,  from  their  ex- 
cessive elasticity  and  resistance,  permitted  the  imping- 
ing ball  to  bury  itself  too  deeply  in  their  surface — thus 
the  ball,  as  it  were,  extemporizing  a cushion  in  front 
of  ity  and  rebounding  at  an  angle  more  acute  than 
the  angle  at  which  it  struck.  To  India-rubber,  as  at 
first  used — that  is  to  say,  in  its  raw  condition — there 
were  serious  atmospherical  objections;  in  frosty  weath- 
er it  became  as  hard  as  an  adamantine  democrat,  and 
required  to  be  thawed  out  semi-hourly,  by  the  applica- 
tion of  tin  tubes  filled  with  boiling  water ; while  in 
sultry  summer  days,  the  rubber  melted,  and  assumed 
the  consistency  of  baker’s  dough — ^for  which  the  reme- 
dy, if  any,  would  seem  to  be  a semi-hourly  icing.  In 
the  intermediate  intervals  between  these  various  opera- 
tions, it  must  be  evident  that  the  cushion,  so  boiled  or 
iced,  would  present  a different  consistency  each  mo- 
ment, and,  therefore,  must  necessarily  reflect  the  im- 
pinging balls  at  various  angles;  and  thus,  no  amount 
of  experience  could  enable  a player  to  counteract  by 
calculation  the  radical  defect ; for  his  ball,  striking  at 
an  angle  of  40°,  when  the  cushion  was  very  warm, 
might  slide  off  at  the  angle  20°  ; while,  striking  at  the 
same  angle,  when  the  cushion  was  a trifle  colder,  it 
would  be  tossed  back  at  the  angle  of  50° — and  so 
on,  through  all  the  varieties  of  heat  and  cold.* 

* In  a work  on  billiards,  published  as  long  since  as  1844,  by 
Edward  Russell  Mardon,  a famous  English  player,  we  find  some 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


89 


Objections  of  a like  nature,  tbougb  arising  from  dif- 
ferent causes,  attacked  to  all  the  other  cushions  which 
had  been  devised  at  various  times  and  by  various  per- 
sons, with  a view  to  remedy  this  admitted  evil ; until 
at  last,  the  writer,  a billiard-player,  who  had 
suffered  much  from  the  irregularities  which  were  be- 
yond his  control,  and  which  often  rendered  his  most 
careful  play  of  no  avail — determined  to  try  whether 
his  practical  experience  of  the  evil  might  not  enable 
him  to  hit  upon  a remedy ; and  was  at  last  fortunate 
enough  to  discover  a combination  of  substances  which 
seemed  to  supply  the  long  sought  for  desideratum. 

That  his  discovery  was  a valuable  one  was  proved 
by  the  eagerness  with  which  the  established  manufac- 
turers of  billiard  tables  laid  hold  of,  and  appropriated 

observations,  wbicb  we  quote  for  the  support  of  our  remarks.  He 
is  speaking  of  the  necessity  of  correct  cushions  and  graduated 
strengths : 

In  order  that  success  may  be  insured,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
speed  of  the  bed  of  the  table  and  the  return  from  the  cushion  should 
be  equal ; and  that  they  should,  of  course,  continue  so  from  day  to 
day  ; but  I am  informed  by  a maker  of  experience,  intelligence,  and 
close  observation,  that  cushions,  stuffed  with  India-rubber,  are  so 
susceptible  of  change  of  temperature,  that  the  effect  of  it  has  even 
been  experienced  during  the  continuance  of  a match.  Thus  the 
best  of  strengths  at  eleven  in  the  morning,  might  prove  the  worst 
of  strengths  at  five  in  the  afternoon !”  * * * How  wretched, 
to  a player  possessing  an  eye  accustomed  to  geometrical  demonstra- 
tion, must  appear  the  running  of  the  balls,  when  returning  from 
cushions  so  palpably  untrue  ; and  how  mortifying  to  witness  the  un- 
favorable result  of  a well-played  stroke,  that  ought,  with  correctness 
of  angle,  to  have  insured  the  winning  of  the  game.’- 


40 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


its  improvements.  That  the  cushions  formerly  in  use 
were  defective  and  irregular,  had  never  hitherto  been 
denied.  But  when  the  inventor  announced  his  inten- 
tion of  protecting  his  discovery  by  a patent,  and  thus 
reaping  some  portion  of  the  reward  of  experiments 
which,  though  now  successful,  had  not  been  carried  on 
without  much  anxiety  and  expense — and  when  the 
protecting  patent  was  at  length,  despite  their  combined 
opposition,  granted  to  him, — the  whole  merits  of  the 
case  were  changed,  and  the  cushions  formerly  con- 
demned as  irregular  were  extolled  as  the  acme  of  per- 
fection, while  his  combination — which  they  had  pirated 
and  used,  so  long  as  they  could  do  so  without  lender- 
ing  themselves  liable  to  the  penalties  of  the  law — be- 
came the  object  of  their  united  defamation.  In  fact,  it 
seemed  as  if  the  guild  of  ‘4'*egular  manufacturers,”  as 
they  called  themselves,  considered  that  to  them  be- 
longed a “heaven-born  right”  to  be  the  sole  intro- 
ducers of  any  improvement  into  their  particular  branch 
of  mechanics ; and  though  they  failed  themselves  to 
make  the  improvements  which  were  needed,  they  were 
determined  that  no  “ outsider”  should  shame  their  in- 
efficiency by  proclaiming  in  his  own  name  a discovery 
from  which  a new  era  in  the  game  of  billiards  should 
be  dated.  If  the  inventor  would  have  sold  his  patent- 
right  to  them,  they  were  prepared  to  pay  liberally  (so 
they  said)  for  its  use  ; but  as  he  had  no  confidence  in 
their  professions,  and  no  guarantee  that  they  would 
not,  from  motives  of  a mistaken  economy,  supply  an 
inferior  combination  to  that  specified  in  his  patent, 
(thereby  injuring  his  discovery  in  public  estimation,) 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


41 

tlie  discoverer  declined  to  make  any  arrangement  of 
the  sort,  and  from  that  moment  it  became  tbe  object 
of  bis  opponents  to  destroy  tbe  favorable  impression 
wbicb  the  combination  cushions  bad  already  made, 
wherever  used. 

But  as  this  may  be  regarded  as  an  affair  of  private 
competition,  and  as  tbe  billiard-playing  public  have 
given  an  emphatic  verdict  in  favor  of  the  invention, 
the  subject  may  be  dismissed  for  the  present. 

The  author  does  so  the  more  gladly,  from  the  per- 
sonal nature  of  the  discussion.  He  would  have  avoided 
it  altogether,  had  not  the  frequent  publications  made 
on  the  other  side,  of  a defamatory  nature,  rendered 
this  simple  statement  due  to  justice,  and  to  the  merits 
of  a case  in  which  all  who  would  promote  the  scien- 
tific development  of  Billiards,  must  be  deeply  inter- 
ested. 

Of  the  further  improvements  made  in  the  Model 
Tables  which  bear  his  name,  the  author  is  restrained 
from  speaking  by  motives  which  can  be  easily  appre- 
ciated. He  will  only  say  that  every  subsequent  im- 
provement in  the  models  (improvements  since  ratified 
and  secured  to  him  by  the  grant  of  additional  patents), 
was  dictated  by  practical  inconveniences  which  he  ex- 
perienced in  the  old ; and  referring  the  reader  to  an 
article  from  the  Scientific  American,  dated  Dec.  23d, 
1855,  and  descriptions  of  the  improvements  which  he 
has  subsequently  patented,  which  will  be  found  in  the 
Appendix,  he  will  now  take  his  leave  of  the  machinery 
of  the  game  of  billiards,”  and  apply  himself  to  its 
practical  and  scientific  illustration. 


CHAPTEE  III. 


HE  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OP  THE  GAME  DEFINED,  WITH  A VIEW  TO 
THEIR  PRACTICAL  APPLICATION  IN  THE  DIAGRAMS  WHICH  ARE  TO 
FOLLOW. 

The  art  of  playing  billiards  must  be  taught  by  prac- 
tical experience  ; no  amount  of  intellectual  study  can 
impart  to  a novice  the  manual  dexterity  and  adroitness 
wliicb  are  essential  to  the  accomplishment  even  of  the 
very  simplest  strokes.  But  a student  may  save  him- 
self months — we  had  almost  written  years — of  labor- 
ious investigation  and  experiment,  by  learning  thor- 
oughly, beforehand,  the  principles  of  the  science  which 
he  is  afterwards  to  practice  and  master  as  an  art  It 
will  be  no  small  gain  for  him  if  these  pages  instruct 
him  how  to  start  right,  from  the  commencement— if  he 
is  made  to  understand  what  he  will  be  required  to  do, 
before  he  attempts  to  do  it ; and  if  he  is  given  such  an 
intelligent  view  of  the  game  as  will  cause  him  to  ap- 
preciate, from  the  outset,  the  value  of  the  different  ex- 
periences which  each  successive  stroke  will  give. 

Wherever  it  is  possible  for  the  student  to  place 
himself  under  a competent  professional  instructor,  dur- 
ing the  first  month  of  his  noviciate,  he  should  by  no 
means  neglect  to  avail  himself  of  the  immense  advan- 
tages which  may  be  thus  acquired.  He  will  be  given 
the  full  benefit  of  his  teacher’s  experience,  and  may 
[42] 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


43 


thus  make  more  scientific  progress  in  a month  than 
another  player,  not  possessed  of  such  assistance,  could 
make  in  a year.  The  original  discovery  of  any  one  of 
Euclid’s  propositions  might  be  the  task  of  a lifetime, 
and  could  only  be  achieved  by  a person  of  mathemati- 
cal genius ; but  with  the  aid  of  an  instructor,  and  the 
benefit  of  his  experience,  a boy  of  very  ordinary 
powers  may  master  the  whole  six  books  in  as  many 
months. 

Not  only  the  novice,  but  the  average  amateur  also, 
would  do  well  to  avail  himself  of  the  assistance  of  a 
tutor.  As  a month’s  teaching  would  raise  the  novice 
to  the  rank  of  an  average  player,  so  the  same  instruc- 
tion would  elevate  the  average  amateur  to  the  rank  of 
a professional  master. 

The  present  chapter  will  be  devoted  more  particu- 
larly to  the  instruction  of  beginners  ; but  we  are  con- 
fident, at  the  same  time,  that  its  careful  perusal  may 
be  of  service  to  all.  For  how  many  are  there  who 
play  billiards  mechanically,  and  execute  the  most 
beautiful  propositions  without  once  pausing  to  exam- 
ine and  admire  the  essential  scientific  beauty  which 
is  involved  in  their  mechanical  play ! Let  them  once 
be  made  aware  of  the  true  principles  of  the  art  which 
they  profess,  and  the  pursuit  of  it  will  forever  after 
yield  them  a double  pleasure.  And  first  let  us  con- 
sider the 

CONDITIONS  OF  A GOOD  ATTITUDE. 

The  acquisition  of  a good  attitude  is  a point  of 
the  first  importance  to  the  young  student  of  billiards  • 


44 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


and  yet,  from  its  purely  physical  nature,  is  a subject 
wliicb  almost  defies  the  control  of  any  written  rules. 
There  are  peculiarities  of  height  and  figure  which  ren- 
der the  rules  that  would  be  excellent  in  one  case, 
totally  inapplicable  in  the  other  ; thus  it  is  impossible 
to  define  by  inches  the  distance  at  which  a player 
should  stand  from  the  table,  when  about  to  strike ; for 
not  only  will  the  different  statures  of  men  cause  a dif- 
ference of  position — but,  even  with  the  same  player, 
different  positions  of  the  ball  will  call  for  correspond- 
ing changes  of  attitude. 

Under  these  circumstances,  the  best  we  can  do  is 
to  give  a general  direction,  which  each  student  must 
apply  for  himself  to  his  own  particular  case.  Let  him 
stand  with  his  left  foot  slightly  advanced,  his  left  arm 
extended  and  resting  on  the  table  to  form  a bridge, 
and  his  body,  not  facing  the  table  squarely,  but  form- 
ing an  acute  angle  with  the  side  at  which  he  stands  ; 


The  GtAme  of  Billiaeds. 


45 


let  him  relax  all  the  muscles  of  his  limbs  into  their 
usual  and  most  natural  posture — ^for  rigidity  of  body 
is  at  all  times  awkward  and  ungraceful,  and  seriously 
interferes  with  play.  The  cue,  though  allowed  to  rest 
loosely  in  the  hand  at  the  time  of  drawing  back,  should 
be  held  firmly  at  the  moment  of  contact  with  the  ball ; 
and  in  all  strokes,  except  the  “jump”  and  “perpen- 
dicular forct.,”  the  direction  of  the  cue  should  be  main- 
tained as  much  as  possible  in  the  horizontal.  The 
striking  motion  should  be  confined  to  the  arm,  and 
chiefly  to  the  lower  division  of  it;  the  “shoulder- 
hitters,”  in  billiards,  or  those  persons  who  throw  their 
bodies  forward  after  the  cue,  would  do  well  to  re- 
nounce the  “noble  game,”  and  turn  their ‘evident 
capacities  to  what  its  professors  call  “ the  noble  art  of 
self-defence.”  Their  shoulder-hitting  might  make  them 
first  rate  pugilists,  but  totally  unfits  them  for  a game 
in  which  delicacy  of  touch  and  firmness  of  body,  eye 
and  purpose,  are  the  grand  essentials  of  success.  The 
body  should  remain  immovable  as  a rock,  while  the 
right  arm  swings  to  and  fro  at  a sufficient  distance  to 
avoid  contact  with  the  side,  when  advancing.  All 
spasmodic  motion  and  muscular  contortions  should  be 
avoided ; mere  bodily  strength  in  the  player  will  not 
give  strength  to  his  stroke ; the  quantity  of  niotion 
imparted  to  the  ball  will  correspond  precisely  with 
the  weight  of  the  cue  multiplied  by  the  velocity  with 
which  it  is  advancing  at  the  instant  of  contact ; and 
therefore  the  only  force  required  from  the  player,  even 
for  the  strongest  stroke,  is  force  enough  to  cause  his 
cue  to  move  forward  at  a rate  of  speed  which,  multi- 


46 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


plied  by  its  gravity,  will  give  tbe  required  result.  As 
aforesaid,  this  motion  should  emanate  especially  from 
the  fore-arm.  It  is  impossible  to  describe  exactly  what 
we  wish  to  convey ; but  if  our  readers,  when  striking, 
will  imagine  that  they  are  throwing  a lasso,  and  give 
the  same  quick,  steady  force  of  wrist  to  the  cue  that 
is  required  in  flinging  the  coil,  they  will  understand 
exactly  what  we  mean. 

It  is  owing  to  the  knowledge  of  this  secret,  that 
men,  physically  weak,  are  frequently  more . than  a 
match  in  billiard-strength  for  players  who  have  the 
proportions  of  Hercules,  and  the  “ dead  pull”  of  Samp- 
son when  he  brought  down  the  pillars  of  the  temple 
on  the  heads  of  the  assembled  heathen. 

The  attitude  of  ladies,  when  playing,  is  much  sim- 
pler, from  the  fact  that,  as  they  almost  universally 
use  the  mace,  they  are  not  called  upon  to  lean  forward 
to  form  a bridge  with  the  left  hand.  The  end  of  the 
mace  which  they  hold,  should  be  rested  between  the 
thumb  and  second  finger,  in  such  a position  that  the 
eye  may  run  along  it  from  its  top  to  the  point  of  con- 
tact ; the  head  of  the  mace  should  be  in  contact  with 
the  ball  at  the  moment  of  playing;  and  when  the 
purpose  of  the  stroke  is  determined,  the  forefinger 
should  be  brought  firmly  down  upon  the  end.  It  is 
quickness,  not  actual  physical  force,  that  imparts 
strength  to  the  ball,  whether  shoved  with  the  mace 
or  struck  by  the  cue.  As  for  the  attitude  in  which  a 
lady  should  stand  while  playing  billiards,  no  instruc- 
tion is  needed ; perfect  ease  is  perfect  grace,  and  per- 
fect ease  of  position  is  the  grand  desideratum  for  th^ 


The  Game  of  Billiakhs. 


47 


billiard-player.  As  the  ladies  are  always  graceful,  or 
at  least  study  to  be  so,  they  will  naturally  observe 
that  ease  of  attitude  which  it  is  only  necessary  to  en- 
force upon  the  ruder  and  more  awkward  sex. 

To  the  male  novice  we  would  say : avoid  all  stiff- 
ness and  parade — avoid  all  affected  dignity.  Let  your 
dress  and  attitude  be  such  as  to  afford  your  body  a 
perfect  mastery  of  its  own  movements.  A practiced 
eye  can  discriminate  at  the  first  glance  on  entering  a 
billiard-room,  which  is  the  really  skilful  player,  and 
which  the  pretentious  bungler,  by  merely  noting  the 
contrast  which  the  good  player’s  easy  grace  presents 
to  the  rigid  formalism  of  the  other.  Paganini,  in  his 
younger  days,  when  he  taught  the  violin,  used  to  give 
his  pupils  six  months  time  in  which  to  practice  how  to 
hold  the  instrument  and  bow.  When  they  understood 
that  thoroughly,  he  could  teach  them,  he  said,  the 
remainder  of  the  art  in  a few  weeks. 

. Now,  without  requiring  so  long  an  apprenticeship — 
without,  in  fact,  requiring  any  apprenticeship  at  all — 
if  the  student  will  only  allow  himself  to  stand  in  his 
natural  position,  we  insist  upon  it  that  the  attitude  and 
mode  of  holding  the  cue  are  just  as  important  to  the 
billiard-player,  as  Paganini  pronounced  the  things 
aforesaid  to  be  to  the  aspiring  musician. 

The  left  foot  should  be  pushed  slightly  forward, 
pointing  straight  ahead,  while  the  right  is  withdrawn, 
and  turned  outwards,  at  whatever  angle  is  habitual 
and  most  convenient  to  the  player.  The  body  should 
be  fairly  balanced,  for  without  this  equilibrium,  we 
can  neither  have  grace  nor  ease.  The  left  arm,  when 


48 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


necessary,  should  be  advanced  and  rested  on  the  table 
— the  left  hand  being  extended,  as  in  the  cut,  to  form 
a “ bridge.” 


The  bridge  is  formed  by  placing  the  left  hand  about 
six  inches  from  the  ball  to  be  played  on,  and  then 
drawing  it  up  until  it  rests  on  the  ends  of  the  fingers 
and  wrist,  or  ball  of  the  hand,  at  an  angle  which  is 
here  represented.  The  thumb  is  then  brought  up 
firmly  to  the  forefinger,  so  as  to  form  a groove  in 
which  the  cue  may  slide.  The  wrist,  and  points  of 
the  fingers,  should  be  moderately  pressed  upon  the 
table,  to  give  strength  and  solidity,  and  then  you  have 
a “bridge”  over  which  you  may  travel  pleasantly  and 
safely,  into  the  golden  realm  of  billiards. 

The  right  arm,  holding  the  cue,  should  be  a little 
withdrawn,  bent  so  as  to  form  an  obtuse  angle  at  the 
elbow,  and  kept  sufficiently  far  from  the  body  to  ren- 
der its  advance  and  retreat  unimpeded;  for  if  the 
player  fall  into  the  habit  of  allowing  the  arm,  while 
striking,  to  rub  against  the  side,  he  may  as  well  give 
up  all  further  attempts  to  learn  the  game,  until  he  shall 
have  first  unlearned  that  habit.  The  cue  should  be 
held  firmly,  but  without  effort,  in  the  hand,  and  moder- 
ately pressed  upon  the  bridge,  so  as  to  avoid  vibration 
while  in  the  act  of  making  the  stroke ; especially,  in 
all  attempts  at  making  the  “force,”  “following,”  and 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


49 


‘‘twist”  strokes,  wkicli  will  be  described  hereafter. 
Our  readers  may  get  a better  idea  of  our  meaning  by 
studying  the  accompanying  plate,  and  placing  them- 
selves in  what  we  may  literally  call  “ the  striking 
position,”  which  the  gentleman  there  occupies. 

The  attitude  in  which  a lady  stands  while  playing 
billiards,  is  less  difficult  to  explain,  and  may  almost  be 
studied  from  the  illustration.  The  mace  is  a simpler 
instrument,  inasmuch  as  it  requires  no  bridge  to  be 
formed,  and,  consequently,  no  exertion  in  leaning  or 
stretching  forward  over  the  table  ; but  where  a lady 
uses  the  cue  in  playing,  as  we  counsel  them  to  do,  the 
same  rules  will  of  course  apply  to  her  that  we  have 
laid  down  in  the  preceding  paragraphs. 

But  to  return  to  our  directions  for  gentlemen,  who 
really  need  more  guiding:  let  the  arm  hang  free,  and 
strike  with  the  whole  of  it ; but  keep  the  body  firm, 
and  do  not  let  the  right  shoulder  move  forward  in  the 
same  direction  with  the  arm  when  you  strike.  Let 
the  stroke  be  delivered  in  an  even,  easy;  and  regular 
manner.  Avoid  all  spasmodic  movements,  for  they 
spoil  the  aim.  Do  not  bring  the  end  of  the  cue  too 
close  to  the  ball.  Let  there  be  a distance  of  from  one 
to  two  inches  between  them,  depending  on  the  charac- 
ter of  the  shot  you  wish  to  make. 

Select  a cue  in  harmony  with  your  physical  powers, 
and  accustom  yourself  as  much  as  possible  to  play 
with  cues  of  a similar  weight.  If  you  play  regularly 
in  any  billiard- saloon,  they  will  be  happy  to  keep  a 
cue  for  your  especial  use.  From  fifteen  to  sixteen 
ounces  are  fair  weights,  according  to  the  size  of 


50 


The  Game  oy  Billiakbs. 


the  balls  now  used  in  play.  A cue,  if  too  heavy, 
will  paralyze  the  nerves  of  the  arm  and  render 
them  unable  to  estimate  correctly  the  amount  of  force 
employed : if  too  light,  on  the  other  hand,  it  will  call 
for  an  amount  of  force  so  great  as  to  be  incompatible 
with  a steady  and  deliberate  aim.  Finally,  let  the 
cue  be  straight,  for  any  crookedness  in  this  instrument 
distracts  the  eye,  and  may  seriously  interfere  with  the 
manual  correctness.  The  cues  with  inlaid  and  orna- 
mental stocks  are  more  to  be  admired  than  desired. 
As  memorials  of  either  friendship  or  victory  they  are 
most  excellent ; but  for  playing — give  us  the  simple 
ash  pole,  tipped  with  leather. 

In  a little  poem  in  the  Appendix,  entitled  Atti- 
tude is  Everything,”  the  writer — a celebrated  amateur 
of  this  city,  and  one  for  whose  many  favors  we  here  de- 
sire to  make  our  sincere  acknowledgments — has  hit 
off  admirably  some  of  the  leading  peculiarities  of  style 
which  disfigure  even  the  most  careful  play.  His 
poem  fitly  illustrates  the  adage  that  nothing  forbids 
us  to  tell  sober  truths  with  a laughing  lip ; and.  as  we 
could  add  nothing  to  the  force  of  his  descriptive  sar- 
casm, it  is  better  to  let  our  readers  have  his  observa- 
tions— with  all  which  wg  entirely  agree — ^put  forward 
in  his  own  pleasant  style.  The  poem,  with  copious 
illustrations,  will  be  found  in  the  Appendix. 

The  leather  is  an  important  feature  of  the  cue — in 
fact,  an  all-important  one  to  any  player  who  deals 
much  in  the  strokes  which  are  technically  described  as 
‘‘forcing,”  “twisting,”  and  “following.”  With  an  in- 
terior leather,  his  play  will  be  paralyzed  by  mis-cues. 


' The  Game  of  Billiards.  51 

In  selecting  the  cue-leather,  choose  from  the  best 
French  brands,  such  as  possess  the  finest  fibre,  and  are 
at  the  same  time  solid,  pliable,  and  elastic ; and  see  to 
it  that  you  have  a good,  solid  under-leather,  say  a six- 
teenth of  an  inch  in  thickness,  as  that  will  save  the 
point  of  the  cue  from  breaking  * away,  and  will  last 
longer  than  a thin  one.  Before  being  fitted  on  to  the 
cue,  they  should  be  thoroughly  well  beaten  out  on  a 
lapstone,  so  as  to  prevent  them  from  spreading  in  the 
course  of  play;  but  that  side  of  them  which  is  next 
the  cue  should  be  roughened  with  a file  or  sandpaper, 
as  also  the  cue  itself,  in  order  that  the  adhesive  wax 
may  be  able  to  take  good  hold.  Each  must  decide  for 
himself  the  exact  degree  of  convexity  in  the  leather 
which  will  best  suit  his  play.  When  the  point  of  the 
leather  becomes  glazed  from  excessive  play,  a little 
sandpaper  should  be  used  to  roughen  it,  so  that  the 
chalk  may  stick. 

To  the  best  of  our  ability,  we  have  now  placed  our 
reader  in  a good  attitude,  and  given  him  such  an  in- 
strument as  he  requires  for  the  commencement  of  his 
studies.  Let  us  now  caution  him  against  two  opposite 
faults,  into  which  beginners  are  too  apt  to  fall.  Some 
strike  too  precipitately,  delivering  the  stroke  before 
their  cue  has  got  properly  rested  on  the  bridge.  Others, 
at  the  imminent  risk  of  lockjaw,  keep  sawing  their 
cue  backwards  and  forwards  on  the  bridge  aforesaid, 
at  least  a score  of  times,  before  they  can  screw  their 
courage  up  to  the  striking  point.  We  sometimes 
almost  fear  to  see  their  thumbs  drop  off,  worn  through 
and  through  by  this  protracted  friction.  In  a brass- 


UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS^ 
LIBRARY 


52 


The  G-ame  of  Billiards. 


finder’s  store  or  marble-mantle  manufactory,  these 
polishers”  would  be  invaluable.  Aim  calmly,  strike 
firmly  but  gently,  and  content  yourself  at  first  with 
centre-strokes : when  you  have  thoroughly  mastered 
these,  you  will  find  the  “ follow  ” and  “ force,”  the 
‘‘jump”  and  “twist”  strokes  easy;  but  if  you  attempt 
to  learn  them  all  together,  you  will  get  them  so 
jumbled  and  confused  in  your  mind  as  to  be  indistin- 
guishable forever  after.  Bear  this  in  mind-  also,  that 
in  all  ordinary  strokes  the  cue  should  be  held  as  much 
as  possible  in  a horizontal  position.  The  perpendicu- 
lar, force  and  jump  strokes,  are,  of  course,  excepted. 


When  you  have  mastered  the  centre-stroke,  you  will 
then  begin  to  study  the  different  effects  which  differ- 
ent modes  of  striking  will  produce.  These  you  will 
find  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  plate,  and  we 
shall  endeavor  to  explain,  not  only  what  the  effects 
will  be,  but  the  principles  from  which  the  different 
phenomena  take  their  rise,  and  which  are  necessary  to 
account  for  them. 

The  cne  stroke,  marked  1,  is  called  the  centre- 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


68 


STROKE,  and  supposing  the  ball  so  struck,  to  meet  the 
object  ball  “dead  full,”  or  strike  it  in  the  centre,  the 
motion  originally  imparted  to  the  cue-ball  would  be 
transmitted  to  the  other,  and  the  cue-ball  would  come 
to  a full  pause,  while  the  object-ball  advanced  in  the 
same  right  line,  and  with  a force  equal  to  th^lt  origin- 
ally imparted  to  the  cue-ball — minus  the  friction  of  the 
intervening  space  and  the  amount  necessary  to  over- 
come the  specific  gravity  of  both.  But  the  friction  oi 
the  table,  meanwhile,  has  imparted  a rotatory  motion 
to  the  cue-ball  independent  of  the  original  impelling 
force ; so  that  when  the  impelling  force  is  all  transmit- 
ted to  the  object-ball,  the  individual  rotatory  motion 
will  still  remain,  and  the  cue-ball  may  rotate  a few 
lengths  farther  until  this  has  been  exhausted. 

The  stroke  (3)  is  called  the  following  stroke  ; and 
supposing  the  cue-ball  to  be  impelled  against  the  ob- 
ject-ball by  such  a force,  it  will  continue  to  follow  or 
advance  in  the  same  right  line  with  the  object  ball, 
although  with  a decreased  momentum.  This  arises 
from  the  fact,  that  by  striking  the  cue-ball  above  the 
centre  of  gravity,  we  impart  to  it  a forward  rotatory 
motion  wholly  independent  of  the  impelling  force. 
When,  therefore,  the  striking  force  is  transmitted  to 
the  object-ball,  this  motion  still  remains  unimpared, 
and  causes  it  to  advance  irrespective  of  the  loss  of 
force  of  which  it  was  originally  independent. 

The  stroke  (4)  is  called  the  jump,  and  is  of  less  im 
portance  than  the  others.  It  causes  the  ball  to  spring 
up  more  or  less  from  the  table,  according  to  the  degree 
of  strength  with  which  it  has  been  struck.  The  jump- 


64 


The  Game  cf  Billiards. 


ing  motion  is  thus  imparted  on  the  same  principle  that 
a ball  will  rebound,  if  flung  or  dropped  against  any 
elastic  surface,  or  if  possessed  of  any  elasticity  itself. 

The  stroke  (5)  we  may  call  the  perpendicular 
FORCE,  and  is  one  of  very  difficult  accomplishment, 
and  therefore  seldom  played,  except  in  the  French 
carom  game,  where  no  pushing  strokes  are  allowed. 
Still,  there  may  be  cases — the  player’s  ball,  for  in- 
stance, being  placed  between  two  other  balls,  and  in 
such  close  proximity  to  both  that  a carom  can  be  effec- 
ted by  no  other  means* — where  it  will  be  useful  to 
understand  it.  Its  principle  is  identical  with — or 
rather  the  exact  converse  of — that  on  which  the  Force 
is  made,  and  as  No.  2 is  the  most  common,  we  may 
allow  its  exjflanation  to  stand  for  both. 

Stroke  2 is  called  the  force,  and  is  one  of  the  most 
beautiful  and  useful  in  the  game.  By  striking  the 
ball  below  the  centre,  and  with  a quick,  sharp  force, 
two  completely  distinct  and  even  antagonistic  move- 
ments are  imparted  to  the  ball.  The  one  urging  it  to 
advance  in  the  direction  of  the  impelling  force — the 
other  inclining  it  to  rotate  backwards  on  its  individual 
axis.  Let  us  imagine  a wheel,  for  instance,  with  the 
rim  taken  off,  and  suspended  on  its  axis  in  the  air, 
and  we  shall  then  understand  the  principle  in  a 

* The  reader  will  see,  in  one  of  the  succeeding  diagrams,  a very 
curious  instance  of  this  necessity,  which  actually  occurred  to  the 
author  when  he  was  playing  a match  in  San  Francisco  against  M. 
Damon,  who  was  then  esteemed  the  ablest  French  billiard-player  in 
California.  Had  he  then  failed  to  make  the  perpendicular  force, 
the  game  would  in  all  probability  have  gone  against  him. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


55 


moment.  The  same  principle  will  also  apply  to  side 
and  quarter  strokes,  and  it  is  therefore  the  more  im- 
portant to  have  it  clearly  understood  from  the  com* 
mencement. 


If  we  strike  the  cart-wheel  fair  in  the  centre  (No.  1), 
its  only  tendency,  supposing  it  to  be  suspended  in  the 
air,  will  be  to  advance  forward  in  the  direction  of  the 
impelling  force.  If  we  strike  it  forward  and  abovg  the 
centre  (No.  8),  two  tendencies  will  be  imparted ; the 
one  to  advance  in  the  direction  of  the  force — the  other 
to  rotate  forward  on  its  own  axis.  In  the  FOLLOWING 
STROKE,  which  is  the  same,  when  the  force  is  imparted 
to  the  other  ball,  the  rotatory  motion  still  remains  to 
carr}^  the  cue  ball  forward.  If  we  strike  it  downward 
and  forward  (stroke  4),  there  will  be  a tendency  to 
lump  up  from  the  concussion,  and  also  to  advance  in 
a line  v/ith  the  impelling  force.  This  can  be  under- 
f>tood  better  by  striking  an  India-rubber  ball  down- 
ward and  upon  the  side  with  a hammer,  when  the  ball 
is  at  rest  on  any  solid  bed;  it  will  instantly  spring  up, 
and  bound  forward  from  the  point  at  which  it  has 
been  struck.  If  we  strike  one  of  the  spokes  of  the 


66 


The  Gtame  of  Billiards. 


cart  wheel  (No.  5),  almost  perpendicularly  downward 
and  from  above  the  centre^of  gravity,  the  tendency  to 
rotate  backward  would  be  the  only  one  communicated 
to  the  wheel.  But  with  the  ball — which  is  a wheel 
with  an  infinitude  of  spokes — this  tendency  may  be 
paralyzed  or  held  suspended  for  an  indefinite  period 
by  the  forward  force,  but  will  quickly  re-assert  itself, 
and  cause  a retrograde  effect.  If  we  hit  the  wheel 
below  its  centre  of  gravity  (No.  2),  the  double  tendency 
to  move  forward  in  the  direction  of  the  impelling  force 
and  rotate  backward^  will  be  at  once  perceived;  as 
soon,  therefore,  as  the  forward  force  has  been  either 
exhausted  by  the  counteracting  tendency  of  rotation, 
or  imparted  to  another  ball  by  striking  it,  the  wheel 
or  ball  will  tend  to  retrograde  to  the  point  from  which 
it  started. 

Let  this  double  tendency  of  motion — this  active  and 
suspended  force  communicated  to  the  balls,  by  the  act 
and  manner  of  striking — be  attentively  studied,  and  it 
will  greatly  assist  the  billiard-player  to  solve  the  other- 
wise inexplicable  problems  which  will  be  presented  in 
the  very  outset  of  the  game. 

Quite  similar,  or  rather,  quite  analogous  to  the  ef- 
fects produced  by  striking  a ball  either  above  or  below 
its  centre,  on  a line  drawn  through  the  centre,  and 
perpendicular  to  the  bed  of  the  table,  will  be  the  effects 
caused  by  striking  the  ball  either  to  the  right  or  left 
of  the  centre,  on  a line  drawn  horizontally  through 
the  centre,  and  therefore  parallel  with  the  table’s  bed. 
When  the  ball  is  thus  struck,  at  a distance  of  one- 
quarter  or  one-half  from  the  centre,  it  will  have  the 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


57 


double  tendency  to  move  forward  in  the  direction  of 
tbe  impelling  force,  and  rotate  horizontally  toward  the 
side  upon  which  it  has  been  struck.  Thus,  when 
struck  one- quarter  or  one-half  above  or  below  the 
centre  on  the  perpendicular  line,  it  will  rotate  perpen- 
dicularly either  forward  or  backward.  When  struck 
in  a similar  way  on  the  horizontal  central  line,  it  will 
rotate  horizontally  toward  the  side  on  which  it  is 
struck ; but  when  struck  at  one-quarter  or  one  hs^lf. 

Perpendicular. 


on  a line  intermediate  between  the  horizontal  and  per- 
pendicular, it  will  rotate  diagonally,  with  a lateral  and 
following  tendency,  if  struck  above  the  centre ; and 
with  a lateral  and  retrograding  motion  if  struck  below. 
The  foregoing  diagram  may  make  our  meaning  clearer; 
and  it  is  a point  of  such  importance  that,  even  at  the 
risk  of  tediousness,  we  wish  to  impress  it  on  the  stu- 
dent’s mind. 


3* 


68 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


Within  the  circle  which  represents  the  full  side  of  a 
billiard-ball  turned  toward  us,  are  drawn  five  diame- 
ters on  the  following  plan  ; one  perpendicular  to  the 
bed  of  the  table  ; one  horizontal  or  parallel  thereto ; 
and  two^  diagonals,  one  drawn  from  the  left  to  right, 
the  other  from  right  to  left,  and  both  equi-distant  from 
the  horizontal  and  perpendicular  diameters. 

These  diameters  are  intersected  by  concentric  circles 
drawn  respectively,  with  a radius  of  one-eighth  and 
one-fourth  of  the  whole  diameter ; but,  for  simplicity’s 
sake,  we  have  marked  these  | and  meaning  thereby 
the  half  and  the  fourth  of  the  half  diameter.  We  have 
also,  on  the  horizontal,  marked  the  points  at  which  a 
concentric  circle,  with  a radius  of  three-fourths  of  the 
half  diameter  (six-eighths  of  the  whole)  would  intersect; 
and  each  reader,  for  himself,  may  mark  this  point  upon 
the  other  lines,  when  told  to  strike  f above,  below,  or 
to  the  right  or  left.  Both  upon  the  perpendicular  and 
horizontal,  we  have  dotted  off  subdivisions  of  eighths 
of  the  whole  diameter,  and  the  same  may  be  applied 
by  the  reader  to  the  diagonals,  we  only  omitting  them 
in  order  to  avoid  an  appearance  of  complexity.  Other 
authors,  we  know,  have  classified  the  billiard-ball  into 
much  minuter  sections  ; but  the  more  important  subdi- 
visions are  here  given,  and,  with  the  aid  of  -the  wrist 
in  striking,  these  will  be  found  to  answer  for  all  prac- 
tical purposes.  There  are  finer  touches  to  be  sure; 
but  for  the  present  they  would  only  confuse  and  per- 
plex the  student,  and  lead  him  into  attempting  things 
which  are  beyond  his  skill.  The  attempt,  for  instance, 
to  strike  the  ball  outside  of  the  points  marked  ^ on  the, 


The  Game  of  Billiahds. 


59 


various  diameters,  generally  leads  the  novice  into  a 
number  of  miscues;  whereas,  by  striking  within  the 
points  so  marked,  with  a slightly-increased  force  and 
quickness,  the  effects  desired  can  be  produced,  without 
incurring  any  liability  of  the  kind. 

To  abbreviate  as  much  as  possible,  we  shall  have 
recourse  to  initials  only  to  illustrate  our  diagrams.  A, 
standing  for  above  the  centre  ; B,  for  below  it ; E,  to 
the  right  of  it ; L,  to  the  left ; and  D,  for  diagonal. 
The  points  marked  I,  f,  &c.,  &c.,  are  those  at  which 
we  suppose  the  ball  to  be  struck.  As  the  student 
advances,  he  will,  of  course,  ex  necessitate^  devise  new 
lines  and  measures  for  himself.  As  his  mastery  of  the 
cue  becomes  more  perfect,  it  will  reveal  to  him  the 
points  at  which  his  peculiar  play  requires  that  the  ball 
should  be  touched,  to  produce  a desired  effect ; but 
this  explanatory  diagram  was  indispensable  to  a right 
understanding  of  our  subsequent  instructions — though 
we  know  well  that  it  neither  is,  nor  could  any  diagram 
possibly  be,  sufficiently  explicit  for  all  the  exigencies 
of  play.  It  would  require  the  Newtonian  Fluxions  to 
calculate  the  variations  of  the  ball,  when  struck  at 
different  distances  from  the  centre : but  the  reader  can 
readily  bear  in  mind  what  A,  B,  D,  E,  and  L,  will 
hereafter  stand  for. 

The  diagram  following,  (in  which  we  suppose  that 
we  are  looking  down  upon  the  balls)  will  explain 
the  different  motions  imparted  to  the  object-ball  on 
being  struck  by  the  cue-ball,  in  the  manners  which 
are  called,  in  billiard  parlance,  “Full,’’  “Quarter,’ 
“Half,”  and  “Fine.” 


60 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


The  heavy  lines  mark  the  course  in  which  the  cue- 
ball  advances  to  strike  the  object-ball.  The  dotted 
lines  show  the  direction  in  which  the  object-ball  will 
be  driven  by  the  contact.  Let  it  be  remarked  as  well, 
that  in  the  quarter-ball,  half-ball,  and  fine  ball  strokes, 
the  part  of  the  cue-ball  which  strikes  the  object-ball 
will  exactly  correspond  to  the  part  which  is  struck, 
provided  the  balls  be  of  equal  size.  It  is  physically 
impossible  with  your  own  ball  full,  to  strike  the  ob- 
ject-ball quarter.  The  lines  drawn  between  the  cue 
and  object-balls,  in  the  preceding  diagram,  show  the 
exact  relation  which  the  parts  coming  in  contact  must 
bear  each  to  the  other. 

The  principle  exhibited  in  this  diagram  is  the  key 
to  the  hazard  portion  of  the  game.  In  hazards,  we 
may  remark,  that  the  point  to  be  gained  is  to  be  able 
to  make  the  object-ball  move  in  whatever  direction 
you  want  it : while  in  the  carom  game,  you  care  not 
how  the  object-ball  may  move  after  it  has  been  touched 
— so  far  as  that  particular  stroke  is  concerned — pro- 
vided you  can  command  the  curves  and  angles,  force, 
speed,  and  retrogradation  of  your  own  ball. 

We  say  that  the  position  which  the  object-ball  may 
assume  after  being  struck,  is  unimportant  in  the  carom 
game,  so  far  as  that  particular  stroke  is  concerned  ; but 
in  the  management  of  the  balls,  and  the  ability  to  leave 
them  in  a position  favorable  to  the  next  play — or  un- 
favorable to  your  opponent,  if  you  think  it  impossible 
to  count  yourself — the  grand  strength  and  science  of  the 
game  is  found.  Mere  brilliant  strokes”  by  no  means 
constitute  a first-class  scientific  billiard-player ; caution, 


61 


r 'T' 

i'-, 


■) 


Of 

UNSVERSnt  0^  ILimulb 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds.  63 

coolness,  foresight,  and  ability  to  leave  the  balls  in  a 
position  from  which  a good  run  may  be  secured  (if  the 
player  isr  sure  of  his  stroke),  are  of  infinitely  more  im- 
portance. The  really  scientific  player  will  never  per- 
mit himself  to  be  led  astray  by  the  mere  certainty  and 
ease  of  making  one  successful  stroke,  into  a posi- 
tion from  which  no  further  benefit  can  be  expected ; 
he  will  either  forego  all  present  gain  to  himself,  in  order 
to  diminish  the  chances  of  a greater  gain  to  his  adver- 
sary ; or  even  attempt  a more  difficult  play,  from  which 
it  is  likely  some  more  favorable  break  may  ensue.  The 
thorough  master  of  the  game  is  he  who  never  makes  a 
count  without  leaving  the  balls  in  a position  from  which 
another  count  may  be  reasonably  expected ; or,  should 
this  be  imposible,  then  in  such  a position  as  will  ren- 
der the  making  of  a count  by  his  opponent  extremely 
difficult.  From  a break  which  appears  worthless  to 
the  novice,  the  scientific  player  may  make  a splendid 
run ; and  he  does  so  from  attending  to  the  proverb, 
which  tells  us  all  “ to  look  before  we  leap.  ” 

When  the  player  thoroughly  understands  the  fore- 
going diagram,  and  is  able  to  execute  the  necessary 
strokes,  we  may  call  him  a master  of  the  hazard  game. 
It  is  not  our  intention  to  give  any  regular  instructions 
on  this  portion  of  the  game,  further  than  those  already 
given  as  to  the  modes  of  striking  the  cue  and  object- 
balls  ; for  when  the  player  has  perfected  himself  in  the 
execution  of  the  theories  herein  laid  down,  he  will  only 
have  to  aim  steadily  at  the  exact  part  of  the  ball  to  be 
struck,  to  be  certain  of  success.  In  doing  so,  he  may 
assist  himself  by  drawing  an  imaginary  line  from  the 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


centre  of  tlie  pocket  aimed  at,  througli  the  centre  of 
the  object-ball;  and  where  that  diameter  terminates,  is 
the  exact  point  at  which  yon  must  strike,  to  accomplish 
the  hazard. 

By  attending  to  the  principles  already  laid  down, 
even  the  novice  can  become  his  own  hazard-master, 
and  it  would  be  a waste  of  time  and  space  to  dilate 
any  further  upon  a subject  which  is  already  ex- 
hausted. 

The  next  part  of  our  subject  proper,  relates  to  the 
degree  of  strength  with  which  it  is  necessary  to  strike 
for  the  accomplishment  of  various  objects.  But  of  this 
we  shall  treat  hereafter,  with  diagrams  to  illustrate  our 
meaning. 

Meantime,  as  we  shall  have  to  make  increasing  use 
of  such  technicalities  as  “hazard,”  “carom,”  “kiss,” 
and  so  forth — terms  completely  unintelligible  to  the 
novice — we  had  better  devote  a short  chapter  to  an 
explanation  of  the  phrases  peculiar  to  the  noble  game. 


CHAPTEE  IV. 


DEFINITION  OP  TECHNICAL  PHRASES  EMPLOYED  1^  THE  GAME  OP 
BILLIARDS. 

Hazard. — You  make  a hazard  wlien  you  drive  any 
of  the  balls  into  any  of  the  pockets.  A winning  hazard 
when  you  hole  or  pocket  either  of  the  red  balls  or 
your  adversary’s ; a losing  hazard  when  your  own  ball 
is  pocketed  by  your  own  act.  A double  hazard  is 
when  you  pocket  two  of  the  balls  with  the  same 
stroke. 

Carom. — This  word  is  derived  from  the  French 
caramholage^  and  you  carom  when  you  hit  more  than 
one  of  the  balls  on  the  table  with  your  own.  In  Eng 
land  this  is  called  a “ cannon,”  being  evidently  a corrupt 
derivative. 

Kiss. — When  the  ball  you  play  with  strikes  another 
ball  more  than  once,  they  are  said  to  kiss ; or  when  two 
balls  not  played  with  come  in  contact. 

Scratch. — ^When  accident  befriends  you,  and  you 
win  a stroke  or  count  without  either  intending  or  de- 
serving it,  you  are  said  to  have  made  a scratch. 

Force. — ^When  your  own  ball  retrogrades  after 


66 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


coming  in  contact  with  another.  We  have  explained 
this  in  the  preceding  chapter. 

Follow. — When  your  own  ball  rolls  on  after  another 
ball  which  it  has  impelled  forward.  (See  last  chapter.) 

Jump. — ^When  you  force  your  ball  by  a downward 
stroke  (as  previously  explained)  to  vicochet  or  leap  up 
from  the  table. 

Bank. — When  you  make  your  own  ball  hit  any  of 
the  cushions  before  striking  the  object-ball.  The  mace 
is  sometimes  used,  even  by  good  players,  to  make  this 
stroke. 

Miss. — When  you  fail  to  strike  any  of  the  balls  upon 
the  table. 

Miscue. — ^When  the  cue,  either  from  want  of  chalk 
or  being  badly  handled,  slips  off  the  ball  without  ao 
complishing  the  intended  stroke. 

Bukst. — A term  chiefly  used  at  pin  pool  to  signify 
that  the  player  has  exceeded  the  number  which  is 
placed  as  the  common  limit  to  the  game,  and  has  con- 
sequently either  to  retire  from  the  game  or  take  a 
privilege  of  another  life. 

Privilege. — A word  used  in  some  games  of  Pool 
to  express  that  the  player,  having  lost  the  lives,  or 
chances,  which  were  given  to  his  ball  on  its  entry  into 
the  game,  now  wishes  to  purchase  still  another  chance 
as  a privilege  from  the  other  players. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


67 


Taking  a Hazard. — A term  used  to  express  tliat  a 
player  is  so  confident  of  making  a certain  hazard  that 
he  will  undertake  to  do  it,  under  penalty  of  losing,  in 
case  he  does  not  succeed,  as  many  lives  as  he  would 
have  gained  if  successful.  The  phrase  is  most  fre- 
quently employed  in  two-ball  pool. 

Killed,  or  dead  Ball. — When  a ball  in  pool  has 
lost  its  lives,  and  its  chances  are  not  renewed  by  privi- 
leges, it  is  said  to  be  killed. 

Playing  for  Safety. — When  you  forego  a possible 
advantage,  in  order  to  leave  the  balls  in  such  a position 
that  your  opponent  can  make  nothing  out  of  them. 

Hug. — When  any  of  the  balls  run  close  alongside 
of  a particular  cushion,  they  are  said  to  hug  it. 

Jaw. — When  a ball  is  prevented  from  dropping  into 
a pocket  by  the  cushions  which  extend  like  jaws  on 
either  side. 

‘‘Timber-lick,”  “ Bowery  Shot”  and  “German- 
towner”  are  synonymous  terms,  all  applying  when 
the  balls  played  with  and  at,  are  jarred  together — a 
pushing  shot. 

Doublet  or  Cross. — ^When  the  ball  to  be  pocketed 
is  first  made  to  rebound  from  the  opposite  cushion. 

Foul  Stroke  or  Shot. — Any  stroke  made  in  vio- 
lation of  the  known  rules  of  the  game. 

Full  Ball,  Quarter  Ball,  Half  Ball,  Fine 
OK  Cut  Ball,  Own  or  Cue-Ball,  and  Object- 
Ball. — For  a correct  definition  of  these,  see  the  prece- 


68  The  Game  of  Billiards. 

ding  chapter,  which.  ‘‘  read,  mark,  learn,  and  inwardly 
digest.” 

Break. — The  position  the  balls  are  left  in  after  a 
shot  has  been  made.- 

Stringing  for  the  Lead. — A preliminary  to  the 
game,  by  which  it  is  decided  who  shall  have  the 
choice  of  lead  and  balls.  See  subsequent  rules  for  the 
game  on  this  point. 

Discount. — When  one  player  is  so  much  the  supe- 
rior of  another  that  he  allows  all  the  counts  made  by 
his  opponent  to  be  deducted  from  his  own  reckoning, 
he  is  said  to  “ discount”  his  adversary’s  gains.  Thus, 
if  his  opponent  make  a run  of  ten,  ten  is  added  to  his 
count,  and  ten  deducted  from  the  discounter’s  reckon- 
ing ; but  the  discounter  cannot  lose  what  he  has  not 
got.  In  other  words,  these  deductions  must  only  be 
made  from  the  count  he  has  at  the  time  of  the  loss, 
and  cannot  be  recovered  out  of  counts  he  may  after- 
wards make.  In  double  and  treble  discount,  twice 
and  thrice  the  amount  of  his  opponent’s  gains  are  de- 
ducted from  the  player’s  score.  In  no  other  game  in 
the  world  are  such  immense  odds  possible  as  in  bil- 
bards ; for  the  difference  between  players  may  be  as 
infinite  as  the  variety  of  geometrical  and  dynamic 
problems  which  the  balls  are  capable  of  illustrating ; 
and  a man  of  what  is  called  a mathematic  head,  close 
observation,  temperate  habits,  steady  nerves,  and  large 
experience,  may  give  almost  any  odds  to  an  inferior 
player,  and  still  have  a fair  chance  of  success. 


The  Game  of  Billiakhs. 


69 


Playing  Spot  Ball. — Is  wlien  the  player  is  not 
limited  to  the  number  of  times  he  may  pocket  the  red 
ball  from  the.  Spot. 

Billiakd  Shaep. — The  billiard  Sharp  is  a danger- 
ous species  of  animal,  now  happily  almost  extinct  in 
these  latitudes  ; he  is  to  be  shunned  wherever  met,  and 
the  following  are  among  the  more  prominent  signs  which 
nature  has  stamped  upon  him,  as  a caution  to  the  un- 
wary : He  is  always  either  over-dressed  or  seedy ; after 
a “run  of  luck”  he  comes  out  in  patterns  of  the  “nois- 
iest” and  loudest  description ; his  hair  is  always  settled 
by  a barber — in  all  probability  his  mustachios  have 
been  dyed;  and  you  may  observe  in  him,  whether  his 
apparel  be  gaudily  vulgar  or  seedily  decayed,  a con- 
stant effort  to  ape  and  “ put  on  the  genteel.”  The  very 
anxiety  of  the  effort  defeats  the  success  of  its  execution ; 
and  the  voice  of  the  rook  betrays  his  nature,  even 
though  he  has  clothed  himself  in  the  feathers  of  some 
plundered  pigeon. 

The  Sharp,  as  a general  thing,  is  a retired  marker,  who 
fancies  it  is  no  longer  “respectable”  to  work  for  an 
honest  living;  and  also  fancies  that  he  is  “smart” 
enough,  and  has  “learned  tricks  enough”  at  his  former 
business,  to  enable’ him  to  “win  as  much  money  as  he 
wants”  from  the  less  experienced  amateurs  of  the  game, 
who  figure  in  his  vocabulary  as  “ the  flats.”  Let  not  our 
friends,  the  markers,  think  that  we  desire  to  cast  a slur  on 
their  calling:  there  are  “black  sheep”  in  pulpits  as  well 
as  in  billiard  saloons  ; and  the  business  cannot  be  held 
responsible  for  the  evil-minded  persons  who  are  ooca- 


70 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


sionally  admitted.  Sometimes  the  Sharp  is  a reduced 
gentleman  of  loose  morality  and  habits — one  who  is 
careful  to  assure  you  that  “he  has  seen  better  days’’ — 
a man,  perhaps,  who  has  been  plucked  in  his  youth 
by  Sharps  now  dead  and  gone,  and  who  endeavors 
to  make  the  knowledge  so  bitterly  acquired,  support 
him  in  idleness  and  affluence,  after  his  friends  have 
been  estranged  by  his  vices,  and  his  fortune  (if  he 
ever  had  any)  been  exhausted  upon  pimps  and  extrav- 
agance. 

These  sharps  are  rarely  seen  in  a respectable  saloon : 
they  rather  patronize  those  peculiar  establishments 
where  a couple  of  billiard  tables  are  made  the  “ fence,” 
behind  which  some  less  reputable  occupation  is  carried 
on ; and  here  they  are  at  home,  and  in  their  glory. 
They  are  familiar  with  the  proprietors,  and  make  them- 
selves useful  in  a large  variety  of  characters,  in  return 
for  which  they  are  received  as  “dead-heads”  through 
the  day,  and  sometimes  given  a sleeping  place  under 
the  table  when  night  comes  on,  and  finds  them  unpro- 
vided with  any  other  lodging.  The  natural  excite- 
ment of  the  game  is  not  sufficient  for  your  Sharp ; 
indeed  you  may  detect  him  at  once  by  his  eagerness 
after  the  first  game — which  he  is  generally  careful  to 
lose — “ to  bet  a dollar  or  so  with  you  just  to  give  the 
game  an  interest.”  He  is  the  particular  friend  of  any 
one  who  will  ask  him  to  “take  a drink,”  and  his 
duties  to  the  house  embrace  the  offices  of  lounger,  run- 
ner, talker,  player,  sponge,  shoulder-hitter,  and  referee. 
This  last-named  character  he  is  particularly  proud  of: 
refer  to  him  any  question,  upon  almost  any  subject. 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


71 


and  lie  will  attempt  an  answer,  totcilly  regardless  of 
whether  he  ever  in  his  life  heard  a word  about  the 
matter  before,  or  not ; and  his  peculiar  hobby  is  to  be 
called  upon  to  decide  disputed  points  in  billiards — of 
which  he  considers  himself  the  only  recognized  author- 
ity, and  that  his  i'pse  dixit  should  be  law. 

He  is  also  very  fond  of  urging  others  to  make  bets. 
He  knows  more  about  the  game,  he  says,  than  any 
other  living  man,  and  if  he  only  had  a little  capital  to 
back  him — with  his  experience,  a fortune  might  be 
made  in  a few  days ! Hot,  however,  that  he  is  desti- 
tute— far  from  it : if  you  judge  him  by  his  present  ap- 
pearance you  will  be  most  miserably  sold : for  he 
tells  you  that  he  has  “been  upon  a spree,”  but  is  now 
(and  has  been  for  some  years,  to  our  certain  knowl- 
edge), in  expectation  of  a remittance  of  a few  thousand 
dollars  or  so  from  the  governor,  Avhich  will  make  all 
right.  Or,  perhaps  he  is  an  Englishman  (according  to 
his  own  account),  just  come  into  possession  of  an  enor- 
mous fortune  by  the  death  of  a wealthy  relative  in 
India : the  fortune  “ that  was  to  have  arroven,  has  not 
yet  arriv,”  but  the  steamer  is  already  some  days  over- 
due, and  if  you  will  just  accommodate  him  in  the  mean- 
time with  the  loan  of  one  dollar  {five  if  you  look 
green,  fifty  if  you  are  tipsy),  you  may  rely  upon  it  that 
he  will  repay  you  with  interest  an  hundred-fold  as 
soon  as  “ that  cussed  steamer”  has  come  in,  and  the 
first  moiety  of  his  estate  is  lodged  in  the  hands  of 
his  family  banker.  So  strong  is  the  delusion  which 
constant  habit  has  imposed  upon  these  miserables, 
that  they  feel  quite  oifended  if  refused,  and  will 


72 


The  Game  of  Billiabds. 


get  angry  if  they  see  a chance : whereas,  if  a party,  to 
get  rid  of  their  importunity,  or  as  a punishment  to 
himself  for  having  descended  to  talk  to  one  of  such  a 
tribe,  flings  them  a dollar,  or  fifty  cents,  they  feel 
none  of  the  gratitude  that  such  an  act  would  inspire  in 
the  bosom  of  the  common  beggar,  but  attribute  the 
success,  which  is  really  the  result  of  disgust  or  weari- 
ness, to  their  own  superior  “smartness”  and  the  stran- 
ger’s imbecility.  “ I guess  I was  more  than  a match 
for  that  fellow,”  thinks  the  Sharp ; “ I talked  him  out 
of  it — he  couldn’t  resist  me  nohow — and  the  dollar  so 
acquired  is  dearer  to  his  diseased  imagination  than 
would  be  fifty  times  that  sum,  if  gained  in  any  honest 
way. 

As  we  said  before,  he  is  fond  of  urging  others  to 
make  bets — ^it  being  impossible  for  himself  to  do  so, 
(though  he  would  be  sure  to  win,)  until  either  the  for- 
eign steamer,  or  the  remittance  from  the  governor 
arrives.  He  is  a matchmaker — ^yes  sir-ee ! and  the 
best  matchmaker  to  be  found  on  the  hither  side  of  Jor- 
dan. Only  let  him  tell  you  how  to  lay  your  wagers, 
and  with  whom,  and  you  will  be  sure  to  win,  for  he  is 
never  mistaken.  He  tells  A to  bet  against  B,  for  that 
he  can  surely  beat  him ; he  is  so  sure  of  it,  that  he 
will  go  halves  with  A in  the  bet,  though  the  loss,  if 
lost,  would  strip  him  of  his  last  red  cent.  To  B he  re- 
peats the  same  story,  and  offers  the  same  conditions. 
The  match  is  made,  we  will  suppose,  and  the  Sharp  is 
sure  of  his  share,  let  who  will  come  to  the  Avail.  When 
either  party  Avins,  he  will  slap  him  on  the  shoulder,  and 
say — “ There ! didn’t  I tell  you  you  could  beat  him  ?” 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


73 


He  coolly  pockets  his  kalf  of  the  winnings,  and  when 
the  loser  reminds  him  that  he  promised  to  share  half 
the  losses  as  well,  he  is  suddenly  seized  with  a great 
deafness,  or  remembers  that  he  left  his  purse  in  the 
oyster  shop  below  stairs,  and  must  go  look  for  it ; or 
perhaps,  if  his  victim  does  not  look  like  a fighting-man, 
he  tells  him  to  “shut  up,”  and  that  he  will  pay  him 
either  when  the  remittance  comes  to  hand,  or  on  the 
first  Sunday  that  happens  to  fall  in  the  middle  of  next 
week.  Or  perhaps  he  may  condole  with  the  loser : 
tell  him  the  result  has  amazed  him — that  he  never  saw 
more  beautiful  play  in  his  life  than  that  made  by  his 
victim  ; that  nothing  but  the  irregularity  of  the  balls 
or  the  falseness  of  the  table  could  have  defeated  such 
really  splendid  play:  and  if  “the  flat”  be  verdant 
enough  to  accept  this  coin  of  flattery  in  lieu  of  the  solid 
currency  out  of  which  he  has  been  swindled,  the  Sharp 
will  give  him  any  quantity  of  it,  and  on  the  very  lowest 
terms : “ another  drink”  is  all  he  charges  for  his  half- 
hour’s  eulogy. 

To  these  sources  of  profit,  the  Sharp  adds  that  of 
runner  and  peripatetic  blower  to  disreputable  houses 
engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  billiard  tables.  They 
supply  him  with  clothes,  to  enable  the  fellow  to  mingle 
in  respectable  society,  and  allow  him  an  enormous 
percentage  for  every  billiard  table  sold  to  a stranger 
through  his  agency. 

The  Sharp,  when  engaged  as  “ blower,”  has  a double 
duty  to  perform ; he  is  not  only  to  puff  up  such  houses 
as  may  have  hired  him,  or  with  which  he  is  on  terms 
of  agency;  he  must  also  pull  down,  as  far  as  in  him 
4 


74 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


lies,  the  reputation  of  such  manufacturers  as  have  the 
honesty  to  despise  and  scorn  the  means  by  which  he 
earns  his  wretched  and  dishonorable  livelihood. 

Having  said  thus  much  of  the  genus — with  the  his- 
tory and  peculiarities  of  which  we  could  fill  a volume 
were  we  so  disposed — it  can  scarcely  be  necessary  to 
add  that  their  habits  are  migratory  and  uncertain  to 
the  last  degree.  As  soon  as  they  have  made  “ a hit” 
in  one  saloon,  they  dodge  off  to  another,  and  thus  go 
the  rounds  of  the  city  until  all  the  dens  which  harbor 
them  are,  in  their  own  vernacular,  “ played  out.”  They 
then  spread  their  wings  for  ‘Afresh  fields  and  pas 
tures  new,”  and  thus  come  back,  after  a lapse  of  some 
years,  to  the  city  from  which  they  started,  having  suf- 
fered various  degrees  of  ignominy  and  want  in  the 
course  of  their  wanderings  through  other  towns. 

Avoid  all  such,  ye  novices ; and  should  a stranger 
in  a strange  room  ask  you  to  play  with  him  for  any 
sum  “just  to  give  an  interest  to  the  game,”  compare 
him  mentally  with  the  sketch  here  furnished,  and  if 
you  find  any  definite  resemblance,  be  careful  to  refuse. 

Love  Game. — Is  a condition  in  which  novices  will 
be  very  apt  to  find  themselves,  if  they  commence  by 
challenging  an  experienced  player. 

Count. — Is  the  reckoning  of  the  game.  To  make 
a count  means,  to  make  a stroke  which  will  add  some 
figures  to  your  reckoning. 

Masse. — This  is  the  French  term  for  what  is  de- 
nonpnated,  on  page  52,  and  elsewhere  througliout 
this  work,  “ The  Perpendicular  Stroke.” 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


75 


A TABLE  OF  THE  MOTIVE  POWERS 


TO  BE  USED  IN  EXECUTING  THE  DIFFERENT  PROBLEMS  LAID  DOWN 
IN  THE  SUCCEEDING  DIAGRAMS. 

Previous  to  the  author’s  former  work  on  the  game 
of  billiards,  no  writer  on  the  subject  had  ever  attempted 
to  lay  down  a scale  of  the  different  amounts  of  strength 
that  would  be  required  for  the  execution  of  the  differ- 
ent strokes ; and  yet  without  some  such  scale,  all  v/rit- 
ten  instructions  might  be  compared  to  the  play  of 
Hamlet,  with  the  prince’s  character  omitted.  Of  what 
use  can  it  be  to  tell  the  direction  in  which  the  cue-ball 
should  be  driven,  and  the  point  at  which- the  object- 
ball  should  be  struck,  unless  we  can  place  a definite 
limit  to  the  strength  to  be  employed  in  the  execution 
of  the  problem?  For  the  angles  will  vary,  as  the 
strength  is  increased  or  diminished ; and  unless  some 
graduated  scale  can  be  applied  to  every  stroke,  the  in- 
structions, so  far  as  practical  utility  to  the  student  is 
concerned,  might  as  well  be  omitted  altogether. 

This  subject  was  forced  upon  the  author’s  notice 
when  engaged  in  teaching  the  game,  many  years  ago.  ^ 
His  pupils  used  to  complain,  that  though  they  made 
the  force,  or  twist,  or  following  strokes  as  directed,  and 
struck  the  object-ball  at  the  point  laid  down,  the  result 
did  not  answer  their  expectations,  nor  was  it  similar 
to  the  result  of  the  same  stroke  when  played  by  him. 

What,  then,  could  the  tutor  do?  H he  told  them 
to  play  “ a little  harder,”  a good  deal  harder,”  “ a 


76 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


great  deal  harder,”  ‘‘  not  quite  so  hard,”  “ not  half  so 
hard,”  “ twice  as  hard,”  “ extremely  hard,” — ^he  found 
that  these  terms  were  indefinite,  and  that  no  two  of 
them  agreed  in  their  interpretation.  One  of  them,  if 
told  to  play  ‘‘a  little  harder,”  would  drive  his  ball 
over  the  opposite  cushion,  and  away  to  the  far  end  of 
the  room;  while  the  same  order,  given  to  another, 
would  not  call  forth  the  requisite  amount  of  strength. 

Under  these  circumstances,  he  found  that  the  first 
step  in  tuition  must  be,  to  afford  the  novice  an  accu- 
rate idea  of  the  different  quantities  of  strength  re- 
quired for  the  execution  of  different  strokes ; the  table 
of  motive  powers,  illustrated  in  the  diagram  on  page 
75,  was  constructed,  and  each  pupil  had  to  practice 
until  he  could  very  nearly  approximate  the  different 
strokes,  as  laid  down  under  their  respective  numbers. 
This  exercise  will  be  found  very  serviceable  to  the  stu- 
dent, not  only  for  giving  him  an  idea  of  the  quantities 
of  motive  power,  but  also  imparting  general  steadiness 
and  certitude  to  his  aim. 

In  this  table  the  author  has  taken  the  amount  of 
power  requisite  to  propel  a ball  from  the  string  to  the 
opposite  cushion,  and  thence  back  to  the  cushion  be- 
hind the  string,  as  the  unit  of  his  calculation.  This 
power  is  marked  as  Quantity  of  Power,  Number  One  • 
or,  for  shortness  sake,  Q.  P.,  No.  1. 

To  propel  it  from  the  string  to  the  opposite  cushion, 
thence  back  to  the  cushion  behind  the  string,  and 
thence  half  way  down  the  table,  is  marked  as  Q.  P., 
No.  2. 

To  propel  it  from  the  string  to  the  opposite  cushion, 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


79 


thence  back  to  the  cushion  behind  the  string,  and 
thence  on  to  the  cushion  which  it  first  struck,  is  Q. 
P.,  JV'o.  3. 

To  propel  it  from  the  string  to  the  opposite  cushion, 
thence  back  to  the  cushion  behind  the  string,  thence 
back  to  the  cushion  it  first  struck,  and  thence  half-way 
down  the  table,  is  marked  as  Q.  P.,  JVh.  4. 

These  divisions  will  be  found  to  answer  the  earliest 
requirements  of  the  player.  As  he  advances  in  the 
practice  of  the  game,  he  will  learn  to  graduate  as  far 
below  Q.  P.,  JYo,  1,  as  one-eighth  of  that  power,  which 
is  ordinarily  low  enough  for  all  practical  purposes ; 
from  thence  he  can  ascend,  in  the  proportion  of  eighths, 
to  Q.  P.,  JYo.  4,  beyond  which  it  is  almost  impossible 
to  retain  the  command  of  the  balls  with  any  certainty 
of  aim. 

Let  it  be  borne  in  mind  that  great  cue-strength  is 
not  produced  by  any  violent  muscular  or  bodily  con- 
tortions ; it  depends  far  more  on  the  looseness  and 
quickness  of  the  arm,  and  the  jerk  which  is  imparted 
by  the  wrist.  The  motion  made,  when  striking  with 
the  cue,  should  be  somewhat  similar,  in  sudden  quick- 
ness, to  that  made  in  throwing  the  lasso ; and  refer- 
ence should  here  be  made  by  the  student  to  the  in- 
structions in  Chapter  III  on  this  point,  under  the 
heading  Conditions  of  a good  attitude.” 


83 


EXPLANATION  OF  DIAGEAM  NO.  I. 

This  diagram  exhibits  the  simple  angles  produced 
by  playing  a ball  with  the  different  quantities  of  power 
hereafter  set  forth.  For  example:  play  from  the  Spot 
at  the  head  of  the  table  at  the  middle  nail  or  sight 
opposite,  with  Q.  P.  No.  1,  or  upwards,  and  the  ball,  if 
struck  fairly  in  the  centre^  will  return  over  its  original 
course,  and  hit  the  corresponding  nail  behind  the  Spot. 
[In  this  proposition,  and  in  all  others,  we  suppose  the 
cushions  to  be  correct,  and  the  tables  level.] 

Again,  play  the  ball  from  either  of  the  points  marked 
2,  with  Q.  P.  21,  and  it  will  return  over  the  correspond- 
ing line  at  an  angle  of  reflection  equal  to  that  of  inci- 
dence. 

Play  from  point  3,  on  a line  between  the  centre  of 
the  lower  corner  pocket,  and  the  nail  at  the  bottom  of 
the  table,  as  marked,  with  Q.  P.  No.  3,  and  the  ball  will 
be  returned  at  a similar  angle  into  the  opposite  pocket.- 
So  also  with  point  4,  played  on  a line  between  the 
middle  pocket  and  nail  with  Q.  P.  No.  3i. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  more  obtuse  the  angle 
sought  to  be  made,  the  greater  quantity  of  power  must 
be  used  to  effect  the  object. 

The  student  who  desires  to  succeed  should  study 
this  diagram  carefully,  and  familiarize  both  his  eye  and 
hand  with  its  practical  execution.  Let  him  practice  it 


84 


as  here  laid  down,  and  pay  particular  attention  to  the 
quantities  of  power  required  for  the  formation  of  differ- 
ent angles.  This  is  a matter  in  which  each  must  buy 
his  own  experience. 

The  diagram  also  exhibits  the  control  which  the 
player  exercises  over  his  ball  by  means  of  the  twist  or 
side  stroke. 

Playing  always  from  the  spot  at  the  middle  nail  of 
the  lower  cushion,  the  ball  can  be  brought  back  over 
the  lines  marked  2,  3,  and  4,  at  each  side  of  the  spot 
from  which  it  is  played,  according  as  it  has  been  twisted 
to  the  right  or  left.  The  amount  of  the  twist  will  de- 
pend upon  the  distance  from  its  centre  at  which  the 
cue-ball  is  struck,  and  the  ability  of  the  player  to  im- 
part the  peculiar  motion  necessary  to  effect  such  strokes. 
Considerable  judgment  is  also  required  to  graduate 
the  proper  quantity  of  strength.  The  rebound  of  the 
ball  will  incline  to  that  side — whether  left  or  right — 
on  which  the  ball  was  struck. 

For  example : to  cause  your  ball  to  return  over  line 
2 to  the  right,  strike  it  with  Q.  P.  a mere  shade  to 
the  right  of  the  centre. 

' To  cause  it  to  return  over  line  3,  strike  it  with  the 
same  Q.  P.  j E. 

Over  line  4,  strike  with  Q.  P.  2|,  ^ E,  J B,  or  midway 
between  the  perpendicular  and  diagonal  below.  The 
tendency  to  rotate  backward  imparted  by  striking  the 
ball  below  the  centre,  exhausts  the  progressive  motion 
and  favors  the  full  development  of  the  twist. 


\ 


% 


■ LIBRARY 
OF  thf; 

UFJIVFRSITV  Of  (IIINOIS 


V 

\ 


' -i 

, 


.‘'•‘..y'' 


.,v 


87 


DIAGRAM  NO.  IL 

Exliibits  iLb  principle  as  the  preceding  one, 

with  double  or  compound  angles  made.'  There  can  be 
no  better  test  of  the  correctness  of  the  cushions  than 
a trial  of  these  strokes.  K the  cushions  are  true,  the 
ball,  no  matter  how  often  doubled,  will  repeat  its 
original  angle  at  each  fresh  rebound.  Thus,  if  stroke 
2 had  been  played  with  increased  power,  the  ball  would 
have  been  pocketed  in  the  left  hand  upper  corner 
pocket — supposing,  for  the  sake  of  argument,  that 
cushions  absolutely  perfect  could  be  found.  Of  course, 
however,  nothing  human  is  perfect ; and  the  cushions 
most  nearly  approaching  these  requirements  are  the 
best. 

The  stroke  marked  1,  though  the  ball  has  there  to 
travel  over  a shorter  distance,  requires  to  the  full  as 
much  power  as  stroke  3,  which  moves  over  thrice  the 
space.  This  is  caused  by  the  greater  obtuseness  of  the 
angle  made  by  1.  If  stroke  1 were  played  witL  hss 
power,  the  angle  would  be  more  obtuse. 


--■:V5 
1v  ' 


'r 


^ ■ 


' . s-  I if, 


, 1-IBRARV 
Of  THE 


91 


DIAGRAM  NO.  in. 

Exhibits  the  different  angles  which  will  result  from 
the  same  stroke  when  played  with  different  amounts 
of  force.  For  example : play  from  the  position  marked 
with  Q.  P.  No.  2,  and  the  ball  after  taking  three  cushions, 
as  shown  in  the  line  marked  1,  will  be  delivered  into 
the  opposite  corner  pocket. 

Play  the  same  stroke  wdth  Q.  P.  No.  3,  and  the  in- 
creased strengiih  will  cause  acuter  angles,  as  shown  in 
the  lines  marked  2.  Increase  the  power  still  more, 
and  the  lines  marked  3 will  be  given. 

To  account  for  these  changes  we  must  bear  in  mind 
that  a change  of  axis  takes  place  from  the  moment  of 
contact  with  the  first  cushion,  and  is  repeated  as  often 
as  the  ball  strikes.  This  change  of  axis  has  no  effect, 
however,  until  the  ball  comes  in  contact  with  the  second 
cushion.  The  change  which  inclines  the  ball  from  a 
horizontal  to  a perpendicular  axis,  will  be  strong  in 
proportion  to  the  quantity  of  power  used  in  play. 
When  the  ball  is  struck  violently  against  the  cushion, 
the  cushion,  as  it  were,  grips  its  side,  and  sends  it  spin- 
ning forward  with  a stronger  inclination  to  the  per- 
pendicular ; this  change  causes  the  ball  to  be  thrown 
back  from  the  second  and  third  cushions  at  angles  of 
reflection  more  obtuse  than  those  of  incidence. 


92 


Supposing  tlie  ball  to  be  struck  fairly  in  its  centre, 
its  axis,  up  to  the  time  of  striking  the  first  cushion, 
will  be  horizontal ; the  effect  of  contact  is  to  incline 
this  motion  to  change  for  one  on  a perpendicular  axis; 
but  the  former  impulse  not  having  been  entirely  de- 
stroyed, there  is  a sprt  of  compromise  made  between 
the  conflicting  inclinations,  and  a diagonal  axis,  the 
mean  between  the  two,  is  evolved.  This  diagonal  will 
incline  more  closely  to  the  perpendicular,  in  proportion 
to  the  increase  of  power  employed.  But  its  angles  will 
again  be  modified  by  its  subsequent  contact  Avith  cush- 
ions 2 and  3 ; and  finally,  as  the  strength  becomes  ex- 
hausted, the  ball  will  again  resume  its  horizontal  axis 
in  obedience  to  the  laws  of  gravity  and  the  friction  of 
the  table. 


LIBRARY 
Of  THf 
!!!\UVFRSn?  !> 


95 


DIAGRAM  NO.  lY. 

This  diagram  serves  to  show  the  effect  of  the  differ- 
ent degrees  of  strength  when  two  balls  come  in  contact. 
For  instance,  play  the  cue-ball  with  Q.  P.  at  the  ball 
in  the  centre  of  the  circle,  full  enough  to  make  the 
latter  travel  over  the  line  drawn  from  it  to  the  cushion, 
and  a carom  on  the  ball  at  the  lower  section  of  the 
circle  will  be  effected ; increase  that  strength  to  Q.  P.  2, 
and  the  carom  on  the  ball  next  above  it  will  be  made ; 
then  try  Q.  P.  3|,  and  a carom  on  the  third  ball  will  be 
effected.  In  playing  these  strokes,  the  cue-ball  must 
be  struck  in  the  centre,  and  the  object-ball  each  time 
in  the  particular  place  required  to  make  it  roll  over 
the  line  which  is  continued  to  the  lower  cushion. 


96 


DIAGEAM  NO.  V. 

Now  that  we  have  endeavored  to  explain  the  effect 
of  the  different  quantities  of  power,  we  will  attempt  to 
point  out  the  principles  of  a “ Follow,”  and  a “ Force.” 
Figure  1,  in  this  diagram  is  intended  to  exemplify 
“the  Force.” 

The  intention  of  this  stroke  is  to  pocket  ball  1,  and 
carom  upon  ball  2.  Play  the  cue-ball  a B,  Q.  P.  2,  and 
strike  the  object  ball  | E.  For  an  explanation  of  the 
reason  why  the  cue-ball  rebounds  to  ball  2,  see  plate 
of  cue -positions,  stroke  2,  marked  “Force,”  with  the 
remarks  thereon. 

Figure  2 shows  the  “Following-stroke,”  ball  1 being 
driven  into  the  corner  pocketj  while  a carom  is  effected 
upon  ball  2.  Strike  the  cue-ball  i A,  with  Q.  P.  1|. 
For  further  explanations,  see  same  plate,  (cue-positions,) 
stroke  3,  with  its  accompanying  e:q)lanations. 


No.  5. 


/ 


I.IBRAP^ 

CF  THF 

universe  of  l’ii*^'00' 


No.  6. 


uwiveb; 


UBRARY 
Of  THr 


101 


MAGKAM  NO.  YL 

This  plate  is  intended  to  further  illustrate  the  ‘‘force” 
and  “follow.”  The  cue-ball  is  that  at  which  the  cue 
is  pointed ; the  object-ball  is  that  in  the  centre  of  the 
table ; the  balls  marked  1,  2,  3,  4,  are  the  ones  to  be 
caromed  on;  the  lines  marked  1,  2,  3,  4,  show  the 
course  the  object-ball  will  take  when  struck  so  as  to 
make  such  caroms  as  represented  on  the  balls  of  cor- 
responding numbers.  For  example:  to  play  so  as  to 
cause  the  cue-ball  to  follow  on  in  a direct  line  after  the 
object-ball;  strike  the  object-ball  dead  full,  the  cue- 
ball  to  be  struck  exactly  in  the  perpendicular  central 
line,  i A,  with  Q.  P.  1,  or  more,  at  the  player’s  option. 
To  effect  a force  in  a straight  line  backwards  to  the 
place  from  whence  the  cue-ball  started,  strike  the 
object-ball  dead  full,  and  the  cue-ball  } to  with 
Q.  P.  2|-;  giving  it  at  the  same  time  the  peculiar  motion 
referred  to  in  the  diagram  of  cue-positions,  describing 
the  “force.” 

To  carom  on  ball  1 in  the  lower  circle,  strike  the 
cue-ball  ^ A,  with  Q.  P.  3,  and  the  object-ball  will  take 
the  direction  of  the  line  1. 

To  effect  a carom  by  a force  on  ball  1,  of  the  upper 
circle,  strike  the  cue-ball  ^ B,  ^ L,  Q.  P.  3,  the  object- 


102 


ball  taking  the  same  direction  as  in  the  preceding 
stroke. 

To  carom  on  balls  o or  4 on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
same  semicircle,  the  same  Q.  P.  is  to  be  used  as  in  mak- 
ing the  foregoing  caroms,  and  the  object-ball  is  to  be 
struck  in  the  same  manner,  only  of  course  on  the  oppo- 
site side — which  will  cause  it  to  pursue  the  lines  marked 
3 and  4. 

The  lines  marked  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  should  claim  the 
attention  of  the  reader.  It  will  be  seen  that  these  lines 
are  but  slightly  apart,  compared  to  the  balls  thus 
numbered,  which  fact  goes  to  show  that  to  effect  a 
spread”  it  is  not  necessary  to  hit  the  object-ball  so  far 
off  from  the  centre  as  would  appear  at  the  first  glance ; 
and  here  we  might  as  well  remark,  that  this  is  a danger- 
ous error  which  beginners  are  liable  to  fall  into  at  first, 
both  as  regards  the  object-ball,  and  striking  the  cue- 
ball.  By  getting  too  far  away  from  the  centre  of  the 
object-ball  the  consequence  is  a failure  to  effect  the 
stroke  played  for,  and  striking  the  cue-ball  in  like 
manner  is  productive  of  ‘‘miscues,”  and  other  mis- 
haps equally  fatal. 

This  diagram  serves  to  show  also,  the  almost  absolute 
control  a skilful  player  can  exercise  over  the  cue-ball 
by  being  possessed  of  the  knowledge  and  ability  to 
strike  it  in  the  proper  place,  and  to  apply  that  peculiar 
strength  and  motion  to  it  which  are  requisite  to  accom- 
plish the  various  strokes  attempted. 

Thanks  to  Mingaud  forgiving  us  the  leather  on  the 
point  of  the  cue,  for  without  the  aid  of  that,  our  efforts 
would  be  vain ; but  with  it,  and  the  knowledge  and 


103 


ability  to  use  it,  the  result  is  as  we  see.  Some  of  the 
very  simplest  shots  are  at  variance  with  all  the  known 
rules  of  dynamics,  and  it  would  puzzle  the  most  pro- 
found mathematician  to  account  in  theory  for  the  effects 
which  are  practically  illustrated  by  men  not  pretend- 
ing to  any  scientific  education  whatsoever. 

With  these  remarks  we  pass  from  the following”  and 
‘^forcing”  shots,  and  speak  of  the  effect  of  the  “twist,” 
or  side-stroke,  on  the  course  of  the  cue-ball  before 
striking  a cushion. 


No.  7. 


library 
OF  ine 
BNlVLiiSn-  Or 


'v1 


107 


DIAGEAM  NO.  YII. 

The  circle  in  the  centre  represents  a hat,  a plate,  or 
any  object  of  similar  magnitude  placed  there  as  an  ob- 
stacle which  the  player’s  art  is  required  to  overcome. 

The  propositions — to  play  the  ball  from  either  side 
or  corner  pocket  around  the  hat,  and  hole  it  in  the 
corresponding  pocket  opposite — are  identical  in  prin- 
ciple, though  requiring  a different  elevation  of  the  cue, 
and  different  varieties  of  power. 

To  effect  the  stroke  from  corner  to  coriier,  the  cue 
must  be  elevated  at  an  angle  of  at  least  45  degrees,  as 
shown  in  the  position  described  as  a Perpendicular 
Force  (marked  5),  on  the  diagram  of  cue-positions,  in 
an  earlier  portion  of  this  work.  To  make  the  ball 
curve  round  the  hat,  passing  outside  it  to  the  right, 
from  corner  to  corner, — strike  it  with  the  Perpendic- 
ular Force  -J-  L,  with  Q.  P.  2 to  3.  Pay  particular 
attention  to  the  necessity  for  a quick,  impulsive,  lasso- 
throwing movement,  as  set  forth  in  the  instructions 
which  are  appended  to  the  “force”  (marked  2)  in  the 
aforesaid  diagram. 

To  make  the  ball  curve  round  the  object  to  the  left, 
strike  with  the  same  elevation  and  power,  but  change 
the  L,  to  P. 

To  effect  the  stroke  from  the  side-pocket,  an  eleva- 


108 


tion  of  five  degrees  more  will  be  required ; the  Q.  P.  may 
be  reduced  to  2|-,  or  even  a little  less ; but  in  proportion, 
as  the  strength  and  elevation  are  diminished,  it  becomes 
necessary  to  increase  that  peculiar  lasso-motion  to  which 
we  have  before  made  reference. 

In  playing  these  and  all  other  twisting  shots,  due 
allowance  must  be  made  for  the  curve  before  the  player 
aims ; or  his  ball  will  inevitably  go  wide  of  its  mark, 
either  to  right  or  lefb.  If  the  length  of  the  shot  is 
such  that  the  curve  wiU  amount  to  a foot,  then  the 
player  must  aim  a foot  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  point 
at  which  he  really  desires  his  ball  to  touch. 


LIBRARY 
OF  INF 

UNIVERSITY  Of  ILLINOIS 


No.  8. 


Ill 


DIAGEAM  NO  YIII. 

Tlie  purpose  of  this  diagram  is  to  show  the  effect 
the  side-stroke  will  have  on  the  cue-ball  after  contact 
with  the  cushion.  Although  the  object-ball  may  be 
struck  in  the  same  place,  the  cue-ball  can  be  made  to 
take  widely-dififerent  courses,  as  represented.  The  ob- 
ject in  figure  1,  is  to  pocket  ball  1 in  the  corner  pocket, 
and  carom  on  ball  2 or  8.  To  effect  the  carom  on  ball 

2,  hit  the  object-ball  where  the  line  from  the  pocket 
would  terminate  were  it  continued  directly  through 
the  centre  of  the  ball.  Strike  the  cue-ball  ^ E,  on  the 
horizontal  central  line,  with  Q.l^.  1|-.  To  carom  on  ball 

3,  strike  the  cue-ball  -I-  L,  ^ B,  with  Q.  P.  2}. 

Figure  2. — To  carom  on  ball  2,  strike  the  object- 

ball  fine,  as  represented  in  diagram,  and  the  cue-ball  -J 
L,  i B,  with  Q.  P.  2|.  The  object  in  striking  the  cue- 
ball  below  the  centre  in  this  stroke,  is  to  communicate 
to  it  a motion  similar  to  that  in  the  forcing  shot ; 
such  motion  will  have  the  effect  of  contracting  the 
angle  produced  by  the  ball  rebounding  from  the 
cushion. 

To  carom  on  ball  3,  the  object-ball  is  to  be  hit  as  in 
the  preceding  stroke.  The  cue-ball  to  be  struck  ^ E, 
with  Q.  P.  1. 


112 


DIAGRAM  NO.  IX. 

EPTECT  OF  THE  SIDE  STROKE  AND  TWIST  CONTINUED. 

Figure  1. — To  play  on  ball  1,  pocket  it  in  comer,  and 
carom  on  ball  2 or  3.  To  carom  on  ball  2,  bit  tbe  ob- 
ject-ball so  as  to  bole  it,  strike  tbe  cue-ball  | E,  i A, 
witb  Q.  P.  2.  To  carom  on  ball  3,  strike  tbe  object-ball 
i L,  yV  -A-,  witb  Q.  P,  2i. 

Fig.  2. — To  play  on  tbe  ball  on  tbe  spot,  and  pocket 
it  in  corner-pocket,  and  carom  on  balls  1,  2,  3,  or  4 : 
To  efifect  tbe  carom  on  \jall  1,  strike  tbe  cue-ball  | A, 
yV  L,  witb  Q.  P.  3.  To  carom  on  ball  2,  strike  tbe  cue- 
ball  i A,  y E,  witb  Q.  P.  2|.  To  carom  on  ball  3, 
strike  tbe  cue-ball  i B,  i L,  witb  Q.  P.  3.  To  carom 
on  ball  4,  strike  cue-ball  i B,  yV  L,  witb  Q.  P.  3. 


No.  9. 


c. 

0. 


LIBRARY 
OF  m 

IliYn/ERSITY  Of  ILliNOiS 


library 

Of  m 

mfEmy  Of  litmois 


V. 


DIAGEAl^I  NO.  X 


FURTHER  ILLUSTRATION  OP  THE  SIDE  STROKE. 

To  play  with  the  cue-ball  and  pocket  the  object-ball 
in  the  side  pocket,  and  carom  on  balls  1,  2,  8,  4,  or  5. 
To  carom  on  ball  1,  strike  the  cue-ball  ^ A,  with 
Q.  P.  1.  To  carom  on  ball  2,  strike  the  cue-ball  ^ B, 
I E,  with  Q.  P.  2|-.  To  carom  on  ball  8,  strike  the 
cue-ball  \ E,  on  horizontal  line,  with  Q.  P.  2|-.  To 
carom  on  ball  4,  strike  the  cue-ball  I A,  L,  with 
Q.  P.  8.  To  carom  on  ball  5,  strike  the  cue-ball  ^ E, 
~ B,  with  Q.  P.  Si.  Thus,  it  may  be  perceived,  that 
with  the  aid  of  the  side-stroke  and  force,  the  cue-ball 
can  be  made  to  take  almost  any  course  the  player  de- 
sires. The  object-ball  is  to  be  hit  so  as  to  hole  it  in 
the  side-pocket,  in  each  of  these  caroms. 


118 


DIAGRAM  NO.  XT. 

nXTJSTEATIONS  OP  THE  KISS  AND  SIDE  STROKE. 

To  play  on  ball  1,  and  carom  on  balls  2,  3,  4,  6,  6, 
and  7.  To  carom  on  ball  2 by  a kiss,  strike  tbe  cue- 
ball  1 A,  1 L,  with  Q.  P,  2^,  the  object-ball  to  be  hit 
E.  To  carom  on  ball  3,  strike  with  same  strength 
the  object  and  cue-ball,  hitting  as  above,  only  on  the 
opposite  side.  To  carom  on  ball  4,  strike  the  cue-ball 
1 E,  i B,  Q.  P.  2^,  the  object-ball  to  be  hit  fine  on  the 
left.  To  carom  on  ball  6,  strike  the  cue-ball  | L,  i B, 
with  Q.  P.  3,  the  object-ball  to  be  hit  f L.  To  carom 
on  ball  6,  strike  the  cue-ball  a E on  the  horizontal 
line  with  Q.  P.  2,  the  object-ball  fine  to  the  right. 
To  carom  on  ball  7,  strike  the  cue-ball  | B,  a L, 
with  Q.  P.  3^,  the  object-baU  to  be  hit  a half  ball  to 
the  left. 


No.  11. 


0 y«ij. 


c/i^T^'j‘t3  y'lV 

O , Xa 


LJBRARV 
OF  INF 

UillVERSITT  or  ILLiJ^UiS 


c»  V* 

O Ci  O O- 


No.  12. 


""r*' 

_ 

■f 


!.(  ■ ''  <C  ' 


i't,  '^*1,  w. 

U H/, 


LIBRARY 
Of  THL 

UNIVERSITY  OF  iLUNUiS 


123 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XH. 

FURTHER  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  THE  KISS  AND  SIDE  STROKE. 

Explanation  of  Fig.  1. — The  three  balls  num- 
bered 1,  2,  and  3 in  this  figure,  are  intended  to  be  the 
cue-balls,  ball  A the  object-ball,  and  ball  B the  one  to 
be  caromed  on;  the  lines  marked  1,  2,  and  3 the  course 
the  cue-balls  will  take,  according  to  their  respective 
numbers.  For  example,  play  with  ball  1,  fi:om  position 
as  represented,  with  Q.  P.  2},  strike  it  A,  the  object- 
ball  to  be  hit  I to  the  right,  and  the  carom  will  be 
effecte'd  by  the  kiss.”  Then  again  play  with  ball  2 
with  the  same  strength,  strike  it  -J-  A,  ^ E,  the  object- 
ball  to  be  hit  I E,  and  the  carom  will  be  effected  by 
the  cue-ball  describing  curves  similar  to  those  marked 
by  line  2.  Again,  play  with  ball  3,  strike  it  I-  E,  I-  A, 
with  Q.  P.  Si,  and  the  carom  on  ball  B will  be  effected 
by  a sort  of  hugging  tendency  of  the  cue-ball,  after 
forming  curves  similar  to  those  represented  by  line  3. 

The  student  should  pay  particular  attention  to  this 
Figure,  as  there  are  certain  principles  represented  by 
it,  which  will  be  very  essential  for  him  to  have  a 
knowledge  of. 

In  all  of  these  strokes  the  cue-ball  has  a following 
tendency,  caused  by  the  cue  striking  it  above  the 
centre,  consequently  it  hugs  the  cushion.  In  No.  1 


124 


this  tendency  is  effected  by  the  simple  stroke  above 
the  centre,  but  in  Nos.  2 and  3 the  cue-ball  also  re- 
quires striking  to  the  right,  as  well  as  above  the  centre, 
owing  to  its  relative  position  to  the  object-ball. 

In  No.  2,  I E is  sufficient  to  effect  this  purpose,  but 
in  No.  3 the  cue-ball  must  be  struck  i E,  in  conse- 
quence of  the  greater  acuteness  of  the  angle  formed  by 
the  lines  drawn  from  it  to  the  object-ball,  and  from  the 
latter  to  ball  B.  If,  in  these  two  strokes,  the  cue-ball 
were  struck  to  the  left,  it  would  either  stop  under  the 
cushion,  or  take  a direction  to  the  left,  the  very  oppo- 
site to  that  which  the  striker  intended. 

Fig.  2. — To  play  on  ball  C,  and  carom  on  ball  D, 
strike  the  cue-ball  | L,  with  Q.  P.  1,  the  object-ball  to 
be  hit  dead  full.  To  carom  on  ball  B,  hit  the  object- 
ball  dead  full;  strike  the  cue-ball  ^ A,  with  Q.  P.  2^, 


No.  13. 


LIBRARY 
0^  1H£ 

L’A'IYERSiTY  Of-  ILLINUlS 


127 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XIH. 

FUETHEE  nXCSTEATION  OP  THE  KISS  AND  POECE. 

Fig.  1. — ^To  play  on  ball  1,  kiss  on  ball  2,  and  carom 
on  ball  3.  Hit  the  object-ball  ^ E,  strike  the  cue-ball 
^ A,  L,  with  Q-  P.  2. 

Fig.  2. — To  play  on  ball  1,  carom  on  ball  3,  and, 
by  a force,  carom  on  ball  2.  Strike  the  cue-ball  ^ B, 
•I  E,  with  Q.  P.  31-,  the  object-ball  to  be  hit  fine  on  the 
left,  as  represented  in  diagram. 


128 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XIV. 

MORE  OP  THE  KISS. 

To  play  oil  ball  1,  and,  by  a kiss,  carom  on  ball  2. 
Strike  the  cue-ball  I-  B,  L,  with  Q.  P.  3^,  the  object- 
ball  to  be  bit  j-V  E. 

Tbe  object  of  tbis  diagram  is  to  show  tbe  effect  of  a 
twist  on  tbe  cushion.  When  played  as  represented, 
tbe  cue-ball  will  be  thrown  off  in  a direction  opposite 
to  that  it  would  have  taken,  bad  it  hit  tbe  cushion 
where  ball  1 is  situated.  The  dotted  line  is  intended 
to  show  tbe  course  the  ball  would  have  taken,  bad  it 
been  played  without  tbe  twist’’  or  side-stroke. 


No.  14. 


LIBRAPV 


UNlVERSi'n 


No.  15, 


ill-  i h 

UNlVlKSiVV  U! 


1 


>v 


133 


DIAGRAM  NO.  XV. 

FOEMING  CTJE7ES  BY  A FOLLOW  AND  A FOECE. 

Fig.  1. — To  place  a ball  tipon  eacb  spot,  and  carom 
upon  them  by  means  of  a follo-w,  tbe  cue-baU  trans- 
cribing a curve  around  a bat,  wbicb  occupies  tbe  posi- 
tion of  tbe  circle.  Strike  tbe  cue-ball  A,  ^ L,  witb 
Q.  P.  3,  tbe  object-ball  to  be  bit  ^ E,  so  that  it  sbaJl 
take  tbe  direction  of  tbe  dotted  line. 

Fig.  2. — To  effect  a carom  witb  a force,  tbe  cue-ball 
transcribing  a curve  around  a bat  occupying  tbe  posi- 
tion of  tbe  circle.  Strike  tbe  cue-ball  B,  L,  witb 
Q.  P.  3|,  and  tbe  object-ball  i E.  In  effecting  tbis 
stroke,  tbe  bridge  and  cue  require  to  be  somewhat  ele- 
vated, to  give  a slight  bop  to  tbe  cue-ball. 


184 


DIAUEAM  NO.  XYI. 

MANAGING  THE  BALLS  SO  AS  TO  LEAVE  GOOD  BREAKS.” 

A perfect  mastery  of  tMs  art  is  probably  tbe  most 
important  to  tbe  player,  of  all . other  branches  of  the 
science.  After  he  has  mastered  the  follow,  the  force 
and  the  twist,  sJcill,  science^  and  judgment  combined  ai'e 
the  three  essentials  for  the  student  to  acquire.  For 
instance,  the  player  may  have  a simple  stroke,  either 
a hazard  or  a carom,  which,  when  effected,  will  leave 
the  balls  in  a position  where  even  an  adept  would  find 
it  difficult  to  count.  There  may,  at  the  same  time,  be 
other  strokes  on  the  table  less  easy  to  effect,  but  which, 
if  made,  would  leave  the  balls  in  a position  favorable 
for  a run ; in  such  a case  judgment  would  decide  tliat 
the  player  should  attempt  the  more  difficult  stroke,  to 
avail  himself  of  the  prospective  advantages  which  prob- 
ably will  result  from  it.  Judgment  makes  the  gi’eat 
difference  between  players — one  exercising  it  frequently 
contending  successfully  against  an  opponent  who  is  his 
superior  in  execution. 

Strike  the  cue-ball  ^ B,  f L,  with  Q.  P.  2|-,  the  ob- 
ject-ball to  be  hit  so  as  to  make  it  roll  over  the  lines, 
as  represented,  and  the  player  will  have  a break  of 
balls,  which,  with  judicious  management,  will  enable 
him  to  effect  a long  run. 


No.  16. 


I 


LIBRARY 
OF  FHF 

UNlVERSnt  Or  ILLiisui 


1 


No.  17. 


iJBRAPV 
OF  FHr 

Ui^lVERSiTY  OF  iUiNur^  . 


' ( 


'M^ 


139 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XYH. 

ANOTHER  ILLUSTRATION  ON  MANAGING  OR  NURSING  THE  BALLS 

Fig,  1. — To  play  on  ball  1,  and  effect  a carom,  leav 
ing  a good  break : strike  tbe  cue-ball  B,  L,  with 
Q.  P.  1|-,  the  object-ball  to  be  hit  so  as  to  make  it  roll 
over  the  line,  as  marked,  and  the  balls  will  approxi- 
mate the  positions  designated  by  the  black  spots. 

Fig.  2. — To  effect  a carom,  and  leave  a break  similar 
to  that  designated  by  the  black  spots : play  the  cue-ball, 
as  represented,  against  the  cushion,  striking  it  ^ L, 
with  Q.  P.  1^. 


140 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XYIIl. 

PUETHER  ILLUSTRATIONS  ON  NURSING  OR  MANAGING  THE  BALLS. 

We  will  suppose  the  cue-ball  to  be  in  hand,  and  one 
of  the  balls  a trifle  out  of  the  string,  the  other  two  in  po- 
sitions as  designated.  Here  are  three  different  positions 
represented  by  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3,  in  either  of  which  the 
cue-ball  may  be  placed.  To  play  from  position  marked 
1,  and  force  back  as  represented : strike  the  cue-ball 
f B,  4 L,  with  Q.  P.  1^,  hitting  the  object-ball  so  that 
it  rolls  over  and  returns  by  line  1.  Again,  from  po- 
sition 2 : strike  the  cue-ball  f B,  | L,  with  Q.  P.  3,  the 
object-ball  to  be  hit  so  as  to  roll  over  line  2.  From 
position  3 : strike  the  cue-ball  4 E,  with  Q.  P.  2,  the 
object-ball  to  be  hit  | E,  so  as  to  make  it  roll  over  line 
4 ; and  the  presumption  is,  that  good  breaks  will  be 
the  result  of  each  stroke. 


No.  18. 


IIBRARV 

1 OF  IHj- 

UNlVERSnroF  ii 


No.  19. 


\ 


145 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XIX. 

TAKING  ADVANTAGE  OF  THE  CHANCES  FOR  MAKING  POINTS. 

In  playing  billiards  we  frequently  find  tbe  balls  in 
a position  where  a count  can  be  effected  in  several  dif- 
ferent ways.  In  such  cases,  it  is  advisable  for  tbe 
player  to  take  into  consideration  tbe  probabilities  of 
effecting  tbe  stroke,  and  tbe  position  of  tbe  balls  there- 
after. If  tbe  stroke  be  at  all  doubtful,  be  should  play 
where  be  would  have  the  greatest  prospect  of  success, 
or,  in  other  words,  “take  tbe  chances.” 

We  will  again  suppose  tbe  cue-ball  to  be  in  band, 
and  tbe  player  wishing  to  secure  a good  break.  If  be 
is  playing  tbe  usual  game,  it  would  be  advisable  for 
him  to  play  on  tbe  object-ball,  so  as  to  pocket  it  and 
return  over  line  1,  in  this  way  taking  three  chances  to 
make  a count.  If  be  is  playing  caroms  alone,  it  would 
be  better  for  him  to  play  on  tbe  left  of  tbe  object-ball, 
so  as  to  draw  it  back  in  tbe  string,  as  near  the  other 
balls  as  possible.  To  make  tbe  first  stroke  : strike  tbe 
cue-ball  4 A,  ^ E,  with  Q.  P.  24,  and  if  tbe  object-ball 
be  pocketed  in  tbe  corner,  as  represented,  tbe  carom 
will  be  made  on  one  of  tbe  balls  numbered  2 and  8. 
To  make  the  second  stroke : strike  tbe  cue-ball  4 A, 
4 E,  with  Q.  P.  24,  the  object-ball  to  be  bit  f L. 

fy 

I 


% 


No.  20. 


• 

LIBRARY 
Of  IHf 

•UNiVtRSilY  Of  iLliNii’.' 


149 


DIAGKAM  NO.  XX. 

.<OME  FANCY  SHOTS  IN  COMMON  USE. 

We  haro  hitherto  confined  our  attention  to  the  illus- 
tration of  what  may  be  called  the  regular  game,  and 
the  explanation  of  those  principles  which  are  essential 
even  to  common  proficiency ; we  did  so,  lest  the  student 
should  embarrass  his  first  efforts  with  attempting  strokes 
beyond  his  skill. 

In  the  above  diagram  we  have  set  forth  a few  of  the 
fancy  shots,  now  in  very  general  use,  and  proposed 
among  good  players  as  a test  of  peculiar  skill.  In  cer- 
tain positions  of  the  game,  the  adept  will  find  them  do 
good  service ; but  we  must  still  caution  the  novice  that 
the  penalty,  should  he  attempt  them,  will  very  likely 
be  a rupture  of  the  cloth.  It  is  almost  impossible  to 
give  an  exact  verbal  description  of  these  strokes ; and 
players  who  aspire  to  make  them,  should  put  them- 
selves, for  a day  at  least,  under  the  tuition  of  a com- 
petent instructor ; it  would  be  cheaper  to  pay  him  five 
dollars  for  an  hour’s  instruction,  and  then  be  master 
of  the  art,  than  have  to  pay  thirty  dollars  for  a new 
cloth,  and  still  remain  ignorant  of  what  had  caused  the 
mistake. 

Fig.  1. — To  play  on  ball  1,  and,  by  a perpendicular 
force,  bring  back  the  cue-ball  so  as  to  carom  on  ball  2 : 
the  cue-ball  is  the  central  one  in  this  figure.  The  cue 
should  be  elevated,  as  marked  in  the  plate  of  cue  pO'« 


150 


sitions,  to  an  angle  of  at  least  forty-five  degrees ; tlie 
cue-ball  should  be  struck  as  marked  and  described  in 
said  plate,  with  Q.  P.  2 — ^the  object-ball  to  be  struck 
dead  full. 

Fig.  2 — Is  another  perpendicular  force,  the  object 
being  to  carom  on  balls  1 and  2,  as  represented.  Ele- 
vate the  cue,  as  before,  and  take  aim  for  that  part  of 
the  indented  line  where  the  curve  first  begins  to  act ; 
strike  the  cue-ball  ^ E,  with  Q.  P.  2|-. 

These  strokes  are  particularly  needed  in  playing  the 
French  carom  game,  and  are  much  practiced  by  the 
eminent  players  of  France.  Their  usual  game  having 
no  hazards  in  it,  they  excel  in  caroms,  on  the  principle 
that  makes  a blind  man’s  sense  of  touch  so  much  more 
exquisite  than  the  same  sense  in  persons  who  can  both 
see  and  feel ; — so  masterly  is  their  execution  of  these 
particular  forces,  that  were  we  to  delineate  some  of  the 
shots  which  we  have  seen  them  make,  and  made  our- 
selves under  their  instructions,  the  reader  would  be  in- 
clined to  suspect  us  of  pushing  his  credulity  too  far. 
For  our  own  part,  we  profess  no  peculiar  expertness 
in  these  strokes — at  least  none  that  M.  Berger  would 
consider  wonderful ; for  the  nature  of  our  game  does 
not  so  frequently  call  for  them.  The  novice  must  be 
careful  to  arrest  his  cue  after  the  stroke  is  delivered, 
for  otherwise  the  cloth  may  suffer  ; this  is  all  the  more 
difficult  from  the  quickness,  vigor,  and  vivacity  which 
the  stroke  imperatively  demands.  The  remaining 
problems  are  less  difficult. 


151 


Fig.  8. — To  play  on  ball  1,  and  by  a curve  to  clear 
ball  2,  and  carom  on  ball  3.  Strike  the  cue-ball  ^ A, 
I E,  with  Q.  P.  3| ; the  object-ball  must  be  struck 
AK 

Fig.  4 — Is  to  play  on  ball  1,  and,  by  a curve  which 
shall  clear  ball  2,  to  carom  back  on  ball  3 : to  do  this, 
strike  the  cue-ball  ^ B,  { L,  with  Q.  P.  3|-,  the  cue  to 
be  elevated  at  an  angle  of  not  more  than  thirty  degrees. 
This  degree  of  elevation  will  give  a combination  of  the 
“jump”  and  “perpendicular  force”  strokes,  marked  in 
the  plate  of  cue  positions,  without  which  the  stroke 
Could  not  be  made.  The  jump  will  cause  the  cue-ball 
to  advance  beyond  ball  2,  because  its  retrograding 
motion  cannot  come  into  play,  until  after  its  contact 
with  the  table ; as  soon  as  the  friction  begins  to  act 
against  the  retrograding  tendency  {i,  e.,  after  it  has 
jumped  beyond  ball  2),  it  will  then  recede,  in  a curve, 
as  marked,  and  strike  ball  3.  Mr.  J.  N.  White,  of 
Philadelphia,  particularly  excels  in  this  shot. 

Fig.  5 — ^Is  intended  to  show  the  effect  of  the  side- 
stroke  and  force,  on  the  angle  which  the  cue-ball  will 
make  after  coming  in  contact  with  the  cushion,  *the 
object-ball  being  previously  struck.  Strike  the  cue- 
ball  i B,  i L,  with  Q.  P.  3|-,  so  as  to  strike  the  object- 
ball  dead  full.  The  cue-ball  will  return  to  the  cushion, 
and  fly  off  at  the  angle  marked ; which  angle  will  be 
obtuser,  and  made  on  the  opposite  side  to  what  it  would 
have  been,  had  not  the  cue-ball  touched  the  object- 
ball  but  continued  on  to  the  end  cushion  opposite. 


LIBRARY 

OF  [Hi: 

UNiVBiSriY  OF  iLLf^iui 


LIBRARY 
OF  iH-v 


UNiVERSlTt  it 


155 


•DIAGRAM  NO.  XXI. 

This  diagram  is  introduced  to  show  the  advantage 
which  may  inure  to  the  player,  by  possessing  the 
ability  to  execute  perpendicular  strokes.  This  posi- 
tion of  the  balls  actually  occurred  in  a match  played 
in  San  Francisco,  between  the  author  and  a celebrated 
French  player,  where  the  reputation  of  both  players 
was  at  stake.  The  game  was  the  French  three-ball 
carom  game,  in  which  no  pushing  shots  are  permitted. 
The  parties  were  playing  100  points  up,  the  French- 
man having  but  three  points  to  make,  while  the  writer 
required  twenty-one  to  win  the  game.  Such  were  the 
conditions  of  the  game  when  the  position  of  the  balls, 
as  shown  in  the  diagram,  presented  itself;  and  the  au- 
thor, playing  a perpendicular  stroke,  effected  a carom, 
from  which  he  secured  a run  of  nine,  and  eventually 
won  the  game.  A represents  the  striker’s  ball,  0 that 
of  his  opponent,  and  B the  red  ball.  The  small  dots 
show  the  relative  positions  of  the  balls,  after  the  stroke 
was  effected — 'No.  1 being  the  striker’s  ball,  3 the  red, 
and  2 the  opponent’s  ball. 


156 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XXII. 

The  diagram  is  intended  to  illustrate  both  execution 
and  judgment.  This  position  of  the  balls  also  occurred 
in  the  match  referred  to  in  the  description  of  the  pre- 
ceding diagram,  and  was  the  game-shot  of  the  rubber. 
It  would  have  been  a much  simpler  method  of  making 
the  stroke  for  the  author  to  have  played  upon  No.  2, 
than  taken  the  side-cushion  and  caromed  directly  upon 
No.  3.  But,  in  case  the  stroke  had  been  unsuccessful, 
the  balls  would  have  been  left  in  a favorable  position 
for  the  opponent.  It  must  be  recollected  that  the 
French  three-ball  carom  game  is  as  much  a game  of 
defence  as  attack ; hence,  safety  is  an  essential  element, 
to  which  the  player  must  direct  his  attention.  No.  1 
represents  the  striker’s  ball,  No.  2 that  of  his  opponent, 
and  3 the  red  ball ; hence,  it  will  be  readily  seen  that 
the  striker,  by  playing  the  shot  as  represented  in  the 
diagram,  would  have  left  the  balls  in  a much  safer  po- 
sition had  he  proved  unsuccessful,  than  would  have 
been  the  case  had  he  failed  in  making  the  simpler 
carom. 


LiBRAKV 
OF  Th! 
UNjVEHSHv  fu 


No.  23. 


161 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XXHL 

The  shot,  as  reprecented  in  the  diagram,  is  to  play 
with  ball  No.  1,  effecting  a carom  on  balls  2 and  3, 
and  pocketing  balls  2 and  3 in  the  corner  where  ball  3 
is  represented. 

To  effect  this  shot  play  on  ball  2 dead  full,  with 
strength  enough  to  make  it  travel  over  the  space 
covered  by  the  line,  as  laid  down  in  the  diagram. 
Strike  the  cue-ball  about  A,  | E,  with  Q.  P.  3^  to  4, 
and  it  will  hug  the  cushion  as  represented,  and  carom 
on  ball  3 and  pocket  it.  The  twist  communicated 
to  the  cue-ball  will  then  act  on  the  side-cushion,  and 
cause  it  to  roll  out  of  the  way  ere  ball  2 reaches  its 
place  of  destination. 

This  proposition  will  not  be  new  to  any  readers  of 
the  Billiard  Cue^  to  which  paper  it  was  originally  con- 
tributed by  the  writer.  It  seems  simple  now,  when 
the  lines  are  drawn  which  illustrate  it ; but  as  the  . 
proposition  first  appeared — the  position  of  the  balls 
being  only  indicated,  and  not  the  method  of  effecting 
the  shot — many  attempts  were  made,  before  the  stroke 
was  finally  accomplished  by  one  of  our  most  distin- 
guished amateurs. 


162 


DIAGRAM  NO.  XXIY. 

This  diagram  shows  a favorite  stroke  of  Mr.  C.  Bird^ 
of  Philadelphia,  who  is  frequently  requested  by  his 
friends  to  make  it.  The  object  is  to  take  six  cush- 
ions, and  effect  the  carom  on  balls  1 and  2,  as  repre- 
sented. 

Strike  the  cue-ball  f L,  with  Q.  P.  3|-  to  4,  the  ob- 
ject-ball to  be  hit  fine  on  the  right. 


No.  24. 


UHiVBSU 


Of 

Or 


No.  25. 


library 
OF  THF 

university  OF  ILUNU 


167 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XXY. 

The  letters  A,  B,  0,  and  D,  on  the  diagram  opposite, 
show  the  position  of  the  Spots  on  the  billiard  table. 
In  placing  them,  a line  is  drawn  down  the  centre  of 
the  table,  from  the  centre  nails  or  sights  in  the  head 
and  lower  cushions ; another  line  is  then  drawn  from 
the  centre  sights  in  the  side  cushions,  across  the  table, 
and  where  the  lines  intersect,  the  spots  are  placed. 
The  spot  at  A,  being  next  the  head  of  the  table,  is  the 
light  red  spot,  and  an  imaginary  line  across  the  table 
at  this  point  is  the  string ; the  spot  at  B is  the  dark 
red  spot. 

The  spot  at  C is  the  English  spot,  which  is  to  be 
thirteen  inches  from  the  end  or  lower  cushion,  and  is 
used  in  playing  the  English  game,  but  in  this  country 
it  is  generally  put  about  nine  inches  from  the  lower 
cushion. 

The  spot  at  D is  for  two  ball  pool,  and  is  placed 
about  five  inches  from  the  lower  cushion. 

E shows  the  Pin  Pool  spots,  that  in  the  centre  being 
number  five ; each  of  the  others  should  be  placed 
about  2^  inches  from  it,  in  the  position  represented  on 
diagram. 

E shows  the  position  of  the  balls  in  playing  fifteen 
ball  pooh  The  balls  are  placed  in  a triangular  frame. 


168 


so  as  to  insure  exactness — ^the  base  of  the  triangle  being 
parallel  with  the  end,  or  lower  cushion  of  the  table. 
The  highest  number,  fifteen,  should  be  placed  on  the 
deep  red  spot,  at  B. 

Figures  1 and  2 show  the  positions  of  the  semicircles, 
or  playing  points,  for  the  English  and  French  games. 

In  playing  the  English  game,  the  semicircle  is  drawn 
from  the  light  red  spot,  with  a radius  of  ten  inches. 
In  England  the  spot  is  placed  two  feet  six  inches  from 
the  cushion. 

The  semicircle  for  the  French  game  is  drawn  with  a 
radius  of  four  and  a half  inches  on  the  French  table, 
but  on  the  American  full-sized  table,  it  should  have  a 
radius  of  five  inches. 


CHAPTER  V. 


A CODE  TO  REGULATE  AND  REDUCE  TO  UNIFORMITY  THE  DIFFERENT 

GAMES  OF  BILLIARDS,  AS  PLAYED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  AND 

ELSEWHERE. 

To  establisli  sucli  a billiard-code  as  wonld  meet  with 
tbe  general  approbation  and  consent  of  billiard-players 
in  all  parts  of  the  Union,  wonld  indeed  be  “ a consum- 
mation most  devoutly  to  be  wished  ’’ — a consummation, 
also,  more  to  be  prayed  for  than  expected. 

In  things  the  most  trivial,  as  in  things  the  most 
grave,  it  is  difiS.cult  to  make  any  large  majority  of  men 
view  any  matter  in  precisely  the  same  light.  Some 
are  prejudiced  to  this  side,  and  others  have  their  early 
convictions  inclining  them  to  that.  All  may  deplore 
the  disagreement — all  may  sigh  for  a uniformity  of 
system ; but  few  are  prepared  to  abandon  their  peculiar 
ideas,  without  the  sacrifice  of  which  no  uniformity  can 
be  attained. 

In  the  rules  laid  down  for  playing  the  various  games 
of  billiards,  this  evil  has  been  further  aggravated  by 
the  petty  jealousies  of  those  engaged  in  the  billiard 
business.  Each  one  establishes  a code  of  regulations 
for  himself — a code  in  which  it  would  appear  to  be  his 
object  to  differ  as  much  as  possible  from  the  codes 

8 


170 


The  Game  of  Billiaehs. 


adopted  by  tbe  other  brethren  of  his  profession.  Cer- 
tain manufacturers  of  quasi  billiard  tables,  not  knowing 
anything  of  the  game  themselves,  and  therefore  not  be- 
ing competent  to  decide  which  of  these  conflicting 
codes  is  correct,  pick  out  whichever  one  comes  readiest 
to  hand,  and  accompany  the  sale  of  everything  they 
call  a table  with  a framed  and  printed  copy  of  this 
“ code.”  In  this  way  the  country  is  flooded  with  con- 
flicting rules,  which  frequently  cause  disputes  that 
might  otherwise  be  avoided. 

“Let  the  cobbler  stick  to  his  last,”  is  a maxim  of 
great  wisdom  and  antiquity ; and  one  would  really 
think,  according  to  recent  developments,  that  these 
“ manufacturers”  might  find  employment  for  some  time 
further  in  attempting  to  improve  the  cushions  and 
other  parts  of  their  table  gear,  which  are  notoriously 
defective  and  condemned.  As  a general  rule,  they  are 
ignorant  of  the  game,  and  opposed  to  any  innovation  in 
its  mechanical  appliances,  even  though  the  innovation 
contains  the  most  important  improvement.  Their 
ignorance  we  account  for  on  the  same  principle  that 
is  said  to  make  “the  confectioner  less  fond  of  sweet- 
meats than  any  man  in  the  parish.”  From  the  hour 
of  their  apprenticeship  they  look  upon  the  table  as 
the  object  of  their  labor  and  the  means  of  obtaining 
bread.  They  never  associate  the  board  with  any 
sensations  of  amusement ; and  when  in  search  of  pleas- 
ure, they  will  seek  it  in  whatever  game  can  least 
remind  them  of  their  toil.  That  they  should  be  op- 
posed to  innovations  is  extremely  natural,  therefore 
— seeing  that  they  take  no  individual  interest  in  the 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


171 


science  of  the  game,  and  that  every  alteration  requires 
so  much  more  time  and  trouble,  and  throws  them  so 
much  out  from  the  mill-horse  round  in  which  they 
have  been  accustomed  loj^roceed  progressing. 

In  drawing  up  the  following  rules,  the  author  hopes 
they  are  such  as  may  meet  with  general  adoption.  He 
has  practiced  what  he  preaches  in  the  forepart  of  this 
article,  and  sacrificed  such  of  his  private  opinions  as  he 
found  to  be  at  variance  with  the  customs  most  in  vogue. 
He  has  seen  differences  arise  and  lead  to  angry  words, 
in  cases  where  both  players  were  correct,  according  to 
the  codes  in  use  in  the  different  sections  from  which 
each  came.  They  met  perhaps  on  “ neutral  ground  ” 
— ^in  a city  where  the  code  was  entirely  different  from 
that  professed  by  either;  and  who  could  then  deter- 
mine from  which  side  the  concession  should  be  made  ? 

In  the  sincere  hope  of  obviating  these  difficulties 
for  the  future,  the  author  has  compiled  this  code,  with 
a view  to  its  general  adoption  as  the  standard  law ; 
and  to  prove  that  he  is  actuated  by  a sincere  desire  for 
uniformity,  and  not  by  any  vain  conceit  that  his  stand- 
ing as  a billiard-player  is  such  as  to  make  his  ipse  dixit 
be  received  as  incontrovertible,  he  hereby  promises  to 
be  governed  by  any  other  code  which  a convention  of 
billiard-players,  from  .the  different  sections  of  the 
Union,  may  be  induced  to  agree  upon. 

He  flatters  himself  that  he  has  already  done  enough 
for  the  game  of  billiards,  to  guarantee  that  he  has  the 
development  of  its  scientific  principles  sincerely  at 
heart : his  improvements  in  the  tables  and  cushions, 
more  especially,  were  not  made  without  the  sacrifice 


172 


The  GtAme  of  Billiaki^jj. 


of  mucli  time  and  money.  The  latter  has  been  amply, 
and  more  than  amply  repaid  to  him  by  the  generous 
appreciation  which  the  billiard-playing  public  have 
bestowed  on  the  result  of  his  labors:  but  it  would  re- 
quire something  more  than  money  to  compensate  either 
himself  or  his  friends  for  the  bitterness  of  calumny 
with  which  those  who  are  naturally  opposed  to  all  in- 
novations, as  afore-mentioned,  have  since  pursued  both 
the  inventions  and  inventor. 

It  would,  indeed,  be  a much  desired  result,  should 
these  rules  be  universally  adopted.  ^ 


THE  AMEKIOAH  OR  FOUR-BALL  GAME. 


RULE  I. 

ON  STRINGING  FOR  THE  LEAD. 

Whoever,  playing  from  within  the  ‘^string-line” 
against  an  outside  cushion,  brings  the  returning  cue- 
ball  nearest  the  head  cushion,  which  is  the  one  at 
which  the  players  stand,  is  entitled  to  choice  of  balls 
and  lead.  Provided, 

1.  That,  in  stringing,  the  player’s  ball  has  not 
touched  his  opponent’s,  while  the  latter  was  at  rest. 
2.  Nor  has  fallen  into  any  of  the  pockets.  In 
either  case  the  player  loses  choice  and  lead.  3. 
Should  the  cue-balls,  both  being  in  motion,  come  in 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


173 


contact,  the  strokes  are  invalid,  and  must  be  played 
over. 

[As  soon  as  the  lead  has  been  won,  the  light-red  and  deep-red  balls  are  to  b© 
placed  on  their  appropriate  spots.  This  regulation,  it  will  be  understood,  is  in- 
tended more  particularly  for  match  games.  In  ordinary  games,  where  it  is  usual 
for  the  marker  or  table-keeper  to  spot  the  balls  as  soon  as  he  brings  them  to  the 
table,  it  shall  be  optional  with  the  players  to  remove  them  or  not.  But  in  no  case 
must  a cue-ball,  while  being  “strung,”  come  in  contact  with  a red  ball,  which,  when 
once  properly  spotted,  is  not  to  be  moved  aside.  The  player  whose  ball  comes  in 
contact  with  a red,  or  the  other  white  while  it  is  at  rest,  forfeits  his  claim  to  choice 
of  balls  and  the  lead.  Should  both  cue-balls  come  in  contact  with  a red,  the  play 
ers  must  “string”  again,] 

2.  In  stringing,’’  it  is  required  that  both  cue-balls 
shall  be  struck  simultaneously,  or  so  nearly  together 
that  one  ball  cannot  reach  the  lower  cushion  before 
the  other  has  been  put  in  motion. 


EULE  II. 

ON  LEADING. 

1.  The  player  who  wins  the  choice  of  balls  and  lead 
must  either  roll  his  ball  down  toward  the  lower  cush* 
ion,  as  an  object  for  his  adversary  to  play  at,  or  else 
compel  his  adversary  to  lead  off,  as  above  described. 

2.  In  leading,  the  player’s  ball  must  be  played  from 
within  the  string-line,  and  struck  with  sufficient 
strength  to  carry  it  beyond  the  deep-red  ball  on  its 
appropriate  spot  at  the  foot  of  the  table.  But  it  must 
not  be  played  with  such  strength  as  to  repass,  after 
having  come  in  contact  with  the  lower  cushion,  the 
deep-red  ball.  Nor  yet  must  it  touch  either  red  ball, 
nor  lodge  on  the  cushion,  nor  fall  into  a pocket,  nor 
jump^off  the  table.  In  any  of  the  cases  mentioned  in 


174 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


this  sectioD,  or  in  case  the  cue-ball  is  not  struck  with 
sufficient  strength  to  pass  beyond  the  deep-red,  it  shall 
be  optional  with  the  adversary  (Player  No.  2)  to  make 
No.  1 spot  his  ball  on  the  pool  spot  nearest  the  lower 
cushion,  or  lead  again ; or  he  may  take  the  lead  him- 
self. 

3.  No  count  or  forfeiture  can  be  made  or  incurred 
until  two  strokes  have  been  played. 

[For  the  purpose  of  Section  3,  the  “lead  off”  is  considered  a stroke,  and  no  for- 
feiture of  points  shall  be  exacted  either  for  the  compulsory  miss  made  by  the  lead- 
ing player,  or  for  his  ball  falling  into  a pocket.] 

4.  Once  the  lead  is  made,  the  game  is  considered  as 
commenced,  and  neither  player  can  withdraw  except 
under  circumstances  specified  in  Pule  YII. 


RULE  III. 

ON  OPENING  THE  GAME. 

1.  The  game  is  opened  by  player  No.  2 playing  on 
the  white  ball  at  the  foot  of  the  table. 

2.  Should  he  fail  to  hit  the  white  first,  or  fail  to  hit 
it  at  all,  he  forfeits  one  point,  which  shall  be  added  to 
his  adversary’s  score.  Should  he  pocket  himself  after 
hitting  a red  ball  first,  he  loses  three  points,  even 
though  he  may  have  subsequently  hit  the  white. 

[Hitting  a red  ball  first,  at  the  opening  of  the  game,  when  the  white  isi^te  only* 
ball  that  can  be  played  directly  upon,  is  tantamount  to  a miss.  Hence  the  penalty 
of  three  for  a pocket  when  a red  ball  has  been  struck  first.  The  red,  when  dis- 
turbed, must  be  replaced  on  its  proper  spot,  if  vacant ; if  the  spot  is  occupied  by 
another  ball,  the  red  must  remain  off  the  table  until  its  spot  is  uncovered  and  all 
the  balls  have  ceased  rolling.]  . • 


The  Game  op  Billiards. 


175 


RULE  IV. 

ON  FOEFEITUEES. 

1.  If  the  striker  fails  to  hit  any  of  the  other  balls 
with  his  own,  he  forfeits  one  point,  which,  as  well  as 
other  forfeitures,  must  be  added  to  his  adversary’s 
score, 

[There  are  two  exceptions  to  this  rule.  The  first  occurs  in  leading  off,  and  has 
already  been  explained.  The  second  is  where  the  cue-ball,  while  at  rest,  is  in  con- 
tact with  another  ball.  Then  the  player  does  not  forfeit.  It  is  impossible  to  cause 
the  cue-ball  to  hit,  by  a direct  stroke,  the  ball  with  which  it  is  in  contact,  and  the 
player  should  not  be  penalized  for  failing  to  accomplish  an  impossibility.  But,  as 
it  is  possible  for  him  to  count  by  playing  away  from  that  ball — for  example,  by 
striking  some  other  ball,  or  a cushion,  or  by  taking  up  all  the  balls  if  his  own 
is  in  contact  with  two  or  more — it  is  a settled  ruling  that,  in  case  he  should  pocket 
his  ball  either  by  accident  or  design,  or  send  it  over  the  table,  or  cause  it  to  lodge 
upon  the  cu.shion,  he  must  pay  forfeit — tico  points,  if  his  ball  was  in  contact  with 
a white,  and  three  if  with  a red.] 

2.  The  striker  forfeits  two  when  the  ball  that  he 
plays  with  is  pocketed,  or  lodges  on  the  cushion,  or 
goes  over  the  table,  after  having  struck  or  been  in 
fixed  contact  witli  the  otlier  white,  no  matter  whether 
it  has  touched  one  or  both  of  the  reds, 

[An  exception  to  this  clause  will  be  found  in  liule  III.,  Sec.  2.] 

3.  The  striker  forfeits  three  when  the  ball  that  he 
plays  with  is  pocketed,  or  lodges  on  the  cushion,  or 
goes  over  the  table,  after  having  come  in  contact  with 
one  or  both  of  the  reds,  and  not  the  white.  The 
same  applies  if  neither  red  nor  white  be  struck. 

[By  “lodging  on  the  cushion”  is  meant  a ball  that  has  bounded  off  the  bed  of 
the  table  and  become  settled  on  the  top  of  the  cushion.  Should  the  cue-ball,  after 
mounting  the  cushion,  return  to  the  bed  of  the  table  and  effect  a carom  or  a hazard, 
the  stroke  is  fair,  and  must  be  counted.] 

4.  If  the  player  cause  any  ball  to  jump  off  the  table, 


176 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


and  should  it,  by  striking  any  of  the  bystanders,  be 
flung  back  upon  the  table,  it  must  still  be  treated  as 
if  it  had  fallen  to  the  floor.  If  a red  ball,  it  must  be 
spotted ; if  a white,  held  in  hand.  Should  it  be  the 
last  striker’s  ball,  he  forfeits  two  or  three,  the  same  as 
if  it  had  gone  into  a pocket. 


RULE  V. 

ON  FOUL  STEOKES. 

The  penalty  of  a foul  stroke  is,  that  the  player 
cannot  count  any  points  he  may  have  made  by  such 
stroke,  and  his  adversary  is  entitled  to  the  next  play. 
The  following,  in  addition  to  those  already  mentioned, 
are  foul  strokes : — 

1.  If  either  player  plays  with  his  opponent’s  ball, 
the  stroke  is  foul ; and,  if  successful,  he  cannot  count, 
provided  the  error  is  found  out  before  a second  shot  is 
made. 

2.  Should  two  or  more  strokes  have  been  made 
previous  to  the  discovery,  the  reckoning  cannot  be 
disturbed,  and  the  player  may  continue  his  run  with 
the  same  ball,  or  he  may  have  the  balls  changed. 
The  same  privilege  is  extended  to  the  opposing  player 
when  his  turn  comes  to  play. 

3.  Should  it  be  found  that  both  players  have  used 
the  wrong  ball  successively,  he  who  was  flrst  to  play 
with  the  wrong  ball  cannot  put  in  a claim  of  foul 
against  his  opponent,  as  the  latter,  in  using  the  wrong 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


177 


ball,  was  simply  playing  from  his  proper  position  on 
the  table. 

[It  is  the  position  of  the  cue-hall,  and  not  its  mere  color  or  designation,  that 
governs.  Aside  from  this,  before  one  player  can  charge  another  with  error,  it 
must  be  shown  that  no  act  of  his  contributed  to  that  error.] 

4.  Though  the  striker,  when  playing  with  the  wrong 
ball,  cannot  count  what  points  he  may  make,  except 
in  those  cases  mentioned  above,  nevertheless,  whatever 
forfeitures  he  may  incur  while  playing  with  the  wrong 
ball,  he  is  bound  to  pay,  as  if  he  had  been  playing 
with  his  own. 

5.  Should,  however,  both  the  white  balls  be  off  the 
table  together,  and  should  either  player,  by  mistake, 
pick  up  the  wrong  one  and  play  with  it,  the  stroke 
must  stand,  and  he  can  count  whatever  he  has  made. 

[As  he  plays  from  his  proper  position,  it  is  immaterial,  because  no  advantage 
is  to  be  gained,  which  ball  he  uses.  In  this  case,  as  in  the  others  where  it  is  per- 
mitted to  play  with  the  wrong  ball,  the  balls  should  be  changed  at  the  conclusio* 
of  the  run.  This  will  prevent  confusion  and  disputes.] 

6.  If  the  striker  play  at  a ball  before  it  is  fully  at 
rest,  or  while  any  other  ball  is  rolling  on  the  table, 
the  stroke  is  foul. 

7.  If,  after  going  into  a pocket,  a cue-ball  or  an 
object-ball  should  rebound  and  return  to  the  bed  of 
the  table,  it  must  be  treated  as  a ball  not  pocketed. 

8.  If  the  player,  when  playing  with  the  butt  or  side 
of  his  cue,  does  not  withdraw  the  butt  or  side  before 
the  cue-ball  touches  the  first  object-ball,  the  stroke  is 
foul. 

9.  A stroke  made  while  a red  ball  is  off  the  table, 
provided  its  spot  is  unoccupied,  is  foul.  When  its 
proper  spot  is  occupied,  the  red  must  remain  off  the 


178 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


table  until  its  spot  is  vacated  and  all  tlie  balls  have 
ceased  rolling.  [See  following  rule.] 

10.  If  the  game  being  played  is  one  in  which  hazards? 
or  pockets,  do  not  count,  a red  ball  that  has  been  pock- 
eted or  forced  off  the  table  shall  be  spotted  on  another 
spot,  provided  its  own  is  occupied,  and  provided,  also, 
the  non-striker’s  ball  is  off  the  table  at  the  time.  If  the 
light-red,  it  shall  be  placed  on  tlie  dark-red  spot ; and 
if  that  spot  is  occupied,  the  light-red  shall  be  placed 
on  the  pool  spot  at  the  foot  of  the  table.  If  the 
dark-red,  it  shall  be  placed  on  the  light  red-spot, 
&c.  If  both  reds  are  off  the  table  at  the  same 
time,  and  their  spots  are  occupied  by  the  two  whites, 
one  of  the  reds  may  be  placed  on  the  pool  spot. 
The  other  must  remain  off  the  table  until  its  proper 
spot  is  vacant. 

[Where  hazards  are  played,  there  is  no  necessity  for  this  rule.  The  old  one, 
which  still  applies  to  hazard  playing,  was  framed  when  the  full  game  (t.  e.,  hazards 
and  caroms)  was  in  vogue  in  this  country.  The  carom  game  has  superseded  the  full 
game,  and  it  has  been  found  necessary  to  remodel  this  rule.  It  has  often  happened, 
under  the  rule  relative  to  a pocketed  red  ball,  that  a carom  could  not  by  any  possi- 
sibility  be  made.  For  example,  one  player,  in  making  a carom,  accidentally  holes 
his  own  ball  and  the  dark  red.  The  other  white  ball,  which  has  also  been  struck, 
stops  in  such  a position  as  to  prevent  the  spotting  of  the  red.  The  incoming 
player,  who  did  not  contribute  in  any  way  toward  the  mishap,  or,  it  may  be, 
misplay  of  his  opponent,  and  should  not  be  made  to  suifer  therefor,  has  but  one 
ball  at  his  command.  How  is  he  to  make  a carom  ? In  the  old  or  full  game,  he 
could  count  by  pocketing  the  light-red;  but  in  the  carom  game  he  can  make  no 
count  whatever.  As  the  spirit  and  intent  of  billiards  is  to  count,  it  needs  no 
argument  to  convince  the  reader  that  that  system  of  play  must  be  false  which  at 
any  time  makes  counting  an  utter  impossibility.  It  is  partly  with  this  view  that 
the  rule  relative  to  balls  in  fixed  contact  has  been  amended  so  that  a count  may  be 
effected  when,  through  an  inequality  in  the  cloth  or  balls,  the  cue-ball  adheres  to 
two  or  more  others,  thus  precluding  either  a carom  or  a hazard.] 

11.  If,  after  making  a successful  stroke,  the  player 
obstructs  or  otherwise  affects  the  free  course  of  any 


The  Gtame  of  Billiakds. 


179 


ball  in  motion,  the  stroke  is  foul,  and  he  cannot  score 
the  points  made  thereby. 

12.  A touch  is  a shot.  And  if,  while  the  balls  are 

at  rest,  a player  touches  or  disturbs  any  ball  on  the 
table  other  than  his  own,  it  is  foul.  He  has,  however, 
the  privilege  of  playing  a stroke  for  safety,  provided 
his  own  ball  has  not  been  touched,  but  he  can  make 
no  count  on  the  shot.  * 

13.  In.  playing  a shot,  if  the  cue  leaves  the  ball  and 
touches  it  again,  the  stroke  is  foul. 

14.  If  the  striker,  through  stretching  forward  or 
otherwise,  has  not  at  least  one  foot  on  the  floor  while 
striking,  the  shot  is  foul,  and  no  points  can  be  reckoned. 

15.  If,  when  the  player’s  ball  is  in  hand,  he  does  not 
cause  it  to  pass  outside  the  string  before  touching  any 
of  the  object-balls  or  cushion  (except  in  the  case 
mentioned  in  the  following  rule)  the  stroke  is  foul, 
and  his  opponent  may  choose  whether  he  will  play 
with  the  balls  as  they  are,  have  them  replaced  in  their 
original  positions,  or  cause  the  stroke  to  be  played 
over;  or,  should  the  player  make  a losing  hazard 
under  such  circumstances,  the  penalty  may  be  en- 
forced. 

16.  Playing  at  a ball  whose  base  or  point  of  contact 
with  the  table  is  outside  the  “ string,”  is  considered 
playing  out  of  the  string  ” ; and  the  stroke  is  a 
fair  one,  even  though  the  side  which  the  cue-ball 
strikes  is  hanging  over,  and  therefore  within  the 

string.” 

17.  Playing  directly  at  a ball  that  is  considered  in 
the  string”  is  foul,  even  though  the  cue-ball  should 


180 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


pass  wholly  beyond  the  string  ” line  before  coming 
in  contact. 

18.  Giving  a miss  inside  the  “ string,”  when  the 
player  is  in  hand,  is  foul.  But  he  may,  for  safety, 
cause  his  ball  to  go  out  of  the  “ string  ” and  return. 

19.  If  a player  alters  the  stroke  he  is  about  to  make, 
at  the  suggestion  of  any  parity  in  the  room — even  if 
it  be  at  the  suggestion  of  his  partner  in  a double 
match — the  altered  stroke  is  foul. 

20.  Placing  marks  of  any  kind  whatever,  either 
upon  the  cushions  or  table,  is  foul ; and  a player, 
while  engaged  in  a game,  has  no  right  to  practice  a 
particular  stroke  on  another  table. 

RULE  YI. 

ON  OASES  WHEEE  THE  BALLS  AEE  IN  CONTACT. 

[At  the  request  of  a majority  of  the  leading  play- 
ers, amateur  and  professional,  the  rule  observed  since 
1858,  under  which  no  count  could  be  effected  unless 
the  striker  first  played  upon  some  ball  other  than  that 
with  which  his  own  was  in  contact,  has  been  amended 
as  below.  The  new  rule  went  into  efiect  January  1, 
1867.] 

1.  When  the  cue-ball  is  in  contact  with  any  other 
ball,  the  striker  may  effect  a count  either  by  playing 
first  upon  some  ball  other  than  that  with  which  his 
own  is  in  contact,  or  by  playing  first  against  the  cush- 
ion, or  by  a masses.  In  either  of  tlie  two  last-men- 
tioned cases,  it  is  immaterial  which  ball  the  returning 
cue-ball  strikes  first. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


181 


2.  Should  the  cue-ball  be  in  contact  with  all  the 
other  balls  on  the  table — or,  if  with  two  balls  only, 
while  the  remaining  ball  is  on  the  table,  in  such  a way 
that  the  striker  cannot  play  either  on  the  free  ball  or 
the  cushion  first — it  shall  be  optional  with  him  to 
have  all  the  balls  taken  up  and  the  reds  spotted  as  at 
the  commencement  of  the  game.  It  shall  also  be  at 
his  option  to  take  the  lead  himself  or  compel  his 
opponent  to  lead. 

[This  is  the  same  as  starting  the  game  anew,  except  that  there  is  no  occasion  to 
“ string  ” for  the  lead  and  choice  of  balls.  The  siiarpers  trick  of  first  betting  that 
he  can  so  place  the  four  balls  that  his  dupe  can  make  no  legitimate  countoff  of 
them,  and  then  surrounding  the  cue  ball  with  the  other  three  in  firm  contact,  is 
thus  done  away  with.] 


RULE  VII. 

ON  WITHDEAWING  FEOM,  -WITHOUT  FINISHING,  A GAME. 

1.  The  player  may  protest  against  his  adversary's 
standing  in  front  of  him,  or  in  such  close  proximity 
as  to  disarrange  his  aim. 

2.  Also,  against  loud  talking  or  any  other  annoy- 
ance by  his  opponent,  while  he  is  making  his  play. 

3.  Also,  against  being  refused  the  use  of  the 
bridge,  or  any  other  of  the  instruments  used  in  that 
room  in  playing,  except  where  a special  stipulation  to 
the  contrary  was  made  before  commencing  the  game. 

4r.  Or  in  case  his  adversary  shall  refuse  to  abide 
by  the  marker’s,  referee’s,  or  company’s  decision  on 
a disputed  poiixt,  which  it  was  agreed  between  them 
to  submit  to  the  marker,  or  company,  for  arbitration. 


182 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


In  any  one,  or  all  of  the  foregoing  cases,  if  the  dis- 
courtesj^  be  persisted  in,  the  party  aggrieved  is  at 
liberty  to  withdraw,  and  the  game  shall  be  considered 
as  drawn,  and  any  stakes  which  may  have  been  de- 
pending on  it  must  be  returned. 

5.  Should  the  interruption  or  annoyance  have 
been  accidental,  the  marker,  if  so  requested  by  the 
player,  who  is  entitled  to  repeat  his  stroke,  must  re- 
place the  balls  as  near  as  possible  in  the  position  they 
occupied  before  the  player  made  the  stroke  in  which 
he  was  interrupted. 


RULE  VIIL 

ON  OASES  IN  WHICH  THE  MAEHEB  MUST  REPLACE  THE  BALLS,  IF 
CALLED  ON,  AS  NEARLY  AS  POSSIBLE  IN  THEIR  FORMER  POSITION. 

1.  In  the  case  mentioned  in  the  5th  paragraph  of. 
the  preceding  rule. 

2.  Where  any  of  the  balls,  when  at  rest,  are 
moved  by  accident. 

3.  Where  any  of  the  balls,  while  rolling,  are  sud- 
denly obstructed  either  by  accident,  or  design  on  the 
part  of  any  person  other  than  the  player.  In  this 
case,  the  marker,  if  so  requested  by  the  players  or 
referee,  shall  place  the  interrupted  ball  as  nearly  as 
possible  in  the  situation  wdiich  it  would  apparently 
have  occupied  had  it  not  been  stopped. 

4.  Where  the  cue-ball,  resting  on  the  edge  of  a 
pocket,  drops  into  it  before  the  striker  has  time  to  play. 

5.  Where  the  object-ball,  in  a similar  position,  is 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


183 


rolled  back  into  the  pocket  by  any  of  the  ordinary 
vibrations  of  the  table  or  atmosphere. 

6.  In  all  the  cases  aforementioned,  where  it  is 
specified  that  in  consequence  of  a foul  stroke  the 
player’s  opponent  shall  have  tlie  option,  either  of  play- 
ing at  the  balls  as  they  are,  or  causing  them  to  be  re- 
placed by  the  marker. 

7.  When  either  or  both  of  the  red  balls  are 
pocketed,  or  forced  off  the  table,  it  is  the  marker’s 
duty  to  spot  them  before  another  stroke  is  played — 
except  (the  game  being  played  is  caroms  and  pockets) 
the  spot  appropriate  to  either  be  occupied  by  one  of 
the  playing  balls,  in  which  case  the  red  one  must  be 
kept  in  hand  until  its  position  is  uncovered. 

8.  If,  after  playing  a ball,  the  player  should  at- 
tempt to  obstruct  or  accelerate  its  progress  by  striking 
it  again,  blowing  at  it,  or  any  other  means,  his  oppo- 
nent may  either  play  at  the  balls  as  they  stand,  or  call 
upon  the  referee  or  marker  to  replace  them  in  the 
position  they  would  otherwise  have  occupied. 

9.  It  is  the  duty  of  each  player  to  see  that  a ball  is 
properly  spotted  before  the  next  stroke  is  made.  As 
in  the  case  where  a player  is  in  hand,  a claim  of  foul, 
after  the  cue-ball  has  been  struck  in  the  one  instance, 
and  the  red  ball  disturbed  in  another,  cannot  be  enter- 
tained. All  claims  to  the  effect  that  the  red  ball  is 
not  on  its  spot,  or  that  the  striker’s  ball  is  not  inside 
the  string”  when  he  is  about  to  play  after  having 
been  in  hand,  should  be  made  before  the  stroke  is 
played,  as  it  can  seldom  be  decided,  after  the  stroke, 
whether  there  was  any  ground  for  the  claim. 


184 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


RULE  IX. 

ON  THE  DUTY  OF  PLAYEES  TO  EACH  OTHER. 

1.  Each  pla)"er  must  look  after  his  own  interest, 
and  exercise  his  own  discretion.  His  opponent  can- 
not be  compelled  to  answer  such  questions  as,  Is  the 
ball  outside  or  inside  the  string?’’  Are  the  balls  in 
contact  ? ” and  so  forth.  These  are  questions  for  the 
player’s  own  judgment  to  decide. 

2.  When  the  cue-ball  is  very  near  another  ball,  the 
player  must  not  play  directly  upon  that  ball  without 
having  warned  his  adversary  that  they  do  not  touch, 
and  given  him  or  his  umpire  time  to  be  satisfied  on 
that  point. 

[As,  in  the  event  of  his  ball  being  “fast,”  the  only  effect  would  be  to  prevent  his 
playing  directly  upon  that  ball,  it  is  the  striker’s  privilege  to  play,  and  without 
giving  warning,  upon  some  other  ball  that  is  manifestly  at  a distance  from  his 
own.] 

3.  It  is  obligatory  upon  the  adversary  or  umpire  to 
call  time !”  or  give  some  other  notice  of  his  ap- 
proach, if,  while  the  player  is  preparing  to  make  a 
stroke,  either  of  them  desires  to  look  at  the  balls,  or 
submit  a question  to  the  referee. 

4.  Each  player  should  attend  strictly  to  his  own 
game,  and  never  interfere  with  his  adversary’s,  except 
in  the  cases  mentioned  in  Section  9 of  Rule  YIIL,  or 
when  a foul  stroke  or  some  other  violation  of  these 
rules  may  call  for  forfeiture. 


I 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


185 


EULE  X. 

ON  THE  DUTY  OF  THE  MARKER  AND  THE  SPECTATORS  TO  THE 
PLAYERS. 

1.  In  a single  game,  no  one,  except  the  player  and 
his  umpire,  has  a right  to  interfere  with  the  play,  or 
point  out  an  error  which  either  has  been  or  is  about 
to  be  committed.  The  player  to  whose  prejudice  the 
foul  stroke  is  being  or  has  been  made  should  find  that 
out  for  himself. 

2.  Even  after  a stroke  has  been  made,  no  one  in 
the  room  has  any  right  to  comment  on  it,  either  for 
praise  or  blame for  the  same  stroke  may  occur  again 
in  the  course  of  the  game,  and  the  player’s  play  may 
be  materially  altered  by  the  criticism  to  which  he  has 
just  been  listening. 

3.  Let  the  marker  and  spectators  keep  their  places 
as  much  as  possible,  for  if  they  crowd  or  move  around 
the  table  they  are  liable  to  interfere  with  the  players, 
and  certain  to  distract  their  attention. 

4.  When  the  spectators  are  appealed  to  by  the 
marker  or  referee  for  their  opinion  on  a point  which 
he  has  been  asked,  but  finds  himself  unable,  to  decide, 
such  of  them  as  are  well  acquainted  with  the  game 
should  answer  according  to  the  best  of  their  knowl- 
edge and  belief.  Those  who  know  little  or  nothing 
of  the  game  would  oblige  themselves  and  others  by  at 
once  confessing  their  incompetency.  Either  they  may 
not  have  seen  the  disputed  stroke,  or,  seeing  it,  may 
not  have  been  familiar  with  its  merits. 


186 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


RULE  XT. 

ON  THE  marker’s  DUTIES  IN  PARTICULAR. 

The  marker’s  duties  may  be  thus  summed  up : — 

1st.  To  proclaim  each  count  in  a voice  that  can  be 
heard  by  the  player  at  his  own  table.  2d.  To  post 
the  total  run  made  by  each  player  before  the  next 
begins  to  strike.  3d.  To  spot  the  balls  when  neces- 
sary. 4th.  To  furnish  the  bridge  and  other  imple- 
ments of  the  game,  when  called  for.  5th.  To  see  that 
the  player  be  not  obstructed  in  his  stroke  by  being 
crowded  by  the  spectators.  6th.  To  decide  without 
fear  or  favor  all  questions  of  order  and  fairness  which 
shall  be  officially  laid  before  him  for  his  opinion.  But, 
7th.  Let  him  never  volunteer  a remark  upon  any 
portion  of  the  game.  8th.  Let  him  never  touch  any 
but  a pocketed  ball  himself,  nor  allow  any  other 
person  except  the  players  to  touch  one,  except  when 
officially  called  upon  to  replace  the  balls,  as  specihed 
in  Buie  VII.,  or  when  asked  to  decide  as  to  which 
is  the  ball  that  properly  belongs  to  the  player.  In 
this  case,  should  the  spot  be  turned  down  on  the  table, 
he  may  lift  the  ball  to  ascertain  tlie  fact — but  never 
let  him  touch  them  voluntarily.  9th.  Finally,  when 
called  upon  to  decide  a disputed  point,  when  there 
are  no  umpire  or  referee  appointed  of  wliich  lie 
has  no  personal  knowledge — the  fairness  of  a shot 
which  was  made  when  he  was  looking  elsewhere, 
for  instance — let  him  proclaim  silence,  and  take  the 
opinion  of  such  of  the  company  as  avow  themselves 


The  Game  of  Billiards.  187 

competent  to  judge.  The  voice  of  the  majority 
should  be  allowed  to  settle  all  debate ; but  should 
their  decision  be  flagrantly  in  conflict  with  any  of 
the  well  known  and  admitted  rules  hereinbefore  laid 
down,  the  party  who  fancies  himself  aggrieved  may 
give  notice  of  appeal,  to  lay  the  question  before  what 
the  lawyers  would  call  a jury  of  experts”  of  the 
recognized  rules.  This  appeal  is  flnal ; but  it  must  be 
made,  and  the  decision  given,  before  another  stroke  is 
played. 


INSTRUOTIO':^S  TO  THE  MARKER, 

FOB  KEEPING  COUNT  OP  THE  AMERICAN,  OR  FOUR-BALL  GAME. 

1st.  Give  the  striker  two  for  pocketing  his  oppo- 
nent’s ball,  or  for  caroming  on  a white  and  red.  2d. 
Give  him  three  for  each  red  ball  pocketed,  or  for  a 
carom  on  the  two  red  balls.  3d.  Give  him  four  for 
caroming  on  a red  and  white,  and  pocketing  his  oppo- 
nent’s ball.  4th.  Give  him  five  for  caroming  on  all 
the  balls,  no  matter  in  what  order  they  are  touched ; 
also  five  for  holeing  a red  ball  and  caroming  on  his 
opponent’s,  and  five  for  caroming  on  the  two  red  balls 
and  pocketing  his  opponent’s.  5th.  Give  him  six 
when  he  caroms  on  the  two  red  balls,  and  pockets  one 
of  them.  6th.  Let  him  have  seven  when  he  caroms 
on  a white  and  red  ball,  and  pockets  both  ; the  same 
when  he  caroms  on  all  the  balls,  and  pockets  the 
white.  7th.  For  pocketing  one  of  the  red  balls,  and 
caroming  on  all  the  others,  let  him  have  eight  ; also 


188 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


for  caroming  on  the  two  reds,  pocketing  one  of  them, 
and  also  his  opponent’s  ball.  8th.  Give  him  nine  for 
caroming  on  the  two  reds,  and  pocketing  them.  9th. 
For  caroming  on  all  the  balls  and  pocketing  a red  ball 
and  his  opponent’s,  give  him  ten.  10th.  For  carom- 
ing on  all  the  balls  and  pocketing  the  two  reds,  let 
him  have  eleven.  . 11th.  Let  him  have  thirteen  (the 
highest  figure  that  can  be  won  by  one  stroke  in  this 
game)  when  he  caroms  on  all,  and  pockets  all  the 
balls,  except  his  own.  12th.  Give  his  adversary  one 
when  the  player  makes  a miss,  or  fails  to  hit  any  of 
the  balls  on  the  table  with  his  own.  13th.  Give  his 
opponent  two  when  the  plaj^er  s ball  jumps  over  the 
side  of  the  table,  or  lodges  on  the  top  of  the  cushion 
after  it  has  struck  a white  ball ; two,  also,  if  the 
player  pockets  his  own  ball  after  touching  his  oppo- 
nent’s. 14th.  The  opponent  takes  three  when  the 
striker  pockets  his  own  ball,  without  touching  any 
other  on  the  table,  or  after  it  has  touched  a red  ; or 
causes  it  to  jump  off  the  table  or  lodge  on  the  cushion, 
under  the  same  circumstances ; or,  in  opening  the 
game,  goes  into  the  pocket  after  having  touched  a red 
first  and  afterwards  the  white. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


189 


FUETHEE  EULES  FOE  THE  FOEEGOING  GAME, 

WHEN  PLAYED  AS  A FOUR-HANDED  MATCH. 

In  a fonr-lianded  matcli — ^two  playing  in  partnership 
against  two — the  foregoing  rules  of  the  single  game 
must  be  substantially  observed,  with  the  following 
additions : 

In  this  double  match  the  player’s  partner  is  at 
liberty  to  warn  him  against  playing  with  the  wrong 
ball,  or  playing,  when  his  ball  is  in  hand,  at  an  object- 
ball  within  the  string ; but  he  must  not  give  him  any 
advice  as  to  the  most  advantageous  mode  of  play,  &c., 
&c.,  except  it  has  been  otherwise  agreed  before  the 
opening  of  the  game. 


FURTHER  RULES  FOR  THE  SAME  GAME,  WHEN 
PLAYED  BY  THREE  INDEPENDENT  PLAYERS. 

Rule  XII. 

The  rules  of  the  single  American  game  are  substan- 
tially binding  on  the  three-handed  game,  with  the  fol- 
lowing additions,  to  meet  the  increase  of  players : 

^ 1st.  The  players  commence  by  stringing  for  the  lead, 
and  he  who  brings  his  ball  nearest  to  the  cushion  (as 
in  the  single  game)  wins  the  choice  of  lead,  balls  and 
play ; and  he  who  brings  his  ball  next  nearest  to  the 
cushion  has  the  next  choice  of  play. 


190 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


2d.  All  forfeitures  in  this  game  count  for  both  of  the 
opponents,  at  the  same  rate  as  in  the  single-handed 
game. 

3th.  He  who  can  first  make  sixty-six  points  is  out; 
the  other  two  continue  until  one  reaches  the  hun- 
dred. 

4th.  When  he  who  has  first  made  sixty-six,  thus 
winning  the  game,  the  next  player  adopts  his  ball, 
as  that  ball  is  entitled  to  its  run,  and  also  to  the  next 
play. 

5 th.  If  the  player  should  cause  both  his  opponents 
to  become  sixty-six  by  a forfeiture,  neither  of  the  par- 
ties can  claim  game  thereon,  but  must  win  it  by  their 
next  count.  But  if  only  one  of  the  opponents  be  in  a 
position  to  become  sixty-six  by  a forfeiture,  then  the 
forfeiture  reckons  as  usual,  and  that  opponent  wins  the 
game  when  such  forfeiture  is  made. 

So  much  for  the  American,  or  four-ball  game. 


FIFTEEN  BALL  POOL. 

This  is  an  excellent  game  for  the  novice — full  of 
pleasant  excitement,  and  offering  better  opportunities 
for  hazard  practice  than  almost  any  other  on  the 
board. 

As  its  name  imports,  there  must  be  fifteen  object 
balls  employed  in  playing  it — ^balls  made  expressly 
for  the  game,  and  numbered  from  1 to  16.  These 


I 


The  Game  of  Billiaehs.  191 

balls  are  placed  in  tbe  form  of  a triangle  upon  tlie 
table — a wooden  frame  being  employed  to  save 
trouble  and  insure  correctness.  The  deep  red  ball, 
inscribed  with  the  highest  lAimber,  occupies  its  usual 
place  upon  the  board,  and  forms  the  apex  of  the  tri- 
angle, pointing  upwards  towards  the  string.  Each 
player  is  to  pocket  as  many  balls  as  he  can,  the 
number  on  each  ball  pocketed  being  scored  to  his 
credit ; so  that  not  he  who  pockets  the  largest  number 
of  balls,  but  he  whose  hazards  when  added  up  yield 
the  largest  total,  will  win  the  game.  Thus,  A.  might 
pocket  all  the  balls  numbered  from  1 to  7,  and  his 
total  would  be  but  28 ; while  B.,  with  a better  eye  to 
the  main  chance,  would  walk  away  from  him  by  pock- 
eting the  two  balls  marked  14  and  15,  giving  a total 
of  29. 

There  is  only  one  cue-ball  (the  white)  used,  each 
player  playing  with  it  as  he  finds  it  on  the  table,  or 
from  behind  the  string,  if  it  be  in  hand.  The  follow- 
ing are  the  rules : 

1st.  The  order  of  playing  may  be  settled  as  for 
two-ball  pool.  The  player  plays  from  behind  the 
string,  as  in  the  ordinary  game,  and  may  miss  if  he 
likes — ^but  the  miss,  and  all  misses  at  this  game,  will 
score  three  against  him.  The  other  players  follow  him 
in  their  order  of  rotation. 

2d.  The  player,  if  it  pleases  him,  may  use  either  the 
butt  of  the  cue  or  the  mace;  and  jam  his  own  ball 
against  the  others,  not  being  obliged  to  withdraw  the 


192 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


mace  or  cue  before  the  cue-ball  comes  in  contact  with 
the  object-ball. 

8d.  As  the  sum  total  of  the  figures  on  the  15  balls 
amounts  only  to  120,  of  which  61  is  more  than  half, 
whoever  makes  the  latter  number  first  is  winner,  and 
may  claim  the  stakes. 

4th.  Three  points  are  deducted  from  a player’s 
score,  for  making  a miss  or  a losing  hazard,  or  forcing 
his  own  ball  off  the  table. 

5th.  K the  player  pockets  one  or  more  of  the  object- 
balls  and  his  own  ball  at  the  same  time,  he  cannot 
score  for  the  numbered  balls,  which  must  be  placed  on 
the  spot,  or  in  a line  behind  it,  if  the  spot  be  occupied, 
and  he  forfeits  three  for  his  losing  hazard. 

6th.  A hazard  is  good  in  this  game,  even  when  the 
cue  and  object-balls  are  in  contact. 

7th.  As  in  the  ordinary  game,  the  player,  when  the 
cue-ball  is  in  hand,  may  play  from  any  place  within 
the  string  at  any  object-ball  outside  it. 

8th.  And  should  none  of  the  object-balls  be  outside, 
he  may  spot  that  which  is  nearest  out  of  the  string  on 
the  deep  red  spot,  and  play  accordingly. 

9th.  Should  there  be  a tie  between  two  or  more  of 
the  highest  players,  its  decision  may  be  referred  to  the 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


193 


succeeding  game  ; and  whoever  counts  highest  in  that, 
shall  be  declared  the  victor  of  the  former  one,  totally 
independent  of  the  game  that  is  then  on  hand.  A man 
might  thus  win  an  undecided  game  of  fifteen-ball  pool 
by  scoring  one  in  the  succeeding  game,  provided 
neither  of  his  adversaries  scored  anything  at  all. 

10th.  Should  they  again  be  tied  in  the  second 
game,  it  may  be  referred  to  a third. 

11th.  Should  the  striker,  while  taking  aim  ox  pre- 
paring to  play,  disturb  any  ball  on  the  table,  the  stroke 
is  foul.  If  the  cue-ball  was  disturbed,  it  shall  be  ac- 
counted a stroke,  and  he  forfeits  three  if  the  cue-ball 
touched  no  other.  If  it  is  an  object-ball  that  was  dis- 
turbed, he  may  play  a stroke  for  safety,  but  can  make 
no  count. 

12th.  But  should  he  by  accident  disturb  any  ball 
than  his  own,  after  he  has  made  his  stroke,  it  is  not 
foul.  After  the  ball  or  balls  are  replaced  in  their 
proper  positions,  he  may  continue  his  play. 

13th.  Should  a player  play  out  of  his  turn  when 
not  called  on  to  do  so,  it  is  foul,  and  the  balls  should 
be  replaced  in  their  original  position,  and  he  whose 
turn  it  was  to  play,  plays. 

14:th.  But  should  a player  be  called  on  to  play,  and 
he  makes  more  than  one  stroke  before  being  checked, 
even  if  it  should  be  out  of  his  turn,  the  strokes  so 
made  are  fair,  and  he  is  entitled  to  any  counts  he 
may  have  made  by  such  strokes. 

15th.  Should  any  of  the  balls  on  the  table  be  acci- 
dentally disturbed  by  any  other  person  than  the  player, 
9 


194  The  Game  of  Billiards. 

they  should  be  replaced,  as  near  as  possible,  in  their 
proper  positions,  and  the  player  allowed  to  continue. 

16th.  All  rules  governing  the  regular  American  game 
of  Billiards  not  conflicting  with  these  apply  to  this 
game  also. 

17th.  This  game  is  sometimes  played  for  small 
stakes,  but  more  frequently  the  only  issue  to  be  de- 
cided is — who  shall  pay  for  the  use  of  the  table  ? This 
charge  must  be  met  by  the  player  who  has  the  lowest 
count,  and  it  is  quite  possible  in  this  game  for  a play- 
er’s count  (owing  to  forfeitures  of  various  kinds)  to  be 
half  a dozen  or  a dozen  worse  than  nothing.  Thus,  if 
A.  had  neither  won  nor  forfeited  anything,  while  B. 
had  pocketed  balls  5 and  3,  but  had  also  made  three 
forfeitures — B.  would  have  to  pay,  as  his  forfeitures 
amounting  to  9 and  his  assets  only  to  8,  would  leave 
him  worse  off  by  one  than  A.,  who  stood  at  simple 
zero,  while  B.  was  zero  minus  one. 


RULES  FOR  THE  DOUBLET,  OR  FRENCH  GAME. 

This  game  is  played  with  one  red  ball  and  two 
white — one  for  each  of  the  players. 

The  red  ball  is  spotted  on  the  deep  red  spot,  and 
the  white  balls  must  be  played  from  within  what  is 
called  the  string.  This  string  differs  from  ours,  inas- 
much as  it  is  not  a line  drawn  across  the  table  from 
any  place  behind  which  a player  may  play.  The 
string  is  a semi-circle  drawn  with  a radius  of  four  and 
a half  inches,  having  the  spot  on  the  ordinary  string 
line  for  its  centre,  and  the  string  line  itself  for  its  base. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


195 


From  within  this  semi-circle  the  balls  must  be  played 
on  the  opening  of  the  game,  or  when  they  are  in  hand ; 
and  while  so  playing,  the  striker  is  confined  to  the  end 
cushion  at  which  he  stands,  not  being  allowed  to  pass 
outside  or  in  advance  of  either  corner 

To  make  a count  the  player  must  make  the  object- 
ball  strike  a cushion,  and  cross  the  board  before  falling 
into  the  pocket — this  is  called  a doublet  or  cross ; or 
force  one  ball  to  kiss  the  other  into  the  pocket;  or 
make  a carom,  or  receive  the  count  as  a forfeiture  from 
his  opponent. 

The  game  commences  by  stringing  for  the  lead  as  in 
the  ordinary  American  game,  and  he  who  brings  his 
ball  back  nearest  to  the  head  cushion  at  which  he 
stands,  is  the  winner,  and  can  play  first  or  make  his 
adversary  do  so,  at  discretion.  For  making  a miss  he 
forfeits  one.  For  pocketing  his  own  ball  after  it  has 
hit  the  white, — or  for  causing  his  own  ball  to  jump  off 
the  table  or  lodge  on  the  cushion  after  it  has  hit  the 
white,  he  forfeits  two,  and  this  irrespective  of  whether 
it  may,  or  may  not  have  touched  a red  ball. 

If  he  pockets  his  own  ball  after  it  has  touched  the 
red  ball  only,  or  causes  it  to  jump  off  the  table,  or 
lodge  on  the  cushion  after  it  has  touched  the  red  only, 
or  pockets  it  without  having  touched  any  ball  at  all, 
he  forfeits  three. 

If  he  Holes  the  red  ball  direct,  without  crossing  or 
kissing  it  in,  he  forfeits  three;  and  for  pocketing  the 
white  in  the  same  way,  loses  two. 

For  pocketing  the  red  ball,  either  by  a cross  or  kiss, 
he  gains  three. 


196 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


For  holing  his  opponent’s  ball  in  the  same  way,  he 
gains  two. 

For  an  ordinary  carom  he  gains  two. 

For  a carom  off  the  red  on  the  white,  and  pocketing 
the  white,  he  gains  four. 

For  a carom  off  the  white  on  the  red,  the  red  being 
pocketed,  he  gains  jive,  [It,  of  course,  must  be  under- 
stood in  all  these  cases,  that  the  ball  pocketed  has  been 
previously  crossed,  kissed,  or  caromed  in  ; for  if  it 
was  holed  directly,  without  the  doublet,  kiss,  or  carom, 
he  would  lose  in  an  inverse  ratio  to  the  gains  here 
set  down.  Thus,  if  he  caromed  on  the  white  and  red, 
and  pocketed  the  red  directly,^  he  would  lose  five.  For 
pocketing  both  under  similar  circumstances,  seven;  and 
should  he  pocket  his  own  ball  along  with  the  two 
others,  he  would  lose  nine,  under  any  circum- 
stances.] 

Ko  pushing,  or  what  we  call  ‘‘  foul  shots,”  are  allow- 
ed in  this  game.  The  player  must  withdraw  his  cue 
or  mace  from  his  own  ball,  before  it  comes  in  contact 
with  the  object-ball,  otherwise  he  forfeits  the  stroke, 
and  can  count  no  points  he  may  have  made  by  it. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


197 


THEEE-BALL  CAEOM  GAME. 

This  game  is  played  with  three  balls,  two  white 
and  one  red. 

The  red  is  placed  on  the  spot  assigned  to  the  deep- 
red  in  the  - American  four-ball  game.  At  the  com- 
mencement of  the  game,  one  of  the  white  balls  is 
placed  on  the  light-red  or  upper  spot,  connected 
with  which  is  a described  radius  or  semicircle  of  six 
inches.  The  other  white  ball,  being  in  hand,  may  be 
played  from  any  part  of  this  semicircle,  which  answers 
for  what  in  the  four-ball  game  is  known  as  ^‘the 
string.”  And  whenever  the  cue-ball  is  in  hand,  the 
player  has  the  right  of  so  playing  it. 

In  France,  where  the  game  had  its  origin,  there  is 
no  standard  code  of  rules  to  govern  it.  In  this  country, 
the.  following  rules  are  observed  : Points  are  reckoned 
by  caroms,  which  ordinarily  count  one  point  each. 
When  more  than  one  point  is  counted  for  a carom, 
it  is  customary  to  exact  a forfeiture  of  one  point  for 
every  miss. 

1.  The  game  is  begun  by  stringing  for  the  lead 
and  choice  of  balls,  as  in  the  four-ball  game,  the 
same  regulations  governing.  In  stringing  ” the 
players  should  endeavor  to  strike  the  cue-balls  simul- 
taneously ; and  he  whose  ball  stops  nearest  the  cushion 
at  the  head  of  the  table,  shall  have  the  choice  either 
of  playing  first,  or  of  making  his  adversary  do  so — a 
privilege  which  thereafter  shall  belong  to  both  players 
alternately. 

2 Unless  a special  agreement  be  entered  into 


198 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


between  tlie  players  and  the  table-keeper,  the  game 
commonly  consists  of  twenty-one  points,  if  each  carom 
counts  one  only ; and  of  forty-five  when  each  carom 
counts  two,  and  misses  are  scored. 

3.  The  first  to  play  places  his  ball  in  any  part  of 
the  semicircle,  at  his  option.  He  then  plays  at  the 
ball  on  the  deep-red  spot,  and  has  no  right  to  hit  the 
white  first  without  having  caused  his  ball  to  touch 
the  cushion  at  some  point  outside  of  the  “ string.’’ 

4.  Player  No.  2,  whose  ball  has  been  placed  on  the 
spot,  plays  in  his  turn.  On  a carom  table,  he  has  the 
right  to  play  on  either  ball,  even  though  both  should 
be  within  the  string.”  On  a pocket  table,  it  is 
his  privilege  to  have  the  red  placed  on  its  appropriate 
spot,  or  he  may  elect  to  play  the  balls  as  they  are. 
Should  he  adopt  the  latter  course  in  this  instance,  or 
at  any  other  time  he  happens  to  be  in  hand  on  a 
pocket  table,  he  must,  before  hitting  either  of  the 
balls  in  the  string,”  cause  his  own  to  pass  outside. 

5.  When  a player  is  in  hand  on  a carom  table,  and 
the  other  balls  are  within  the  ‘‘  string,”  he  may  play 
directly  upon  either.  But  on  a pocket  table,  he  can 
only  play  as  described  in  Section  4.  Furthermore,  he 
must  confine  his  ball  to  the  semicircle,  and  not  let 
the  lower  half  of  his  body  pass  beyond  the  right  line 
which  the  edge  of  the  side  cushion  would  describe  if 
prolonged, 

6.  The  player  must  have  at  least  one  foot  on  the 
floor. 

7.  A ball  exactly  on  the  string  line”  is  considered 
within  the  string. 


The  Gtame  of  Billiards. 


199 


8.  The  carom  is  good,  and  the  points  count  for  the 
player,  even  though  his  ball  should  be  lost ; and  he 
continues  to  play.  [A  ball  is  considered  lost  which 
goes  into  a pocket,  jumps  off  the  table,  or  remains  on 
a cushion.] 

9.  A pushing  stroke  subjects  the  player  to  the  loss 
of  the  point  or  points  he  may  have  made  by  that 
stroke,  and  puts  his  ball  out  of  hand. 

10.  A player  who  plays  before  all  the  balls  have 
ceased  rolling,  loses  his  stroke,  and  his  hand  is  out. 

11.  When  the  cue-ball  is  in  contact  with  one  or 
more  balls,  all  are  taken  up  and  placed  as  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  game ; and  the  player,  being  con- 
sidered in  hand,  continues  his  play. 

12.  If  the  balls  are  disturbed  accidentally,  througb 
the  medium  of  any  agency  other  than  the  player  him- 
self,— as,  for  instance,  througb  the  interference  of  his 
opponent,  or  the  marker,  or  other  outside  party — they 
must  be  replaced,  and  the  player  allowed  to  play. 

13.  If  in  playing,  or  after  having  played,  the  player 
disturbs  any  ball  other  than  his  own,  he  cannot  make  a 
counting  stroke,  but  he  may  play  for  safety.  But 
if  he  touches  his  own  ball  except  with  the  cue,  or  if 
he  touches  it  more  than  once  with  that  instrument, 
the  stroke  is  foul,  and  he  cannot  play  for  safety. 

14.  A player  has  no  right  to  disturb  the  balls,  and 
ought  not  to  do  it  without  the  consent  of  his  adversary. 

15.  When  the  cue-ball  is  very  near  another  ball, 
the  player  ought  not  to  play  without  warning  his  ad- 
versary that  they  do  not  touch,  and  giving  him  time 
to  satisfy  himself  on  that  point. 


200  The  Game  of  Billiards. 

16.  Playing  with  the  wrong  ball  is  foul.  The  rules 
as  to  playing  with  the  wrong  ball  in  the  four-ball 
game,  are  applicable  to  the  three-ball  game. 

17.  Blowing  on  a ball,  or  using  any  other  means  to 
alter  its  course  or  position,  is  foul.  If  the  player  so 
offending  is  in  play,  he  must  yield  the  table  to  his 
adversary,  should  the  latter  demand  it.  In  all  cases, 
the  opposing  player  shall  have  the  privilege  of  either 
having  the  ball  or  balls  replaced,  or  played  with  as 
they  are. 

18.  If  a lost  ball,  in  being  put  back  on  the  table, 
disturbs  another,  the  ball  so  disturbed  must  be  put  in 
its  place  again  by  the  marker  or  referee,  and  the 
player  whose  turn  it  is  to  play  shall  proceed. 

19.  The  red  ball,  being  lost,  and  its  spot  being 
occupied,  it  shall  be  placed  on  the  ^‘string”  spot;  if 
this  latter  should  happen  to  be  occupied  also,  then  the 
red  shall  be  placed  on  the  pool  spot  at  the  foot  of  the 
table.  A white  ball  being  lost,  and  its  spot  being 
occupied,  shall  be  placed  on  the  deep-red  spot,  or  if 
that  is  occupied,  on  the  pool  spot,  provided,  that  it  is 
not  the  turn  of  the  player,  whose  ball  is  lost,  to  play. 
In  that  case,  there  is  no  occasion  for  spotting  the  lost 
ball. 

20.  On  a carom  table,  a lost  white  ball  that  has 
been  placed  on  the  string”  spot  cannot  be  moved, 
after  the  opposing  player  has  played  a stroke  while 
the  ball  was  in  this  position.  But  on  a pocket  table, 
where  the  owner  of  a white  ball  that  has  been  lost  is 
compelled  to  play  outside  of  the  string,”  he  can, 
when  his  turn  comes,  play  from  any  point  within  the 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


201 


semicircle,  provided  that  his  ball  has  not  been  struck 
by  another.  On  a pocket  table,  it  is  held  that  a ball 
is  in  hand  until  it  has  been  struck  or  moved  from  its 
position,  it  having  been  placed  on  the  spot  simply  to 
afford  the  in-striker  a chance  to  count.  On  the  con- 
trary, on  a carom  or  pocketless  table,  custom  has  made 
the  rule  that  a lost  ball  ceases  to  be  in  hand  after  one 
stroke  has  been  played ; and,  in  consideration  of  this 
ruling,  the  player,  instead  of  being  allowed  to  shift  the 
position  of  his  ball,  is  privileged,  in  this  country,  to 
play  at  any  ball,  irrespective  of  its  being  in  or  out  of 
the  string,”  and  regardless,  also,  of  whether  he 
stands  at  the  head  or  at  either  side  of  the  table. 

[Explanation. — The  two  rules  last  preceding  may  be  further  explained  in  this 
wise.  Either  on  a pocket  or  a carom  table,  a ball  that  rolls  on  to  and  occupies  the 
“ string  ” spot,  in  the  course  of  play,  cannot  be  moved  aside  to  permit  the  spotting 
of  a white  ball  that  has  become  “ lost.”  The  lost  ball  must  be  spotted  on  the  dark- 
red,  or  the  pool  spot,  as  directed  in  Rule  19,  if  its  owner  is  not  entitled  to  the  next 
play,  or  within  the  semicircle  if  he  is.  But  when,  on  a carom  table,  a white  ball 
has  been  placed  on  the  “string”  spot  by  either  player,  instead  of  having  rolled 
thereon,  it  may  be  moved  aside  to  accommodate  a “lost”  white  ball,  provided 
that  subsequent  to  the  placing  of  the  ball  as  mentioned  no  stroke  has  been  played. 
In  marked  contrast  with  this,  a white  ball  that  has  been  placed  on  the  “ string” 
spot,  on  a pocket  taMe^  may  be  moved  aside  at  any  time  in  order  to  permit  the 
spotting  of  a “lost”  white  ball,  provided,  always,  that  the  first-mentioned  ball 
has  not  been  touched  while  occupying  the  spot] 

21.  A player  who  abandons  a game  declares  it  lost 
by  so  doing. 

In  a match  at  this  game,  played  some  years  ago, 
the  writer  made  some  interesting  shots,  a few  of  which 
are  illustrated  in  the  following  diagrams 


202 


/ 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XXVL 

DIRECTIONS  FOB  PLATING  NO.  26. 

Strike  tke  cue-ball  ^ above  tbe  centre,  ^ left ; tbe 
object-ball  to  be  hit  ^ right.  Play  hard  enough  to 
make  the  object-ball  return,  as  far  back  from  the  lower 
cushion  as  its  original  position. 

There  are  several  modes  of  effecting  a carom  on  the 
balls  as  represented  in  diagram  No.  26,  for  instance,  by 
forcing  back  direct  on  the  ball,  or  with  a strong  twist 
the  reverse  of  the  one  indicated  on  diagram,  causing 
the  cue-bail  to  take  the  upper  cushion,  or  by  playing 
on  the  left  of  the  object-ball,  and  taking  two  cushions 
— but  in  this,  above  all  other  games  played  on  the 
billiard  table,  the  greatest  foresight  and  calculation 
are  necessary,  as  it  is  not  only  a game  of  attack,  but 
also  of  defence.  By  playing  in  the  manner  represented 
on  diagram,  if  a count  was  not  made,  the  balls  would 
be  “ safe,”  as  the  cue-ball  would  have  gone  below  the 
opponent’s  ball,  and  the  object-ball  would  have  rolled 
back  again  above  it,  thus  leaving  the  opponent’s  ball 
between  the  two,  which  is  the  strong  defensive  part  of 
the  game. 


No.  26. 


c /v  ^ 

0 ■ 


/ . ' 


•'  ' r,"  ^ 


UNlVERSil^  Ur 


5 


''■■3 


library 

OF  THf 

umvEnsm  onum, 


207 


DIAGEAM  NO.  XXVH. 

HOW  TO  PLAT  NO.  27. 

Strike  tlie  cue-ball  | above,  i left,  play  bard — ^tbe 
object-ball  to  be  bit  right,  as  indicated  in  diagram. 

This  shot  was  made  by  Mr.  Pbelan  in  tbe  fifth 
game. 


DIAGRAM  NO.  XXYITI. 


HOW  TO  PLAY  NO.  28. 

Strike  the  cue-ball  | left  of  centre,  play  hard — the 
object-ball  to  be  hit  i right,  as  indicated  in  diagram. 

This  is  rather  a risky  shot  to  play,  as  if  it  missed, 
the  chances  were  that  a fair  prospect  of  a count  would 
have  been  left  to  the  opponent — ^but  as  a general  rule 
it  is  best  to  play  for  such  shots,  especially  if  the  player 
be  ahead,  as  was  the  case  in  this  instance. 


No.  28. 


LIBRARY 

Of'  IHf 

UNiVERSUY  Of  iLLiMu 


The  G-ame  of  Billiards. 


211 


RULES  FOR  THE  RUSSIAN  GAME. 

This  is  a very  agreeable  variety  of  the  game,  and 
ought  to  be  more  popular  in  this  country  than  it  is. 

Five  balls  are  required  to  play  it ; two  white  ones 
for  the  players,  and  a red,  a blue,  and  a yellow  ball  for 
the  board.  The  blue  must  be  placed  on  the  light  red 
spot,  the  yellow  on  the  spot  between  the  pockets,  and 
the  red  on  the  deep  red  spot. 

In  this  country  it  is  most  usually  played  one  hun- 
dred points  up ; although  in  Germany  and  Russia  the 
game  is  forty. 

The  peculiarity  of  the  Russian  game  is,  that  certain 
balls  are  confined  to  certain  pockets,  and  that  a differ- 
ent count  is  attached  to  each  color,  both  in  the  hazards 
and  the  caroms  made  off  it,  and  the  forfeitures  lost 
from  it.  The  following  are  the  rules : 

1st.  The  player  may  pocket  his  opponent’s  ball  in 
any  pocket,  and  will  count  two. 

2d.  The  same  rule  applies  to  the  red,  and  counts 
three. 

3d.  The  same  also  to  the  blue,  and  counts /owr. 

4th.  But  the  yellow,  or  Caroline  ball,  as  it  is  termed, 
when  holed  in  either  of  the  side  pockets,  counts  six  for 


212 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


the  player, — but  if  pocketed  in  any  of  the  corner 
pockets,  the  player  forfeits  six. 

5th.  K the  striker  pocket  his  own  ball  without  hitting 
any  of  the  balls  upon  the  table,  he  forfeits  three — after 
hitting  the  white,  two ; after  hitting  the  red,  three ; 
after  hitting  the  blue,  four;  and  after  touching  the 
yellow  or  Caroline,  six. 

6th.  Thus,  again,  in  caroms : A carom  on  the  white 
and  red  scores  two ; on  the  red  and  blue,  or  blue  and 
red,  three ; a carom  off  or  on  the  white  and  yellow, 
three ; and  a carom  on  or  off  a yellow  with  a red  or 
blue,  counts  four. 

7th.  The  same  penalties  attach  to  the  player  who 
has  caused  his  ball  to  jump  off  or  lodge  on  the  cushion 
as  if  he  had  pocketed  his  own  ball. 

8th.  The  striker,  when  leading  off,  or  having  his  ball 
in  hand,  may  play  from  any  point  within  the  string, 
at  any  ball  outside  of  it. 

9 th.  In  addition  to  the  penalties  specified  in  Kule  5, 
for  a losing  hazard,  the  player  also  loses  whatever 
points  he  may  have  otherwise  made  by  the  stroke, 

10th.  After  the  striker  has  pocketed  any  of  the  ob- 
ject-balls, he  can  play  next  at  any  ball  on  the  table. 

11th.  But  after  a carom  stroke,  where  no  ball  has 
been  holed,  he  must  play  next  on  the  yellow,  no  matter 
what  be  its  position. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


213 


12th.  To  continue  play  there  must  be  a hazard  after 
every  carom ; otherwise  the  second  carom  counts  for 
the  player,  but  he  loses  his  hand. 

13th.  Carom  points  will  not  count  to  win  the  game.- 
The  winning  stroke  must  be  a hazard. 

14th.  For  every  ball  he  touches  in  giving  the  lead, 
the  player  loses  one  point ; and  should  his  ball  occupy 
the  spot  of  any  of  the  three  balls  he  may  have  displaced, 
he  must  take  it  up  and  lead  over  again.  He  cannot 
score  any  points  made  on  the  leading  stroke 


RULES  FOR  THE  SPANISH  GAME. 

This  game  is  seldom  seen  in  the  Northern  States, 
but  is  very  common  in  some  parts  of  the  South,  as  also 
in  Mexico  and  California. 

It  introduces  a new  element  into  the  game  of  billiards, 
in  the  shape  of  five  wooden  pins;  diminutive  little 
things,  which  are  set  up  in  a diamond  pattern  between 
the  two  side  pockets,  each  pin  being  about  two  and  a 
half  inches  fi'om  the  other,  as  in  pin  pool. 

Nine  pins  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  five,  but 
the  manner  of  playing  remains  the  same. 

The  game  is  generally  played  thirty-one  up,  and  is 
scored  by  hazards,  caroms  and  knocking  down  the 
pins.  The  rules  are  extremely  simple : 

IsL  For  every  pin  the  player  knocks  down  after  first 
striking  a ball  with  his  own  ball,  he  gains  two  points. 


214 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


2d.  If  lie  knock  down  the  middle  pin  alone,  he  gains 
five. 

3d.  For  pocketing  his  opponent’s  ball  the  player 
gains  two,  and  two  for  each  pin  he  may  have  knocked 
down  by  the  same  stroke. 

4th.  If  he  pocket  the  red  ball  he  gets  three,  and  two 
for  each  pin,  &c. 

5th.  If  the  player  pocket  his  own  ball,  cause  it  to 
jump  over  the  side,  or  lodge  on  the  cushion,  without 
having  touched  any  of  the  other  balls,  he  loses  three. 

6th.  But  if  he  does  any  of  the  aforementioned  things 
after  having  touched  any  of  the  balls,  he  loses  in 
addition  to  the  three,  whatever  points  he  would  other- 
wise have  made  by  his  play,  at  the  regular  rate  of 
counting. 

In  other  respects — as  regards  foul  strokes,  and  so 
forth — ^the  rules  of  the  ordinary  American  game  may 
all  be  applied  to  the  Spanish,  with  such  additions  as 
are  hereinbefore  set  down. 


EULES  FOE  THE  ENGLISH  GAME. 

The  English  game  of  Billiards  is  played  with  three 
balls — two  white  and  one  red.  The  red  is  placed 
upon  a spot  thirteen  inches  from  the  lower  cushion 
and  midway  between  the  comer  pockets.  The  string 
is  a semicircle,  with  a radius  of  ten  inches  drawn  on 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


215 


the  string  line,  from  within  any  part  of  which  the 
player  has  the  right  to  play.  A third  spot  is  also 
placed  in  the  exact  centre  of  the  table,  midway  be- 
tween the  side  pockets.  This  game  is  usually  called — 

THE  WINNING  AND  LOSING  CARAMBOLE  GAME. 

This  is  the  regular  game  played  in  England  by  two 
or  four  players.  The  game  is  made  by  winning  and 
losing  hazards,  caroms  and  forfeits,  and  is  usually 
played  fifty  up.  When  four  players  make  a match, 
they  play  side  against  side,  each  player  being  allowed 
to  instruct  his  partner;  sixty-three  points  being  the 
game.  The  following  are  the  rules  observed  in  the 
best  clubs  and  by  the  best  players. 

RULES. 

1.  The  game  commences  by  stringing  for  the  lead 
and  choice  of  the  balls. 

[It  is  usual  for  the  receiver  of  points  to  lead  off.] 

2.  The  red  ball  must  be  placed  on  the  lower  of  the 
two  spots  at  the  bottom  of  the  table,  and  replaced 
there  when  it  is  holed  or  forced  off  the  table,  or  when 
the  balls  are  broken. 

[By  “ breaking  the  balls,”  is  meant  the  placing  of  them  as  at  the  commencement 
of  a game,  and  either  striking  the  red  or  giving  a miss,  at  the  option  of  the  player.] 

3.  The  player  who  breaks  the  balls,  leads  off. 

4.  If  a player  make  one  stroke  in  a game,  he  must 
finish  that  game  : otherwise  he  loses  it. 

5.  If  the  striker  make  any  points  by  carom  or  haz- 
ard, he  continues  his  ^ame  until  he  ceases  to  make 
points  or  gives  a miss. 


216 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


6.  If,  when  the  cue  is  pointed,  the  ball  should  be 
moved  without  the  striker  intending  to  strike,  it  may 
be  replaced  ; and  if  not  replaced  before  the  stroke  be 
played,  the  adversary  may  claim  it  as  a foul  stroke. 

7.  If  a ball  springs  from  the  table,  and  strikes  one 
of  the  players,  or  a by-stander,  so  as  to  prevent  its 
falling  on  the  floor,  it  must  be  considered  as  off  the 
table. 

8.  If  a ball  runs  so  near  the  brink  of  a pocket  as  to 
stand  there,  and  it  afterward  falls  in,  it  must  be  re- 
placed and  played  at,  or  with,  as  the  case  may  be. 

9.  If  a ball  spin  on  the  brink  of  a pocket,  and,  al- 
though stationary  for  a time,  if  the  motion  be  not  gone 
out  of  the  ball,  and  it  falls  into  the  pocket,  the  hazard 
is  scored. 

10.  If  a ball  lodges  on  the  top  of  a cushion,  it  is  con- 
sidered as  off  the  table. 

11.  After  the  adversary’s  ball  is  off  the  table,  and 
the  two  remaining  balls  are  either  upon  the  line  or 
within  the  baulk,  the  player  whose  ball  is  in  hand 
must  play  outside  from  the  semicircle,  and  if  he  fail 
to  strike  either  of  the  balls  in  returning  from  the  cush- 
ion, he  loses  one  point  for  a miss. 

12.  A line-ball  cannot  be  played  at  except  by  flrst 
striking  a cushion  outside  of  the  baulk  line,  by  the 
player  whose  ball  is  in  hand. 

13.  All  misses  must  be  given  with  the  point  of  the 
cue,  and  the  ball  struck  only  once ; if  otherwise  given, 
the  adversary  may  claim  it  as  a foul  stroke,  and  en- 
force the  penalty — make  the  striker  play  the  stroke 
over  again,  or  have  the  ball  replaced. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


217 


14.  No  score  can  be  made  by  a foul  stroke. 

[It  is  called  foul  if  a striker  move  a ball  in  the  act  of  striking — or  if  he  play  with 
the  wrong  ball — or  if  he  touch  his  own  ball  twice  in  playing — or  if  he  strike  a ball 
whilst  it  is  running— or  if  he  touch  another  ball — or  if  his  feet  are  off  the  floor  when 
playing.  The  penalty  in  all  these  cases  is  breaking  the  balls,  and  losing  the  lead. 
Enforcing  the  penalty  for  a foul  stroke  is  entirely  at  the  option  of  the  adversary.] 

15.  If  the  adversary  do  not  choose  to  enforce  the 
penalty  for  a foul  stroke,  the  striker  may  play  on,  and 
score  all  the  points  that  he  made  by  the  foul  stroke — 
which  the  marker  is  bound  to  score. 

16.  If  the  striker  hole  the  white  ball  (the  white 
winning  hazard),  or  if  he  hole  his  own  ball  from  the 
white  ball  (the  white  losing  hazard),  he  gains  two 
points ; if  he  does  both,  he  gains  four  points. 

17.  If  the  striker  hole  the  red  ball,  he  wins  three ; 
and  if,  by  the  same  stroke,  he  hole  his  own  from  the 
red,  he  wins  three  more. 

18.  When  the  red  ball  is  pocketed  or  off  the  table, 
and  the  spot  on  which  it  should  stand  is  occupied  by 
the  white  ball,  it  must  be  placed  in  a corresponding 
situation  at  the  other  end  of  the  table;  but  if  that 
should  bcfoccupied  also  by  the  other  white  ball,  it  must 
be  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  table,  immediately  be- 
tween the  two  middle  pockets;  and  wherever  it  is 
placed  there  it  must  remain,  until  it  be  played  or  the 
game  be  over. 

19.  Two  points  are  scored  for  every  carom ; two 
points  for  every  white  hazard,  and  three  points  for 
every  red  hazard. 

Thus  explained  : — 

[If  the  striker  play  at  the  white  ball  first,  make  a carom  and  pocket  his  own  ball, 
he  gains  four  points ; two  for  the  carom  and  two  for  the  white  losing  hazard.  If 
he  play  at  the  white  ball  first,  and  pocket  his  own  ball  and  the  red  one,  he  gains 
10 


218 


The  Game  of  Billiards, 


five  points.  If  he  play  at  the  white  ball  first,  make  a carom,  and  pocket  the  red 
and  white  balls,  he  gains  seven  points.  If  he  play  at  the  white  first,  make  a carom, 
and  at  the  same  time  pocket  his  own  and  his  adversary’s  ball,  he  wins  six  points  ; 
two  for  the  carom,  and  two  for  each  white  hazard.  If  he  play  at  the  white  ball 
first,  and  pocket  all  the  balls  without  making  a carom,  he  gains  seven  points.  If 
he  play  at  the  white  ball  first,  make  a carom,  and  pocket  all  the  balls,  he  gains 
nine  points.  If  he  play  at  the  red  ball  first,  and  pocket  it  and  his  own  ball,  he  gains 
six  points.  If  he  play  at  the  red  ball  first,  make  a carom,  and  by  the  same  stroke 
pocket  his  own  ball,  he  gains  five  points  : two  for  the  carom,  and  three  for  the  red 
losing  nazard.  If  he  play  at  the  red  ball  first,  make  a carom,  and  pocket  the  red 
and  the  white  ball,  he  gains  seven  paints.  If  he  play  at  the  red  ball  first,  make  a 
carom,  and  at  the  same  time  pocket  his  own  and  the  red  ball,  he  wins  eight  points ; 
two  for  the  carom,  three  for  the  red  losing,  and  three  for  the  red  winning  hazard.  If 
he  play  at  the  red  ball  first,  and  pocket  his  own  and  the  white  ball,  without  a carom, 
he  gains  five  points.  If  he  play  at  the  red  ball  first,  and  pocket  all  the  balls, 
without  a carom,  he  gains  eight  points.  If  he  strike  the  red  ball  first,  make  a 
carom,  and  by  the  same  stroke  pocket  his  own  and  both  the  other  balls,  he  gains 
ten  points : the  greatest  number  that  can  be  gained  by  one  stroke.] 

20.  If  the  striker,  in  taking  aim  or  in  the  act  of  strik- 
ing, move  his  ball,  so  as  to  strike  the  hall  he  is  playing 
at,  it  is  a stroke,  and  must  pass  as  such,  unless  the  ad- 
versary choose  to  let  him  play  the  stroke  over  again. 

21.  If  a striker,  in  the  act  of  striking,  move  his  ball 
ever  so  little,  it  is  a stroke. 

22.  If  the  striker  miss  the  ball  he  plays  at,  he  loses 
one  point ; and  if  by  the  same  stroke  his  own  ball  runs 
into  a pocket,  he  loses  three  points — that  is  to  say,  his 
adversary  scores  so  many  points.  This  is  called  a 
Coup. 

23.  If  the  striker  force  his  own  or  either  of  the  other 
balls  over  the  table,  after  having  made  a carom  or  a 
hazard,  he  gains  nothing  by  the  stroke,  and  his  adver- 
sary plays  on  without  breaking  the  balls. 

24.  If  the  striker  wilfully  force  his  ball  off  the  table 
without  striking  another  ball,  he  loses  three  points ; but 
if  the  ball  goes  over  by  accident,  he  loses  one  point 
only  for  the  miss. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


219 


25.  If  tlie  striker  play  with  the  wropg  ball,  and  a 
carom  or  hazard  be  made  thereby,  the  adversary  may 
have  the  balls  broken  ; but  if  nothing  be  made  by  the 
stroke,  he  (the  adversary)  may  take  his  choice  of  balls 
for  the  next  stroke ; and  with  the  ball  he  chooses  he 
must  continue  to  play  until  the  game  is  over. 

[The  playing  with  the  wrong  ball  must  be  discovered  before  the  next  stroke  is 
played,  otherwise  no  penalty  attaches  to  it.] 

26.  No  person  has  a right  to  inform  the  adversary 
that  the  striker  has  played,  or  is  about  to  play,  with 
the  wrong  ball. 

27.  No  person,  except  the  adversary,  has  a right  to 
inform  the  striker  that  he  is  playing  with  the  wrong 
ball. 

28.  If  the  adversary  do  not  see  the  striker  play  with 
the  wrong  ball,  or,  seeing  it,  do  not  choose  to  enforce 
the  penalty,  the  marker  is  bound  to  score  all  the  points 
that  may  have  been  made  by  the  stroke. 

29.  If  the  striker’s  ball  be  in  hand,  and  the  other 
two  balls  within  the  baulk,  and  should  he,  by  either 
accident  or  design,  strike  one  of  them, without  first  play- 
ing out  of  the  baulk,  the  adversary  has  the  option  of 
letting  the  balls  remain  as  they  are,  and  scoring  a 
miss — of  having  the  ball  so  struck  replaced  in  its  ori- 
ginal position,  and  scoring  a miss — of  making  the 
striker  play  the  stroke  over  again — or  of  making  it  a 
foul  stroke,  and  breaking  the  balls. 

30.  If  the  striker’s  ball  be  in  hand,  he  has  no  right 
to  play  at  a cushion  within  the  baulk,  in  order  to  strike 
a ball  that  is  out  of  it. 

31.  If  the  striker’s  ball  be  in  hand,  and  he,  in  play- 


220 


The  Gtame  op  Billiards. 


ing  from  the  baulk,  should  move  his  ball  in  the  act  of 
striking,  it  is  a stroke,  although  the  ball  should  not  go 
out  of  the  baulk.  But  the  adversary  may,  if  he  choose, 
compel  him  to  play  the  stroke  over  again. 

32.  If  the  striker’s  ball  be  near  the  ball  he  plays  at, 
and  he  play  the  stroke  with  the  point  of  the  cue,  it  is 
fair ; but  if  he  play  with  the  butt-end,  the  marker  or 
referee  may  decide  whether  it  be  foul  or  fair. 

[All  strokes  are  fair  with  the  point  of  the  cue — so  long  as  it  be  a stroke,  and  not 
a series  of  pushes.] 

33.  If  the  striker’s  ball  be  on  the  brink  of  a pocket, 
and  he,  in  the  act  of  striking,  misses  the  hit,  and,  in 
drawing  back  his  cue,  knocks  it  (the  ball)  into  the 
pocket,  he  loses  three  points — it  being  a coup. 

34.  If  the  striker,  in  giving  a miss  from  the  baulk, 
should  let  his  ball  remain  in  the  baulk,  without  its  hav- 
ing gone  out,  the  adversary  may  either  let  it  remain  so, 
or  compel  him  to  play  the  stroke  over  again. 

35.  If  the  striker,  in  giving  a miss,  should  make  a 
foul  stroke,  and  his  adversary  claim  it  as  such,  and  en- 
force the  penalty,  the  miss  is  not  scored. 

36.  No  person  is  allowed  to  take  up  a ball  without 
permission  of  the  adversary. 

37.  If  a player  or  other  person  move  a ball  by  acci- 
dent or  design,  or  take  it  up  supposing  the  game  to  be 
over,  it  must  be  replaced  to  the  satisfaction  of  the 
adversary,  or  the  balls  must  be  broken. 

38.  If  either  player  in  any  way  obstruct  the  course 
of  the  ball,  it  is  deemed  foul,  and  the  ball  must  be  re- 
placed, the  balls  broken,  or  the  game  forfeited. 


The  Gtame  of  Billiards.  221 

39.  No  person  is  allowed  to  offer  advice  to  the  play- 
ers during  tlie  progress  of  the  game. 

[But  if  a person  be  appealed  to  by  one  of  the  players,  or  by  the  marker,  or  referee, 
he  has  then  a right  to  give  an  opinion,  whether  he  be  interested  in  the  game  or  not] 

40.  No  person  is  allowed  to  walk  about  the  room 
during  the  game,  make  a noise,  or  otherwise  annoy  the 
players. 

EULES  FOR  THE  GAME  OF  TWO-BALL  POOL. 

This  game  is  not  much  in  use  at  present,  though 
about  a dozen  years  ago  it  was  universally  in  vogue. 
It  is  opened  in  the  following  way,  and  any  number  of 
players  from  2 to  20  may  be  engaged  in  it  at  once. 

A number  of  little  balls  (as  many  balls  as  there  are 
players)  are  dropped  into  a pocket,  from  which,  after 
having  been  shaken,  they  are  drawn  at  random  by  the 
marker  and  presented  to  the  different  players.  These 
little  balls  are  numbered  one,  two,  three,  &c.,  up  to  the 
number  of  players  ; and  the  number  engraved  on  the 
ball  which  the  marker  hands  to  the  player  decides  his 
position  in  the  game,  and  the  order  of  rotation. 

This  game,  as  its  name  implies,  is  generally  played 
for  a small  pool,  into  which  each  player  contributes  the 
price  of  his  ball.  At  present  these  stakes  are  generally 
limited  to  an  amount  which,  in  the  aggregate,  will 
suffice  to  pay  for  the  use  of  the  tables ; but  the  disuse 
into  which  the  game  has  generally  fallen  arises,  in  all 
probability,  from  the  dislike  which  the  modern  school 
of  billiard-players  feel,  to  the  principle  of  a bet,  how- 
ever small. 


222 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


When  a professional  player  plays  against  a profes- 
sional player,  a bet  is  sometimes  made,  as  a matter  of 
necessity,  to  pay  each  player  for  his  time ; but  sncb 
bets  are  of  a purely  business  character,  and  can  in  no- 
wise be  associated  with  gambling.  It  is  a very  rare 
thing  indeed  in  these  days,  and  growing  rarer  every 
day,  to  see  an  amateur  stake  money  on  his  skill;  the 
only  money  question  depending  on  the  game  in  ninety- 
nine  cases  out  of  every  hundred,  is — Who  shall  pay  for 
the  table  ? Sometimes  they  add  to  this  a couple  of 
cigars,  or  refreshments ; but  the  practice  of  betting 
money  is  growing  obsolete,  and  hence  the  decline  of 
the  billiard  sharps,  who  have  had  to  seek  “green 
fields  and  pastures  new”  for  the  exercise  of  their  dis- 
reputable ingenuity. 

There  are  only  two  balls  used  in  this  game — a red 
and  a white ; consequently  there  can  be  no  caroms. 
The  players  are  called  Numbers  One,  Two,  Three,  &c., 
according  to  the  figures  on  the  balls  drawn  from  the 
pocket,  and  the  player  must  always  make  his  cue-ball 
of  the  ball  which  was  object-ball  in  the  preceding  stroke, 
except  when  a ball  has  been  pocketed.  In  this  case  there 
must  be  a new  lead — ^the  next  player  leading  with  the 
red  ball,  and  being  followed  with  the  white  ball  from 
the  string.  Subjoined  we  give  the  specific  rules  foi 
two-ball  pool : 

1st.  Player  Number  One  must  lead  with  the  red,  but 
has  the  privilege  of  spotting  his  ball,  in  case  the  lead 
does  not  please  him.  But  if,  in  a pushing  lead,  he 
does  not  withdraw  his  mace  or  cue  from  the  ball  before 


The  Game  of  Billiards 


223 


it  passes  the  middle  pockets,  the  stroke  is  foul,  and 
player  Number  Two  has  the  option  of  playing  at  the 
ball  as  it  is  left,  having  the  lead  played  over  again,  or 
causing  the  red  to  be  spotted  on  the  pool  spot. 

2d.  Bach  player  has  one,  two  or  more  lives,  as  may 
be  agreed  on.  When  he  forfeits  these  he  is  said  to  be 
dead,  except  when  he  obtains  what  is  called  a “ privi- 
lege,’’ meaning  one  chance  more. 

✓ 

3d.  This  privilege,  except  where  all  the  players  con- 
sent to  its  remaining  open,  must  be  taken  by  the  first 
man  “ killed and  the  person  so  killed  must  determine 
whether  he  will  accept  it  or  not  at  once,  before  another 
stroke  is  played.  [This  is  the  strict  rule  of  the  game, 
and  as  such  may  be  enforced;  but  as  a general  practice, 
the  privilege  remains  open  until  taken  up  by  some  one 
of  the  players.] 

4th.  After  a game  has  been  commenced,  no  one  can 
take  a ball,  except  with  the  consent  of  all  who  are 
already  in  the  game ; and  after  the  privilege  is  gone, 
no  stranger  can  be  admitted  to  the  game  under  any 
circumstances. 

5th.  Any  person  in  the  pool  whose  lives  are  not 
exhausted,  and  who  thinks  a hazard  may  be  made  in 
a certain  position,  can  claim  the  stroke,  or  “take  the 
hazard,”  as  it  is  technically  called,  in  case  the  striker 
does  not  choose  to  risk  that  particular  stroke  himself 
Should  the  person  who  takes  the  hazard  fail  to  execute 
it,  he  loses  a life. 


224 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


6tli.  The  player  has  the  best  right  to  take  a hazard, 
and  must  be  marked  if  he  fails  to  pocket  the  ball,  in 
case  any  other  player  in  the  pool  has  offered  to  take  it. 

7th.  In  playing  out  of  his  turn,  the  player  loses  a 
life,  unless  he  pockets  the  object-ball,  in  which  case 
the  ball  pocketed  loses  a life,  and  the  next  in  rotation 
to  the  person  who  ought  to  have  played,  plays. 

8th.  But  if  one  player  misdirect  another  by  calling 
on  him  to  play,  when  it  is  not  his  turn,  the  misdirector, 
and  not  the  misdirected,  loses  a life,  and  the  next  in 
turn  must  lead  with  the  red  as  usual. 

9th.  Whoever  touches  any  of  the  balls  while  run- 
ning, forfeits  a life.  This  rule  is  invariable,  and  can 
only  be  relaxed  by  the  consent  of  all  the  players. 

10th.  No  player  can  own  or  have  an  interest  in 
more  than  one  ball  at  a time ; nor  can  he  buy  another 
ball,  nor  own  an  interest  in  another  ball,  while  his 
own  ball  is  either  alive  or  privileged. 

11th.  After  the  number  which  he  drew  is  dead,  he 
may  buy  that  of  another  player,  and  take  his  place ; 
but  if  the  seller  only  dispose  of  an  interest  in  his  ball, 
he  must  either  continue  to  play  it  himself  or  sell  out 
his  ball  in  toto^  in  which  latter  case  any  member  of  the 
original  pool  may  buy  and  finish  out  the  game. 

12th.  But  no  person  not  included  in  the  original 
pool  can  be  permitted  to  buy  in  and  play ; though  out- 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


225 


siders  may  purcliase  an  interest  in  a ball,  still  permit- 
ting the  original  member  of  the  pool  to  play  it. 

13th.  If  the  leader  sells  his  number  upon  the  lead 
the  purchaser  must  either  allow  the  lead  made  to  stand 
or  the  ball  may  be  spotted  at  his  option. 

14th.  A lead  once  made  cannot  be  changed,  even 
when  the  next  player  sells  his  ball  to  a third  party ; 
but  the  leader  has,  at  all  times,  the  option  of  having 
his  ball  spotted. 

15th.  No  player  can  strike  twice  in  succession,  under 
any  circumstances,  except  when  there  are  only  two 
players  left,  and  one  of  them  has  holed  his  opponent’s 
ball.  In  that  case,  the  person  who  has  pocketed  the 
ball  must  lead  for  his  adversary  to  play  on. 

16th.  When  only  two  players  are  left,  and  either  of 
them  wishes  to  divide  or  sell,  his  opponent  shall  have 
the  first  right  of  buying,  provided  that  he  offers  as 
much  as  is  offered  by  any  of  the  others  Avho  are  en- 
titled (by  having  been  in  the  original  pool)  to  purchase. 
But  should  he  not  offer  as  mueh,  then  the  ball  may  be 
sold  to  the  highest  duly-qualified  bidder. 

17th.  K a player,  playing  on  the  lead,  places  his  bal 
outside  of  the  string,  and  has  his  attention  called  to 
the  fact  by  the  leader  before  the  time  of  striking  his 
ball,  it  is  optional  with  the  leader  either  to  compel  him 
to  play  the  stroke  over  again  or  let  the  balls  remain  as 
tkey  are. 


10* 


226 


The  Game  oh  Billiards. 


ISth.  If  it  be  found  that  tbe  marker  has  not  thrown 
out  balls  enough  for  the  number  of  players  at  the  eom- 
mencement  of  the  game,  his  mistake  will  not  alter  the 
conditions  of  any  bets  which  may  have  been  made 
amongst  those  to  whom  balls  were  actually  distributed ; 
these  stand  irrespective  of  his  error.  The  balls  must  be 
again  shaken  up,  and  thrown  over,  and  then  the  game 
commences. 

With  the  foregoing  exceptions,  the  rules  of  the  ordi- 
nary American  game  as  to  striking  with  both  feet  off 
the  floor,  interrupting  your  adversary  when  in  the  act 
of  striking,  &c.,  &c.,  may  be  apolied  to  two-ball  pool. 


BULES  FOB  THE  GAME  OF  PIN  POOL 

AS  PLAYED  IN  NEW  YORK. 

This  game  is  a very  amusing  one,  and  seems  to  have 
been  made  up  out  of  the  odds  and  ends  of  half  a dozen 
others  : it  has  pins  in  it  like  the  Spanish  game,  small 
numbered  balls,  like  two-ball  pool,  and  reminds  us  of 
Vingt-un  at  cards,  by  the  player’s  liability  to  “ burst” 
if  he  exceeds  a certain  number.  Pin  pool  might  in- 
deed be  called  Trente-un,  as  thirty-one  is  the  winning 
number.  The  following  rules  are  for  the  game,  as 
played  in  New  York  and  its  vicinity,,  and  maybe 
adapted  in  the  important  matter  of  counts,  forfeitures, 
&c.,  to  the  game  as  played  in  all  other  parts  of  the 
Union.  In  Philadelphia,  and  other  places,  four  balls 
are  used  in  playing  it.  We  shall  therefore  lay  down 
rules  for  the  regular  game  as  played  here ; for  to  enter 


The  Game  of  Billiaebs. 


227 


into  all  the  varieties  would  be  an  endless  task ; and 
when  once  the  general  rules  are  understood,  the  different 
variations  may  be  readily  brought  within  its  operation. 

The  game  of  pin  pool,  then,  is  played  with  two  white 
balls  and  one  red,  together  with  five  small  wooden 
pins,  which  are  set  up  in  the  middle  of  the  table, 
diamond-fashion,  as  in  the  Spanish  game.  But  in  the 
latter  game,  each  pin  had  the  value  of  two  points ; 
while  in  this,  each  pin  has  a value  to  accord  with  the 
position  it  occupies. 

4* 

3^  6*  2* 

1* 

The  pin  nearest  the  string  line  is  called  No.  1 ; the 
pin  to  the  right  of  it,  No.  2 ; to  the  left,  No.  3 ; the 
pin  farthest  from  the  string  line,  No.  4 ; and  the  cen- 
tral pin  is  No.  5 ; these  numbers  are  generally  chalked 
on  the  table  in  front  of  each  particular  pin. 

Neither  caroms  nor  hazards  count;  for  pocketing 
your  own  ball,  or  causing  it  to  jump  off  the  table,  or 
lodge  on  the  cushion,  or  for  missing  altogether,  you 
lose  nothing.  The  only  penalty  is,  that  the,  ball  so 
offending  shall  be  spotted  about  five  inches  from  the 
lower  cushion,  midway  between  the  corner  pockets. 

When  the  pins  are  arranged,  the  rotation  of  the  play- 
ers is  determined  in  like  manner  as  in  two-ball  pool. 
After  which,  each  player  receives  from  the  marker  a little 
number-ball,  which  is  termed  his  private  ball,  the  num- 
ber of  which  is  not  known  to  any  of  his  opponents. 


228 


The  Game  of  Billiaips. 


/ 


The  object  of  the  players  is  to  knock  down  as  many 
pins  as  will  count  thirty-one,  when  the  number  on  the 
private  ball  is  added  to  their  aggregate:  thus,  if  a 
player’s  private  ball  be  No.  9,  he  will  have  to  gain 
twenty-two  points  on  the  pins  before  calling  “Trente-un,” 
and  whoever  first  gets  thirty-one  points  in  this  manner, 
wins  the  pool. 

When  the  rotation  of  the  players  is  decided,  the  red 
ball  is  spotted  about  five  inches  from  the  bottom  of 
the  table,  and  midway  between  the  pockets,  on  a line 
drawn  down  the  centre.  The  game  is  then  commenced. 

Eule  1st.  Player  No.  1 must  play  with  either  of 
the  white  balls  at  the  red,  or  place  his  own  ball  on  the 
deep-red  spot. 

2d.  Player  No.  2 must  play  at  either  ball,  or  spot 
his  own  ball  on  the  light-red  spot. 

3d.  Players  No.  1 and  No.  2 may  play  from  any- 
part  within  the  string.  No.  2 can  play  on  any  ball 
outside  the  string,  and  should  none  be  so  situated,  he 
may  have  the  red  ball  placed  on  its  appropriate  spot 

4th.  After  the  second  stroke  has  been  played,  the 
players  in  their  order  may  play  with  or  at  any  ball 
upon  the  board. 

5th.  Unless  the  player  has  played  on  some  ball  upon 
the  board  before  knocking  down  a pin,  the  stroke,  under 
all  circumstances,  goes  for  nothing,  and  the  pin  or  pins 
must  be  replaced.  But  should  two  balls  be  in  con- 
act,  the  player  can  play  with  either  of  the  balls  so 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


229 


touching,  direct  at  the  pins,  and  any  count  so  made  is 
good. 

6th.  If  a player,  with  one  stroke,  knocks  down  the 
four  outside  pins  and  leaves  the  central  one  standing 
on  its  spot,  under  any  and  all  circumstances  he  wins 
the  game. 

7th.  But  if  the  player  has  knocked  down  pins,  whose 
aggregate  number,  when  added  to  the  number  on  his 
private  ball,  exceeds  a total  of  thirty-one,  except  in 
case  mentioned  in  Rule  YL,  he  is  then  ‘‘  burst,”  and 
must  then  drop  out  of  the  game,  unless  he  claims  the 
‘‘privilege.”  If  he  wishes  to  claim  this,  he  must  do 
so  before  another  stroke  is  made,  as  otherwise  he  can 
only  re-enter  the  game  by  the  consent  of  all  the 
players.  ^ 

8th.  Players  having  bursted,  can  claim  “ privilege” 
as  often  as  they  burst ; and  wdien  privilege  is  granted, 
the  player  draws  a new  private  ball  from  the  marker, 
and  has  then  the  option  either  of  keeping  that  which 
he  originally  drew,  or  adopting  the  new  one  then  drawn : 
but  one  or  other  he  must  return,  or  else  he  cannot, 
under  any  circumstances,  be  entitled  to  the  pool. 

9th,  Every  privilege  taken  succeeds  the  last  number 
of  the  players  in  the  order  of  its  play.  Thus,  if  there 
are  ten  players,  and  No.  2 bursts,  he  appears  again 
under  privilege,  as  No.  11,  and  follows  No.  10 ; and 
all  the  players  that  are  burst  after  him,  will  have  to 
follow  No.  11,  in  the  order  of  their  reentry  into  play. 
So  that  if  it  be  the  highest  number  in  the  pool  that 
bursts,  he  will  follow  on  immediately  after  choosing  his 
private  ball. 


230 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds. 


lOth.  If  a player  make  a miss,  or  pocket  his  own 
ball,  or  cause  it  to  jump  off  the  table  or  lodge  on  the 
cushion ; or  if,  after  j umping  off  it  should  be  thrown  back 
upon  the  table  by  any  of  the  bystanders — ^under  any  of 
these  circumstances,  the  ball  must  be  placed  on  the  spot 
five  inches  from  the  bottom  cushion  on  the  central 
line — or  should  that  be  occupied,  then  on  the  deep-red 
spot — or  should  that  also  be  occupied,  then  upon  the 
light-red  spot. 

11th.  Should  the  spot  appropriated  to  any  of  the  pins 
which  have  been  knocked  down,  be  occupied  by  any 
of  the  balls,  said  pin  must  remain  off  until  said  spot 
is  again  uncovered. 

12th.  K a player  has  made  thirty-one,  he  must  pro- 
claim it  before  the  next  stroke  is  made — for  which  pur- 
pose a reasonable  delay  must  be  made  between  each 
play,  more  especially  in  the  latter  portion  of  the  game. 
But  if  a player  has  made  thirty-one,  and  fails  to  an- 
nounce it  before  next  play  (a  reasonable  time  having 
passed),  then  he  cannot  proclaim  the  fact  until  the 
rotation  of  play  again  comes  round  to  him.  In  the 
meanwhile,  if  any  other  player  makes  the  number  and 
proclaims  it  properly,  he  is  entitled  to  the  pool,  wholly 
irrespective  of  the  fact  that  the  number  was  made, 
though  not  proclaimed  before. 

13th.  Merely  touching  a pin  or  shaking  it,  goes  for 
nothing,  and  the  pin  must  be  replaced  on  its  spot.  To 
count  a pin,  it  must  be  either  knocked  down  or  remov- 
ed two  full  inches  from  the  spot  on  which  it  stood,  ir 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


231 


wliicli  case  it  shall  be  counted,  even  tbougb  it  main- 
tains the  perpendicular. 

14tb.  A player  cannot  use  any  count  lie  may  have 
made  by  playing  out  of  his  turn : but  if  he  has  made 
pins  enough  to  burst  him  by  such  stroke,  the  loss  is 
established,  unless  in  cases  where  he  was  called  on  to 
play  by  some  other  of  the  players,  or  the  marker,  who 
either  believed  or  pretended  it  was  his  turn.  In  such 
case  he  cannot  be  burst  by  his  stroke,  and  he  whose 
turn  it  was  to  play,  plays  next  in  order. 

15th.  Pins  which  have  been  knocked  down  by  a 
ball  whose  course  has  in  anywise  been  illegitimately 
interfered  with,  do  not  count;  nor  can  pins  knocked 
down  by  any  other  ball  set  in  motion  by  the  same 
play,  be  reckoned. 

16th.  If  a ball  jump  off  the  table  and  be  thrown 
back  by  any  of  the  bystanders  in  such  a way  as  to 
knock  down  pins,  such  pins  do  not  count,  and  the  ball 
must  be  spotted  as  aforementioned,  and  the  pins  re- 
placed. But  if  any  other  ball  set  in  motion  by  the 
same  stroke  gets  pins,  the  pins  so  made  by  the  other 
ball  must  be  reckoned. 

17th.  If  the  marker  finds  that  there  are  any  of  the 
private  balls  missing,  it  is  then  h,is  duty  to  announce 
the  number  of  the  missing  ball ; as  in  no  case  can  a 
player  having  that  ball,  or  more  than  one  private  ball 
in  his  possession,  win  the  pool.  His  other  duties  con- 
sist of  keeping  and  calling  the  game  at  each  stroke, 


232 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


and  seeing  that  the  pins  and  balls  be  spotted  when 
and  as  required. 

18th.  A player  taking  a privilege  is  entitled  to  a 
strike,  to  secure  his  stake  to  the  pool. 

For  rules  of  the  Planting  game  see 

RULES  OBSERVED  IN  PLAYING  PIN  POOL 

AT  MICHAEL  PHELAN’s  BILLIARD  ROOM,  SAN  FRANCISCO. 

In  San  Francisco,  from  the  mixed  character  of  its 
population,  a new  set  of  rules  became  absolutely  ne- 
cessary, to  reduce  into  something  like  settled  order  the 
innovations  which  players  from  different  nations  made 
in  the  established  usages  of  the  game.  The  following 
rules  were  drawn  up  by  the  author,  while  residing  in 
San  Francisco,  and  are  still  the  regular  law  of  the  game 
as  it  is  there  played : 

1st.  Two  balls  must  be  placed  upon  the  spots  at  the 
foot  of  the  table. 

2d.  The  person  drawing  the  No.  1 ball  must  play  from 
the  string  at  the  head  of  the  table. 

3d.  When  a player  makes  amiss,  or  hits  a pin  before 
hitting  a ball,  the  ball  played  with  shall  be  spotted  at 
the  foot  of  the  table.  In  case  of  there  being  a ball 
upon  the  spot  at  the  foot  of  the  table,  the  ball  shall  be 
spotted  upon  the  spot  nearest  the  same. 

4th.  Should  a player  make  more  than  thirty-one^  he 
shall  declare  himself  hursted^  before  another  stroke  be 
made,  for  the  safety  of  the  rest  of  the  players. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


233 


oth.  If  a player  make  a stroke  and  make  pins,  and 
wish  to  plant,  he  must,  on  so  making  pins,  declare  that 
he  plants,  before  another  stroke  is  made. 

6th.  But  a player  wishing  to  call  the  planter  can 
plant,  even  if  he  did  not  make  pins  on  his  last  stroke, 

7th.  And  if  those  who  plant  have  the  same  number, 
counting  their  ball  and  the  board,  the  player  planting 
first  shall  still  be  good,  and  the  last  planter  shall  be 
bursted;  but  if  the  last  planter  is  nearer  thirty-one 
than  the  first,  the  first  planter  shall  be  bursted. 

8th.  If  a player  in  the  game  should  burst,  he  can  pur- 
chase any  ball  still  in  the  game,  by  consent  of  the 
player  owning  such  ball. 

9th.  tSTo  player  can  play  the  planter’s  ball  but  himself. 

10th.  When  a player  is  absent,  and  his  number  is 
called  three  times,  the  gamekeeper  shall  play  the  ball, 
at  the  risk  of  the  player  owning  such  ball. 

11th.  Any  number  scored  wrong  upon  the  board, 
shall  be  corrected  before  the  player,  whose  score  is 
wrong,  shall  have  played.  If  he  neglect  to  correct 
such  mistake  before  he  plays,  it  shall  stand  as  scored 
upon  the  board. 

12th.  No  player  can  purchase  a ball  until  his  own  be 
dead. 

13th.  No  player  can  purchase  a ball  after  having  seen 
more  than  one,  without  the  consent  of  the  rest  of  the 
players. 


234 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


14tli.  If  a player,  at  one  stroke,  should  knock  down 
the  four  outside  pins,  and  leave  the  centre  pin  standing, 
it  shall  be  counted  as  thirty-one,  and  the  player  mak- 
ing the  stroke,  wins  the  pool. 

16th.  If  the  planter  should  make  the  four  outside  pins, 
as  in  Eule  14,  or  should  make  thirty-one  for  the  player 
planted  upon,  it  is  pool  for  the  player  planted  upon. 

16th.  The  planter  plants  upon  the  preceding  player. 

17th.  The  player  preceding  the  planter,  shall  be  en- 
titled to  a stroke  before  the  planter’s  play  counts  on 
him. 

18th.  After  a stroke  is  made,  sufficient  time  must  be 
allowed  the  player  to  add  up  his  game,  and  to  proclaim 
pool,  if  he  makes  it,  or  to  plant,  if  he  wishes  to,  before 
the  next  play.  K he  neglect  to  claim  the  pool  before 
the  next  play,  he  must  wait  until  his  turn  to  play  comes 
again,  when  he  may  declare  pool,  but  if  another  makes 
pool  in  the  meantime,  that  other  is  entitled  to  it,  and 
not  he  who  first  made  it. 

19th.  Should  a ball  stop  on  any  of  the  spots  intended 
for  the  pins,  such  pins  are  to  remain  off  the  table  until 
those  spots  so  occupied  become  vacant.  Provided, 
such  pin  or  pins  be  down. 

20th.  Should  a ball  roll  against  a pin,  and  cause  it  to 
lean  over,  or  move  it  off  the  spot,  without  knocking  it 
down,  the  player  cannot  claim  such  pin,  as  nothing 
counts  but  knocking  the  pins  down.  But  when  the 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


235 

pins  are  moved  two  inches  from  the  spots,  they  are  con- 
sidered down,  whether  down  or  standing. 

21st.  Should  a player  play  out  of  his  turn,  he  cannot 
count  the  pins  made  by  such  stroke,  but  if  he  make  pins 
enough  to  burst  him,  it  is  his  own  loss — provided  he 
was  not  called  on  to  play  ; in  such  case  he  cannot  lose 
by  it,  and  any  count  made  by  such  stroke  is  null.  He 
whose  turn  it  was  to  play,  when  the  other  played  out 
of  turn,  plays  next  in  order. 

22d.  But  one  privilege  is  allowed  in  the  game,  (the 
first  player  bursted,)  unless  by  consent  of  all  the 
players. 

23d.  In  taking  a privilege,  the  player  has  the  right 
to  draw  a second  private  ball,  and  to  choose  between 
that  and  his  original  ball ; but  he  must  decide  quickly 
which  ball  he  will  keep,  before  the  next  stroke  be 
made. 

24th.  Each  privilege  follows  the  last  number,  in  rota- 
tion, the  first  privilege  playing  immediately  after  the 
last  player  in  the  original  game,  the  second  privilege 
follows  the  first,  and  so  on.  If  the  last  player  burst 
and  take  a privilege,  he  plays  on,  immediately  after 
choosing  his  private  ball. 

25th.  If  the  balls  are  touching  each  other,  the  player 
can  play  with  either  of  the  balls  so  touching,  straight 
at  the  pins,  without  touching  another  ball,  and  any 
count  so  made  is  good  except  when  the  play  conflicts 
with  Kules  26,  27  and  31. 


236 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


26tli.  Any  pin  knocked  down  by  jarring  the  table, 
blowing  upon  the  ball,  or  altering  or  intercepting  its 
course  in  running,  does  not  count,  nor  is  the  player 
entitled  to  any  pin  or  pins  that  may  be  made  by  any 
ball  (though  not  interfered  with),  during  the  same 
play. 

27lh.  Should  a ball  jump  off  the  table,  and  come  in 
v'ontact  with  a player,  or  any  other  person,  and  fall 
back  on  the  table  and  knock  down  pins,  such  pin  or 
pins  so  knocked  down  shall  not  count,  and  the  ball 
must  be  spotted;  but  if  another  ball  gets  pins  by  the 
same  stroke,  the  pins  so  made  are  counted. 

28th.  Should  a player,  in  the  act  of  striking  his  ball 
or  playing,  knock  down  pins  otherwise  than  with  the 
ball  played  with  or  at,  he  is  not  entitled  to  such  pins, 
or  any  others  he  may  make  by  the  same  stroke. 

29th.  Should  a player,  in  the  act  of  playing,  touch  the 
ball  with  his  cue  before  the  stroke  is  made,  it  shall  be 
declared  a miss,  and  the  ball  be  spotted. 

30th.  The  gamekeeper  is  not  responsible  to  the  winner 
of  a pool  for  more  than  the  actual  amount  of  stakes 
received  from  the  players  in  such  pool. 

31st.  The  player  is  not  entitled  to  any  pins  knocked 
down  unless  his  private  ball  be  placed  in  its  proper 
place  in  the  board. 

S2d.  The  players  themselves  are  to  see  that  all  pins 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


237 


properly  knocked  down,  be  placed  to  tbeir  respective 
credit. 

83d.  The  player  in  this  game,  as  in  billiards,  has  the 
sole  right  of  looking  after  his  own  interests,  and  neither 
the  gamekeeper  nor  any  of  the  bystanders  have  any 
right  to  dictate  to  or  advise  him,  unless  by  the  consent 
of  all  the  players. 

84th.  The  gamekeeper  shall  collect  the  stakes,  and 
make  up  the  pool ; deal  out  the  small  balls  to  the  play- 
ers ; see  that  the  balls  and  pins  are  properly  spotted ; 
that  there  are  no  more  private  balls  out  than  there  are 
players  in  the  pool ; and  if  any  balls  are  missing,  pro- 
claim its  number  to  the  players — as  the  pool  cannot  be 
won  by  such  ball ; — call  out  each  number  in  its  turn 
to  the  players,  and  proclaim,  loud  enough  for  them  to 
hear  it,  the  number  they  already  count,  from  pins 
knocked  down. 

36th.  No  person  is  considered  in  the  game  unless  his 
stakes  be  paid  in. 

36th.  All  other  contingencies  not  herein  provided  for, 
are  to  be  referred  to  the  gamekeeper,  whose  decision 
shall  be  final. 


238 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


RULES  FOR  THE  GAME  OF  ENGLISH  POOL. 

There  are  several  ways  of  playing  pool, — namely, 
with  as  many  balls  as  there  are  players;  or  with 
two  balls  only,  the  players  playing  in  turns,  and 
with  the  alternate  balls ; playing  at  the  nearest  ball ; 
playing  at  the.  last  player  ; or  the  player  playing  at 
whichever  ball  he  chooses.  But  the  most  popular 
mode  is  that  in  which  the  player  plays  at  the  last 
player.  This  is  likewise  the  fairest  way  of  playing  the 
game. 

The  following  are  the  rules  for  the  game  according 
to  this  last  method : 

RULES  FOR  POOL  PLAYING  AT  THE  LAST  PLAYER. 

1st.  When  colored  balls  are  used  in  playing  this  game, 
the  players  must  play  progressively  as  the  colors  are 
placed  on  the  marking-board,  the  top  color  being 
No.  1. 

2d.  Each  player  has  three  lives  at  starting.  No.  1 
places  his  ball  on  the  winning  and  losing  spot — No.  2 
plays  at  No.  1 — ^No.  3 at  No.  2,  and  so  on,  each  person 
playing  at  the  last  ball : unless  it  should  be  in  hand, 
then  the  player  plays  at  the  nearest  ball. 

3d.  If  a striker  should  lose  a life  in  anyway,  the 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


239 


next  player  plays  at  the  nearest  ball  to  his  own ; but 
if  his  (the  player’s)  ball  be  in  hand,  he  plays  at  the 
nearest  ball  to  the  centre  of  the  baulk  line,  whether  in 
or  out  of  the  baulk. 

4th.  Should  a doubt  arise  respecting  the  distance  of 
balls,  it  must  (if  at  the  commencement  of  the  game,  or 
if  the  player’s  ball  be  in  hand)  be  measured  from  the 
centre  spot  in  the  circle ; but  if  the  striker’s  ball  be  not 
in  hand,  the  measurement  must  be  made  from  his  ball 
to  the  others ; and  in  both  cases  it  must  be  decided  by 
the  marker,  or  by  the  majority  of  the  company  ; but 
should  the  distances  be  equal,  then  the  parties  must 
draw  lots. 

6th.  The  baulk  is  no  protection  at  Pool  under  any 
circumstances.  ^ 

6th.  The  player  may  lose  a life  by  any  one  of  the 
following  means : — ^by  pocketing  his  own  ball ; by 
running  a coup ; by  missing  the  ball ; by  forcing  his 
ball  off  the  table;  by  playing  with  the  wrong  ball ; by 
playing  at  the  wrong  ball;  or  by  playing  out  of 
his  turn. 

N.B.  A life  is  lost  by  a ball  being  pocketed,  or 
forced  off  the  table  by  the  adversary. 

7th.  Should  the  striker  pocket  the  ball  he  plays  at, 
and  by  the  same  stroke  pocket  his  own,  or  force  it  over 
the  table,  he  loses  the  life,  and  not  the  person  whose 
ball  he  pocketed. 


i40 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


8tli.  Should  the  player  strike  the  wrong  ball,  he  pays 
the  same  forfeit  to  the  person  whose  ball  he  should 
have  played  at,  as  he  would  have  done  if  he  had 
pocketed  it. 

9th.  If  the  striker  miss  the  ball  he  ought  to  play  at, 
and  strike  another  ball,  and  pocket  it,  he  loses  a life, 
and  not  the  person  whose  ball  he  pocketed ; in  which 
case,  the  striker’s  ball  must  be  taken  oJBf  the  table,  and 
both  balls  should  remain  in  hand,  until  it  be  their  turn 
to  play. 

10th.  If  the  striker,  whilst  taking  his  aim,  inquire 
which  of  the  balls  he  ought  to  play  at,  and  should  be 
misinformed  by  any  one  of  the  players,  or  by  the 
marker,  he  does  not  lose  a life ; the  ball  must,  in  this 
Vase,  be  replaced,  and  the  stroke  played  again. 

11th.  If  information  is  required  by  the  player,  as  to 
which  is  his  ball,  or  when  it  is  his  turn  to  play,  he  has 
a right  to  an  answer  from  the  marker,  or  from  the 
players. 

12th.  When  a ball  or  balls  touch  the  striker’s  ball, 
or  are  in  a line  between  it  and  the  ball  he  has  to  play 
at,  so  that  it  will  prevent  him  hitting  any  part  of  the 
object-ball,  they  must  be  taken  up  until  the  stroke  be 
played,  and  after  the  balls  have  ceased  running  they 
must  be  replaced. 

13th.  If  a ball  or  balls  are  in  the  way  of  a striker’s 
cue,  so  that  he  cannot  play  at  his  ball,  he  can  have 
them  taken  up. 


The  Game  of  Billiards.  2il 

14tli.  Wlien  tlie  striker  takes  a life,  he  may  con- 
tinue to  play  on  as  long  as  he  can  make  a hazard,  or 
until  the  balls  are  all  off  the  table,  in  which  latter  case 
he  plays  from  the  baulk,  or  places  his  ball  on  the  spot 
as  at  the  commencement. 

15th.  The  first  person  who  loses  his  three  lives  is 
entitled  to  purchase,  or,  as  it  is  called,  to  star  (that  be- 
ing the  mark  placed  against  his  lives  on  the  board  to 
denote  that  he  has  purchased),  by  paying  into  the  pool 
the  same  sum  as  at  the  commencement,  for  which  he 
receives  lives  equal  in  number  to  the  lowest  number  of 
lives  on  the  board. 

16th.  If  the  first  person  out  refuse  to  star,  the  second 
person  may  do  it ; but  if  the  second  refuse,  the  third 
may  do  it,  and  so  on,  until  only  two  persons  are  left  in 
the  pool,  in  which  case  the  privilege  of  starring 
ceases. 

17th.  Only  one  star  is  allowed  in  a pool. 

18th.  TS  the  striker  should  move  another  ball  whilst 
in  the  act  of  striking  his  own  ball,  the  stroke  is  con- 
sidered foul;  and  if  by  the  same  stroke  he  pocket  a 
ball,  or  force  it  off  the  table,  the  owner  of  that  ball 
does  not  lose  a life,  and  the  ball  must  be  placed  on  its 
original  spot ; but  if  by  that  stroke  he  should  pocket 
his  own  ball,  or  force  it  off  the  table,  he  loses  a life. 

19th.  If  the  striker’s  ball  touch  the  ball  he  has  to 
play  at,  he  is  then  at  liberty  either  to  play  at  it  or  at 
any  other  ball  on  the  table,  and  it  is  not  to  be  consid- 
11 


242 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


ered  a foul  stroke : in  this  case,  however,  the  striker 
is  liable  to  lose  a life,  by  going  into  a pocket  or  over 
the  table. 

20th.  After  making  a hazard,  if  the  striker  should 
take  up  his  ball,  or  stop  it  before  it  has  done  running, 
he  cannot  claim  the  life,  or  the  hazard,  from  the  person 
whose  ball  was  pocketed;  it  being  possible  that  his 
own  ball  might  have  gone  into  a pocket  if  he  had  not 
stopped  it. 

21st.  If,  before  a star,  two  or  more  balls  are  pocketed 
by  the  same  stroke,  including  the  ball  played  at,  each 
having  one  life,  the  owner  of  the  ball  first  struck  has 
the  option  of  starring ; but  should  he  refuse,  and  more 
lhan  one  remain,  the  persons  to  whom  they  belong 
must  draw  lots  for  the  star. 

22d.  Should  the  striker’s  ball  stop  on  the  spot  of  a 
ball  removed,  the  ball  which  has  been  removed  must 
remain  in  hand  until  the  spot  is  unoccupied,  and  then 
be  replaced. 

23d.  If  the  striker  should  have  his  next  player’s  ball 
removed,  and  stop  on  the  spot  it  occupied,  the  next 
•player  must  give  a miss  from  the  baulk  to  any  part  of 
the  table  he  thinks  proper,  for  which  miss  he  does  not 
lose  a life. 

24th.  If  the  striker  has  a ball  removed,  and  any  other 
than  the  next  player’s  ball  should  stop  on  the  spot  it 
occupied,  the  ball  removed  must  remain  in  hand  till  the 
one  on  its  place  be  played,  unless  it  should  happen  to 


The  Game  of  Billi4.rds. 


243 


be  tbe  turn  of  tbe  one  removed  to  play  before  the  one 
on  its  place,  in  which  case  that  ball  must  give  place  to 
the  one  originally  taken  up ; after  which  it  may  be  re- 
placed. 

25th.  If  the  corner  of  the  cushion  should  prevent  the 
striker  from  playing  in  a direct  line,  he  can  have  any 
ball  removed  for  the  purpose  of  playing  at  a cushion 
3rst. 

26th.  The  two  last  players  cannot  star  or  purchase ; 
but  they  may  divide,  if  they  are  left  with  an  equal 
number  of  lives  each ; the  striker,  however,  is  entitled 
to  his  stroke  before  the  division. 

27th.  All  disputes  to  be  decided  by  a majority  of  the 
players. 

28th.  The  charge  for  the  play  to  be  taken  out  of  the 
pool  before  it  is  delivered  up  to  the  winner. 

the  nearest  ball  pool. 

In  this  Pool  the  players  always  play  at  the  nearest 
ball  out  of  the  baulk ; for  in  this  Pool  the  baulk  is  a 
protection. 

1st.  If  all  the  balls  be  in  the  baulk,  and  the  striker’s 
ball  in  hand,  he  must  lead  to  the  top  cushion,  or  place 
the  ball  on  the  winning  and  losing  spot. 

2d.  If  the  striker’s  ball  be  within  the  baulk  line,  and 


244: 


The  Game  of  Billtaeds. 


lie  lias  to  play  at  a ball  out  of  the  baulk,  he  is  allowed 
to  have  any  ball  taken  up  that  may  chance  to  Ik 
in  his  way. 

3d.  If  all  the  balls  be  within  the  baulk,  and  the 
striker’s  ball  not  in  hand,  he  plays  at  the  nearest  ball. 

All  the  other  rules  of  the  former  pool  are  to  be  ob* 
served  at  this. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


245 


INSTRUCTIONS  TO  THE  MARKER, 

FOR  KEEPING  COUNT  OP  THE  AMERICAN,  OR  FOUR  BALL  GAME 

1st.  Give  the  striker  two  for  pocketing  his  oppo- 
nent’s ball,  or  for  caroming  on  a white  and  red. 

2d,  Give  him  three  for  each  red  ball  pocketed,  or 
for  a carom  on  the  two  red  balls. 

8d.  Give  him  four  for  caroming  on  a red  and  white, 
and  pocketing  his  opponent’s  ball. 

4th.  Give  him  FIVE  for  caroming  on  all  the  balls, 
no  matter  in  what  order  they  are  touched ; also,  five 
for  holeing  a red  ball  and  caroming  on  his  opponent’s, 
and  five  for  caroming  on  the  two  red  balls  and  pocket- 
ing his  opponent’s. 

5th.  Give  him  six  when  he  caroms  on  the  two  red 
balls,  and  pockets  one  of  them. 

6th.  Let  him  have  seven  when  he  caroms  on  a 
white  and  red  ball,  and  pockets  both ; the  same  when 
he  caroms  on  all  the  balls,  and  pockets  the  white. 

7th.  For  pocketing  one  of  the  red  balls,  and  carom- 
ing on  all  the  others,  let  him  have  eight  ; also  for 
caroming  on  the  two  reds,  pocketing  one  of  them,  and 
also  his  opponent’s  ball. 


246 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


Stli.  Give  him  hine  for  caroming  on  the  two  reds, 
and  pocketing  them. 

9th.  For  caroming  on  all  the  balls  and  pocketing  a 
ed  ball  and  his  opponent’s,  give  him  ten. 

10th.  For  caroming  on  all  the  balls  and  pocketing 
the  two  reds,  let  him  have  eleven. 

11th.  Let  him  have  thirteen  (the  highest  figure 
that  can  be  won  by  one  stroke  in  this  game)  when  he 
caroms  on  all,  and  pockets  all  the  balls,  except  his 
own. 

12th.  Give  his  adversary  one  when  the  player 
makes  a miss,  or  fails  to  hit  any  of  the  balls  on  the 
table  with  his  own. 

13th.  Give  his  opponent  two  when  the  player’s  ball 
jumps  over  the  side  of  the  table,  or  lodges  on  the  top 
of  the  cushion  after  it  has  struck  a white  ball ; two, 
also,  if  the  player  pockets  his  own  ball  after  touching 
his  opponent’s. 

14th.  The  opponent  takes  three  when  the  striker 
pockets  his  own  ball,  without  touching  any  other  on 
the  table,  or  after  it  has  touched  a red ; or  causes  it  to 
jump  off  the  table  or  lodge  on  the  cushion,  under  the 
same  circumstances. 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


247 


CHAPTER  VL 

GENERAL  SUMMARY  OF  INSTRUCTIONS. 

In  the  foregoing  pages  our  sole  object  has  been  to 
assist  the  student  by  such  simple  and  practical  instruc- 
tions as,  with  the  assistance  of  the  diagrams,  would 
facilitate  his  acquirement  of  the  true  principles  and 
execution  of  the  game.  We  might  have  given  accom- 
plished players  a higher  estimate  of  our  individual 
proficiency,  had  we  entered  into  the  minutiae  of  prob- 
lems which  are  possible,  but  most  difficult  of  attain- 
ment. But,  in  order  to  secure  simplicity  and  useful- 
ness, it  became  necessary  to  sacrifice  whatever  personal 
advantage  this  latter  course  might  have  produced. 
Our  book  is  designed  as  an  aid  to  amateurs,  and  not  as 
a test  for  the  capacities  and  expertness  of  professional 
or  first-class  players.  These  latter  must  be  well  aware, 
from  experience,  that  there  are  delicacies  and  mysteries 
of  execution  which  they  accomplish  daily,  but  could 
no  more  be  described  in  words,  than  the  last  finishing 
touches  with  which  the  painter  gives  life  and  indivi- 
duality to  the  dead  features  of  his  portrait.  We  have 
before  said,  and  again  repeat,  if  possible  more  emphati- 
cally, that  the  novice,  to  profit  by  our  labors,  must 
either  put  himself  at  first  under  the  tuition  of  a com- 
petent master,  or  study  our  problems  with  the  cue  in 
one  hand  and  the  book  on  the  table  before  him. 


248 


The  Game  of  Billiakds. 


Let  the  quantities  of  power  be  practiced  with  pa- 
tience, until  they  are  thoroughly  acquired;  every  hour 
devoted  to  obtaining  mastery  of  the  strength  and  direc- 
tion of  the  cue,  will  save  months  of  miserable  failure 
in  the  different  experiments  of  the  game.  Let  the 
student,  also,  practice  the  different  kinds  of  strokes — 
force,  follow,  jump,  and  so  forth,  separately,  devoting 
a certain  time  to  each,  and  not  passing  on  to  the  next 
until  he  has  mastered  the  preceding  one,  and  taken 
good  note  of  the  varieties  of  angles  which,  under  dif- 
ferent circumstances,  it  will  produce  from  the  cushion. 
By  trying  them  one  after  another,  instead  of  each  by 
itself,  the  results  become  as  inextricably  confounded 
as  the  different  flavors  of  a French  ragout.  The  cush- 
ions are  to  billiards  what  the  chords  are  to  music ; 
until  their  properties  are  understood,  no  equable  and 
harmonious  play  can  be  established. 

These  remarks  are  specially  applicable  to  any  player 
who  aspires  to  a knowledge  of  ‘‘  nursing,”  in  its  bil- 
liard and  not  babyish  sense.  By  mastering  the  Quan- 
tities of  Power,  and  making  such  deductions  as  expe- 
rience will  shortly  teach  for  the  loss  of  strength  im- 
parted to  the  object-ball,  the  player  will  eventually  be 
enabled  to  manage  and  foretell  precisely  in  what  posi- 
tions the  balls  will  be  left  at  the  end  of  a contemplated 
stroke.  If  that  position  be  one  from  which  no  further 
advantage  to  him  can  be  hoped ; or  one  which — should 
he  fail  in  his  immediate  object — would  leave  the  balls 
/ so  arranged  that  his  adversary  might  reasonably  ex 
pect  a fine  opening ; or  should  any  other,  even  more 
difficult  mode  of  play  occur  to  him,  in  which,  if  sue- 


The  Game  of  Billiaebs. 


249 


cessful,  a mucli  finer  disposition  of  the  balls  would  be 
left,  or  a disposition  much  less  favorable  to  his  adver- 
sary; in  any  one  or  all  of  these  contingencies,  dis- 
cretion will  be  found  the  better  part  of  valor,  and 
in  the  end  it  will  appear  that,  not  the  brilliancy,  but 
the  persistent  good  judgment  of  the  shots  will  carry 
off  the  palm. 

This  art  of  nursing  the  balls  is  indeed  the  most 
difficult  attainment  and  crowning  glory  of  the  game : 
to  discover  when  the  balls  are  separated  to  the  four 
corners  of  the  table,  some  device  or  series  of  devices 
which,  with  good  execution,  will  gradually  bring  them 
nearer  and  nearer,  finally  bringing  them  within  one 
corner  or  against  a cushion,  where  the  least  touches  of 
the  cue  will  make  a succession  of  caroms ; or  where 
a vigorous  stroke  will  make  some  one  of  them  travel 
over  a great  space,  and  yet  come  back  to  its  cluster  as 
infallibly  as  the  young  birds  to  the  nest ; or  where 
this  is  impossible — no  further  run  to  be  made  and  the 
count  exhausted — then  to  scatter  them  over  the  table 
in  worse  than  Siberian  exile  one  from  another,  so  that 
the  player  who  succeeds  may  inherit  only  a barren 
kingdom; — in  these  things  consists  the  highest  exceb 
lence  of  the  judicious  player,  and  he  who  can  do  these 
things  best  is  certain  of  success  in  the  course  of  con 
tinuous  play.  The  danger  of  this  art,  however,  un- 
less the  player  feel  very  sure  of  his  own  skill,  is  serious 
and  not  lightly  to  be  incurred.  Should  he  bring  the 
balls  together  and  then,  by  a miss,  so  leave  them  for 
his  opponent — he  may  look  out  for  a run  which  will 
slightly  damage  his  chances  of  the  game.  Wherever 
11* 


250 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


here  is  danger  of  his  missing  the  next  shot,  it  wonld 
be  prudent  rather  to  separate  the  balls  in  the  worst 
position  possible  for  the  succeeding  player,  and  wait 
patiently  for  another  chance. 

It  should  always  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  game 
will  not  be  decided  by  the  player’s  capacity  to  perform 
any  particular  stroke  ; the  most  brilliant  shot  is  a mis- 
take, if  it  does  not  leave  the  balls  in  a position  from 
which  another  count  can  be  effected.  Let  the  student, 
while  he  plays  for  the  stroke  before  him,  keep  an  eye 
on  the  ensuing  stroke,  of  which  that  stroke  will  be  the 
father ; let  him  see  to  it,  that  this  offspring  shall  not 
be  a disgrace  and  expense  to  him.  When  the  balls 
are  so  placed  that  no  count  can  be  reasonably  expected, 
then  play  for  safety,  and  divide  the  balls  in  the  way 
least  likely  to  turn  to  your  opponent’s  profit. 

The  student,  moreover,  should  avoid  the  dangerous 
temptation  of  playing  hard  for  a “scratch.”  Let  him 
invariably  play  for  some  definite  object,  and  then, 
should  he  fail,  he  will  have  learned  something  that 
may  insure  success  another  time  ; but  the  scratch  game 
does  away  with  all  ideas  of  scientific  proficiency,  and 
every  count  so  acquired  is  a positive  obstacle  in  the 
path  of  any  future  and  permanent  progress.  The  fable 
of  the  hare  and  the  tortoise  is  an  old  one,  but  it  will 
receive  new  confirmation  if  two  novices  commence — 
the  one  playing  as  we  direct,  and  the  other  playing 
wildly  for  the  chances.  After  a few  months’  steady 
practice  of  the  different  kinds  of  stroke,  and  quantities 
of  power,  our  pupil  would  then  commence  the  actual 
game,  with  advantages  which  would  quickly  place  him 


The  Game  of  Billiards. 


251 


in  the  front  rank  of  scientific  players  ; while  the  other 
would  be  years  before  attaining  the  average  proficiency, 
and  never  could  hope  for  a higher  rank,  until  he  un- 
learned the  absurdities  of  his  own  teaching,  and  had 
gone  back  to  the  point  from  which  the  other  started. 

Eemember,  always,  that  a game  is  never  lost  until 
the  last  point  has  been  strung  off:  if  your  adversary 
be  a long  way  ahead  of  you,  it  is  all  the  more  your 
duty  to  take  advantage  of  those  careless  strokes,  into 
which  his  apparent  superiority  will  be  likely  to  betray 
him.  Deal  tenderly  with  your  opponent’s  ball ; do 
not  pocket  it,  if  any  other  play  will  serve  your  pur- 
pose ; if  it  be  tucked  under  the  cushion,  reflect  on  the 
stroke  that  is  to  follow,  before  you  disturb  its  dreams ; 
and  bear  in  mind  that  it  is  better  to  play  for  two  and 
win,  than  for  thirteen,  which  you  will  be  likely  to 
miss.  It  is  easier,  also, — or  if  not,  it  is  at  least  much 
better — ^to  chalk  your  cue  and  strike,  than  to  make  a 
miscue  and  then  chalk.  Our  final  advice  to  the  learner 
is,  to  take  sufficient  time  and  care  to  insure  success  to 
his  stroke. 

The  author  would  indeed  be  ungrateful,  did  he  fail 
to  acknowledge  the  kind  and  valuable  help  which  has 
been  given  him,  both  by  amateurs  and  professional 
friends,  in  the  compilation  of  this  treatise.  He  would 
gladly  acknowledge  his  indebtedness  to  each  by  name, 
were  it  not  that  he  knows  they  are  of  the  class  who 

“ Do  good  by  stealth,  and  blush  to  find  it  fame.’* 

Let  them,  therefore,  take  the  will  for  the  deed ; and 
believe  us,  that  for  their  friendly  help  and  many  gener 


252 


The  Game  of  Billiaeds 


ous  favors,  not  only  in  this,  but  in  all  other  matters 
wherewith  we  have  been  professionally  connected, 
we  thank  them  with  a sincerity  which  is  too  deep  and. 
fervent  to  be  expressed  in  such  words  as  are  ours  to 
offer. 

To  conclude — for  the  writer  makes  no  pretence  to 
the  refinements  of  authorship,  and  his  language,  here 
and  there,  may  be  open  to  unfriendly  criticism — he 
would  say  that  the  theories  and  principles  laid  down 
in  the  foregoing  pages  have  been  those  he  himself 
has  followed,  during  a career  which,  in  its  own  humble 
way,  has  not  been  unattended  with  distinction ; and  if 
any  professional  litterateur — or  professional  player,  for 
the  matter  of  that — should  take  exception  to  any  of 
the  matters  which  he  has  here  laid  down,  as  the  result 
of  his  own  experience,  he  can  only  say  that  he  will  be 
happy  to  meet  them  in  his  own,  or  any  other  billiard 
saloon  where  the  tables  are  correct,  and  decide  the 
question  in  dispute  by  a direct  appeal  to  the  balls. 
However  insignificant  he  may  be  with  a pen  in  his 
hand,  he  flatters  himself  that  with  a cue  he  would  be 
able  to  teach  a majority  of  his  critics  a lesson  it  would 
profit  them  to  know.  They  might  teach  him  ‘‘  the 
whole  duty  of  man,”  upon  paper;  but,  on  the  tables, 
he  could  teach  them  the  whole  duty  of  a billiard- 
plaver.  f 


APPENDIX. 


To  tills  Poem  we  have  made  due  reference  in  the  text,  at  its  appropriate  place 
The  '^rses  originally  appeared  in  the  Billiard  Cm. 

ATTITUDE  IS  EVERYTHING.'^ 

In  very  slight  things  a man's  idiosyncracy 
Slyly  peeps  out,  and  we  havn’t  a doubt 
That  many  a man  whom  his  neighbors  may  thinis  crazy, 

Only  displays  in  more  notable  ways 
Some  peculiar  distinguishing  characteristic, 

Which,  were  it  at  all  like  our  own,  we  should  praise. 

But  severely  condemn  when  'tis  antagonistic. 

These  distinguishing  traits  are  most  forcibly  shown 
In  a game,  which  of  late,  has  most  popular  grown ; 

A very  correct  psychological  steelyards 
For  character  weighing — of  course,  we  mean  billiards 
E'en  attitude,  sometimes,  may  give  us  a cue 
To  a man's  inner  life  ; so,  dear  reader,  if  you 
Havn't  any  objections,  we'll  hazard  a few 
Illustrations,  by  which  we'll  endeavor  to  prove 
The  truth  of  the  statements  we've  ventured  above 


The  first  we  select  from  th'  incongruous  mass, 
Is  a strongly  marked  type  of  a numerous  class ; 


254 


Appendix. 


The  young  man,  who,  his  exquisite  elegance  shows 
By  the  studious  grace  of  his  delicate  pose, 

And  who  handles  his  cue  with  so  dainty  an  air, 

That  you’re  forced  to  agree  with  his  friends,  who  declare 
His  games  very  pretty  to  look  at,”  although 
In  the  matter  of  counting,  ’tis  only  so  so. 

As  a contrast,  we  next  your  attention  will  claim 
For  the  athletic  player,  whose  vigorous  frame 


Makes  him  play  what  is  commonly  called  a “ strong  game 
Who  always  declares  that  “there’s  six  on  the  balls 
Sends  them  all  round  the  table  ’till  one  of  them  falls 
Into  one  of  the  pockets — he  doesn’t  much  care 
Into  which  ; for,  as  every  one’s  fully  aware, 

In  love,  war,  and  billiards,  all  chances  are  fair ; 

And  as  to  his  caroms,  you  safely  may  swear 
If  there’s  one  on  the  table,  he’s  sure  to  be  “ there 
For  his  ball  goes  so  fast,  that,  unless  it  should  drop 
In  a pocket,  it’s  very  safe  never  to  stop 
Until  one  of  the  others,  (fulfilling  the  laws 
Of  physics,  which  show  each  phenomenon’s  cause,) 

By  assuming  its  motion,  compels  it  to  pause. 

The  third  we  advance  to  the  threshold  of  fame 
Is  the  young  man,  que  void,  who  “plays  his  own  game 
Who  displays  at  his  scratches  no  kind  of  remorse. 

And  eternally  tries  some  impossible  force, 

Which  results  in  a jump  and  a follow  combined ; 

While  his  cue,  at  a “ forty-five”  angle  inclined, 


Appendix. 


255 


As  if  conscious  of  sad  disgrace,  seems  nothing  loth 
To  hide  half  its  length  through  a hole  in  the  cloth. 


Turn  we  next  to  the  youth  whose  deliberate  game 
Is  displayed  in  the  pause  that  he  makes  ere  his  aim 


Is  finally  taken : — His  cue  raised  in  air, 

He  scans  ev’ry  angle  and  cushion  with  care ; 

Studies  all  of  his  shots  in  their  smallest  details, 

Then,  preceding  to  execute, — commonly  fails  I 

We  pass  to  a player  who’s  quite  the  reverse 
Of  the  last,  and,  if  such  a thing’s  possible,  worse : 
We  allude  to  him,  who — after  striking  his  ball. 

Finds  it  requisite  over  the  the  table  to  sprawl ; 

And  makes  with  his  cue  little  comets  of  chalk 
On  the  cloth  as  he  follows  his  shot ; — Then  he’ll  walk 


256 


Appendix. 


Up  to  some  of  his  friends,  and,  extending  his  hand, 
Proclaims  loudly  that  Really,  he  can’t  understand 


How  so  simple  a carom  he  failed  to  do  right, 

For  he  saw  Phelan  make  the  shot,  only  last  night  1’^ 

Then,  again,  there’s  the  man,  from  whom  Heaven  preserve  us, 
Whose  careful  aim  makes  his  antagonist  nervous : 


Who  saws  with  his  cue,  until  really  you  wonder 
He  don’t  saw  his  thumb  and  fore*finger  asunder  ; 

If  you  watch  him,  you’ll  find,  ere  it  comes  to  your  chance, 
You’re  performing  a sort  of  St.  Vitus’s  dance. 

There’s  the  player,  too,  who,  when  he  misses  a count, 

Of  profanity  utters  a startling  amount : 

His  toe  cocked  in  air  with  an  exquisite  grace, 

And  the  greatest  anxiety  marked  on  his  face, 


Appendix. 


257 


He  looks  half  way  between  a young  man  about  town,'^ 
And  George  Christy  about  to  commence  a break-down  ; 


And  he  swears — how  he  swears ! — when  to  count  he^s  not  able  - 
At  leather,  chalk,  cue,  cushions,  cloth,  balls,  and  table ; 

And  if  his  opponent  should  happen  to  scratch  it,^^ 

Perhaps  he’s  not  morally  certain  to  “ catch  it.” 

Who’s  this?  who  distorts  all  his  human  proportions 
By  the  wildest  of  wild  calisthenic  contortions  ? 

Is’t  a maniac  ? No,  gentle  reader,  not  so : 

’Tis  the  man  who  points  out  where  his  ball  ought  to  go. 


By  twisting  his  head,  arms,  and  body  about ; 

And  who  startles  your  ears  with  a lunatic  shout 
As  he  screams  at  the  balls,  to  “ go  in”  or  “ keep  out 


258 


Appendix. 


When  one  of  his  efforts  successfully  ends,  he 
Howls,  dances,  and  raves  in  a regular  frenzy. 

But  if  his  attempts  chance  to  finish  in  failure, 

Groans,  dismal  as  dirges,  and  deep  growls  assail  your 
Auricular  organs,  as,  sunk  in  despair. 

He  writhes  himself  into  the  nearest  arm-chair. 

And  now,  reader  dear,  if  you’ll  lend  us  your  ear, 

We’ll  tell  you,  in  confidence,  how  to  keep  clear 
Of  all  of  the  errors  we’ve  held  up  to  view, 

And,  without  absurd  habits,  to  manage  your  cue. 

If  you  think  it  worth  while 
To  play  billiards  in  style, 

And  make  running‘s  that’s  only  surpassed  by  the  Croton, 

As  Cuttle  would  say, 

In  his  forcible  way, 

•‘Overhaul  Phelan’s  book,  and  when  found,  make  a note  onl’^ 


Appendix. 


259 


The  following  little  jeu  esprit  from  the  pen  of  a distinguished  dramatist  and 
cctor,  which  originally  appeared  in  the  Billiard  Cue,  we  feel  tempted  to  reproduce 
here — assured  that  its  ingenuity  cannot  fail  to  amuse  the  reader. 


HAKSPEARE  A BILLIARD  PLAYER. 


We  have  stumbled  on  a most 
important  discovery  ; or  rather  a 
most  important  discovery  has  at 
length  been  made  by  our  critical 
and  protracted  investigations.  We 
have  found  beyond  controversy 
that  the  ‘‘  sweet  Swan  of  Avon’’ 
was  a most  devoted  billiard  player; 
and  that  nearly  every  term  em- 
ployed in  the  game  is  a direct  quo- 
tation from  the  writings  of  that 
immortal  bard.  In  every  play  of 
his,  there  are  allusions  to  the  game, 
and  in  every  allusion  he  proves 
himself  its  master  ; not  one  of  its 


intricacies  has  escaped  his  all-seeing  eye.  Let  us  to  billiards, he 
exclaims,  in  Antony  and  Cleopatra,  (Act  II.,  scene  5.)  My  cue  is 
villainous,”  he  complains  in  King  Lear,  (Act  I.  scene  1.)  “Why 
these  balls  hound, or  “jump,”  he  indignantly  cries  in  All’s  Well 
that  Ends  Well,  (Act  II.  scene  3.)  “I  did  present  him  with  those 
Paris  balls, he  announces  in  Henry  the  Fifth,  (Act  1.  scene  2.) 
thereby  proving  that  French  balls  and  cues  were  then  thought  better 
than  English.  “When  my  cue  comes,  call  me,”  he  orders  in  the  Mid- 
summer Night’s  Dream,  (Act  IV.  scene  1.)  from  which  we  may  judge 
that  he  had  sent  it  to  whoever  was  then  the  “ King  of  the  Billiard 
Leatherers”  for  a new  top.  “Every  one  according  to  his  ewe,”  he 
adds  in  the  same  play,  (Act  III.  scene  1.)  meaning,  doubtless,  that  a 
man  should  proportion  his  “ strength”  to  the  weight  of  the  cue  with 
which  he  plays.  “Remember  you  your  ewe.?”  he  inquires  .in  the 
Merry  Wives  of  Windsor,  (Act  III.  scene  3.)  thereby  insinuating  that 


12 


2G0 


Appendix, 


every  fiist-class  player  should  have  a private  or  peculiar  cue,  the 
weight  and  force  of  which  he  might  remember.  Speaking  of  the 
old  style  of  cushions,  he  denounces  them  in  Coriolanus,  (Act  V.  scene 
3.)  as  cushions  no  softer  than  the  flint, and  then  turning  prophet- 
ically towards  Michael  Phelan,  he  begs  in  his  most  solemn  manner, 
(same  play,  Act.  III.  scene  1.)  ^^Let  them  have  cushions  by  you 
He  is  familiar  with  such  terms  as  ^‘hazard,’’  ‘‘lead,’’  “scratch,” 
“ light  spot,”  “ Billiard  sharp,”  and  so  forth  ; in  fact,  we  may  say 
with  truth  that  he  is  “fully  posted.”  “Take  your  hazard  back 
again,”  he  says  to  some  brother  player  in  the  Merchant  of  Venice, 
(Act  I.  scene  1.)  “Your  hazard  shall  be  made,”  he  again  exclaims 
in  the  same  play,  (Act  11.  scene  1.)  as  if  to  encourage  a hesitating 
partner.  “Nor  hazard  aught  for  lead,'^  he  continues  in  the  7th 
scene  of  the  same  act — showing  clearly  enough,  (what  indeed  we 
would  expect  from  his  wisdom,)  that  he  did  not  consider  the  mere 
“ lead,”  per  se,  worth  “ stringing”  for.  That  he  was  partial  to 
“ hazards,”  we  may  infer  from  what  he  says  in  King  John,  (Act  V. 
scene  6.)  “ I will  upon  all  hazards  well  believe;”  and  we  account 

for  the  preference  when  we  remember  that,  as  “ cushions”  had  not 
then  been  much  improved — being  in  fact  “ no  softer  than  flint,”  as  he 
himself  says — the  more  delicate  beauties  of  “ the  carom  game”  could 
not  possibly  have  been  known  to  him.  In  Timon  of  Athens,  (Act  V. 
scene  5.)  there  occurs  a word  which  we  believe  our  readers  will 
agree  with  us  in  regarding  as  ^ printer’s  error,  (and  it  is  confessed 
that  there  are  thousands  of  such,  even  in  the  most  careful  editions  of 
Knight  and  Collier.)  It  ought  to  read,  “and  by  the  hazard  of  the 
spotted  hall;^^  but  for  “ball”  the  word  “die”  has  been  falsely  inter- 
polated in  a majority  of  the  editions.  “I  understand  kisses, Shaks- 
peare  proudly  asserts  in  the  first  part  of  Henry  the  Fourth,  (Act  III. 
scene  2.)  and  that  he  knew  the  French  Doublet  or  Cross-game  is  evin- 
ced by  the  phrase  “the  last  of  many  doubled  kisses, which  we  find 
in  Antony  and  Cleopatra,  (Act  I.  scene  5.)  When  some  disappointed 
player  cries  “ ay,  ay,  a scratch,  a scratch, perhaps  he  is  not  aware 
that  he  is  quoting  Romeo  and  Juliet,  (Act  HI.  scene  1.)  or  should  he 
vary  the  phrase,  by  saying,  “ that  is  but  scratched,^^  he  may  possibly 
not  know  that  these  words  are  taken  from  Hamlet,  (Act  IV.  scene  7.) 
“ You  cannot  see  the  white  spot,"^^  is  a phrase  in  common  use,  but 
trace  it  back,  and  j^ou  will  find  it  in  the  Merry  Wives  of  Windsor, 
(Act  IV.  scene  5.)  When  the  balls  run  along  the  cushion,  we  often 


Appendix. 


261 


say,  ‘‘when  they  do  and  going  back  to  Titus  Andronicus,  we 

Gnd  the  same  description  in  Act  III.  scene  1.  “ Would  thou  wouldst 
hurst, yells  Timon  of  Athens,  (Act  IV.  scene  2.)  and  Timon,  we 
know,  was  a “flat”  who  had  probably  got  “cleaned  out”  by  some 
“ sharp”  at  “ pool ;”  and  this  conjecture  is  strengthened  by  the  con- 
fession in  the  Tempest,  (Act  lY.  scene  1.)  “but  to  lose  our  bottles  in 
the  from  which  we  may  reasonably  infer  that  the  party  had 

been  playing  for  champagne.  That  they  had  been  playing  for  some- 
thing, we  have  proof  in  the  same  play,  (Act  1.  scene  2.)  where  the 
poet  says,  “ I pray  thee  warA:,”  indicating  that  the  marker  was  par- 
ticularly requested  to  attend  to  his  duties,  as  the  “ bottles”  were 
depending  on  the  issue.  “ I have  hanked, he  says  in  King  John, 
(Act  V.  scene  2.)  and  in  King  Lear,  (Act  V.  scene  3.)  he  makes  use 
of  another  term  only  appropriate  to  “ pool,”  where  he  cries,  “ It  is 
mj  privilege. In  Romeo  and  Juliet,  (Act  III.  scene  5.)  he  desig- 
nates Billiard-Sharps  as  “unpleasing  sharps, and  in  Henry  YIII., 
(Act  I.  scene  3.)  he  speaks  of  “ honorable  points,”  as  if  in  contra- 
distinction to  the  “points”  made  by  them.  The  cushions,  as  we  have 
hinted,  were  poor,  and  not  reliable  in  his  time  ; and  thus  we  see  that 
in  Winter^s  Tale,  (Act  lY.  scene  1.)  he  confesses,  “ I fear  the  angle'*'* 
— meaning  doubtless,  the  incorrectness  of  the  angle  of  reflection  on 
the  board.  How  triumphantly  does  he  shout  in  Julius  Caesar,  (Act 
lY.  scene  3.)  “ I put  it  in  the  pocket ;”  and  if  the  foregoing  extracts 
are  not  enough  to  convince  the  most  incredulous  that  Shakspeare 
was  a billiard  player,  and  played  a pretty  strong  game  in  his  time, 
then  we  can  only  promise  that  another  sheaf  of  extracts  and  quota- 
tions shall  be  given  in  our  succeeding  issue. 

Yive  la  bagatelle  I which,  in  English,  means  three  cheers  for  Bil- 
liards I 


BILLIARDS  IN  THE  HOME  CIRCLE, 


A8  A DIXI^TG  TxVBLE. 


AS  A BILLIARD  TABLE. 


THE  HAND-BOOK  OF  BILLIARDS. 


263 


The  foregoing  engravings  illustrate  an  ingenious 
piece  of  mechanism  recently  introduced  to  the  public, 
and  known  as  the  Combined  Dining  and  Billiard 
Table.’’ 

In  it  the  useful  is  combined  with  the  agreeable  or 
entertaining.  It  is  intended  solely  for  the  use  of 
families,  and  may  be  made  available  either  as  a 
dining  table,  a library  table,  or  a billiard  table. 

It  will  be  found  admirably  adapted  for  dwellings 
and  offices  in  which  there  is  not  space  for  a full-sized 
or  regular  billiard  table. 

To  those,  and  their  name  is  legion,  who  would  have 
billiard  rooms  in  their  dwellings,  could  they  spare  the 
space  which  the  ordinary  billiard  table  requires,  the 
Combined  Dining  and  Billiard  Table  is  recommended. 
Many  who  heretofore  have  been  denied  the  pleasure 
can  now  play  billiards. 

Without  taking  up  more  space  than  the  ordinary 
dining  table,  it  may  be  used  as  a dining  table,  a 
library  table,  or  a billiard  table. 

Either  as  a dining  or  billiard  table,  it  is  equally 
adapted  to  males  and  females,  children  and  adults. 
One  of  its  chief  merits  is  the  simplicity  of  its  parts, 
which  is  a guaranty,  that,  with  ordinary  care,  it  will  re- 
main for  years  in  perfect  working  order.  In  the  short 
space  of  two  minutes,  a child  can  convert  it  froni  a din- 
ing table  into  a billiard  table,  or  vice  versa,  it  being  re- 
quisite only  in  the  one  case  to  remove  the  wooden 
slabs  which  comprise  the  covering,  and  in  the  other  to 
adjust  them;  and,  in  addition,  to  elevate  or  depress 
the  bed  of  -the  table.  This  is. done  through  the 


264 


THE  HAND-BOOK  OF  BILLIARDS. 


agency  of  a single  horizontal  shaft,  which  is  moved  hy 
a crank,  and  with  little  effort. 

Any  inequality  in  the  floor  upon  which  the  table 
rests  can  be  offset  by  a leveling  apparatus  in  the  legs. 
It  may,  therefore,  be  used  in  any  part  of  the  house, 
without  in  the  least  impairing  its  effectiveness.  By 
turning  the  crank,  the  table  can  be  fixed  at  any  de- 
sirable height  in  termediate  its  maximum  and  minimum, 
so  as  to  conform  to  the  stature  of  those  who  wish  to 
make  use  of  it.  The  table  when  lowered  is  converted 
into  a dining  table  by  a covering  of  leaves  such  as  are 
used  on  extension  tables. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed,  r 


iirpHUMFS”  AMERICAN  HOYLE;  or,  Gentleman’s 

Hand-Book  of  Games.  Containing  clear  and  complete  descriptions  of  all  tlie 
Games  played  in  the  United  States,  with  the  American  Rules  for  playing  them  ; in- 
cluding Whist,  Euchre,  Eezique,  Cribbage,  All-Fours,  Loo,  Poker,  Brag,  Piquet, 
Ecartc,  Boston,  Cassino,  Chess,  Checkers,  Backgammon,  Dominoes,  Billiards,  and  a 
hundred  other  Games.  This  work  is  designed  to  be  an  American  authority  in  all 
games  of  skill  and  chance,  and  will  settle  any  disputed  point.  It  has  been  prepared 
with  great  care  by  the  editor,  with  the  assistance  of  a number  of  gentleman  players 
of  skill  and  ability,  and  is  not  a re-hash  of  English  Games,  but  a live  American  book, 
expressly  prepared  for  American  readers.  The  Ameeican  Hoyle  contains  525  pages, 
is  printed  on  fine  white  paper,  bound  in  cloth,  with  beveled  boards,  and  is  profusely 
illustrated  with  engravings  explaining  the  different  Games.  Price ^53  00 

A MERICAN  CARD-PLAYER-  Containing  clear  and 

comprehensive  directions  for  playing  the  Games  of  Euchre,  Whist,  Bezique, 
All-Fours,  French  Fours,  Cribbage,  Cassino,  Straight  and  Draw  Poker,  Whisky  Po- 
ker and  Commercial  Pitch,  together  with  all  the  laws  of  those  games.  This  work  is 
abridg»d  from  “ The  American  Hoyle,”  our  larger  Book  of  Games.  150  pages,  bound 


in  boards,  with  cloth  back,  price 50  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side 75  cts. 


^HE  GAME  or  DRAUGHTS,  or  Checkers,  Simplified 

and  Explained.  With  practical  Diagrams  and  Illustrations,  together  with  a 
Checker-Board,  numbered  and  printed  in  red.  Containing  the  Eighteen  Standard 
Games,  with  over  200  of  the  best  variations,  selected  from  the  various  authors,  to- 
gether 'with  many  original  ones  never  before  published.  By  D.  Scatteegood. 
Bound  in  cloth,  with  flexible  cover,  price 50  cts. 

rfHE  ILLUSTRATED  HAND-BOOK  of  Billiards. 

By  Michael  Phelan  and  Claudius  Berger.  Containing  a complete  treatise  of 
the  Game  of  Billiards,  with  a description  of  all  the  different  shots,  how  to  bring  the 
balls  together,  kc.  To  which  is  added,  the  Rules  of  the  American,  or  Four  Ball 
Game,  the  English  Game,  and  the  French,  or  Three  Ball  Game.  Also  containing  the 
Rules  for  all  the  different  Games  of  Pool.  Hlustrated  copiously  with  engravings. 
Price 35  cts. 

pARLOR  TRICKS  WITH  CARDS.  Containing  Ex- 

planations  of  all  the  Tricks  and  Deceptions  -with  Playing  Cards  ever  invented, 
embracing  Tricks  with  Cards  performed  by  Sleight-of-Hand  ; by  the  aid  of  Memory, 
Mental  Calculation  and  Arrangement  of  the  Cards  ; by  the  aid  of  Confederacy,  and 
Tricks  performed  by  the  aid  of  Prepared  Cards.  The  whole  illustrated  and  made 
plain  and  easy,  with  70  engra'vnngs.  This  book  is  an  abridgment  of  our  large  work. 


entitled  ” The  Secret  Out.”  Paper  covers,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts. 


^IIE  BOOK  or  FIRESIDE  GAMES.  Abridged  from 

“The  Sociable.”  Containing  an  explanation  of  the  most  entertaining  Games 
suited  to  the  Family  Circle  as  a Recreation,  such  as  Games  of  Action,  Games  which 
merely  require  attention.  Games  which  require  memory.  Catch  Games,  which  have 
for  their  object  Tricks  or  Mystification,  Games  in  which  an  opportunity  is  afforded 
to  display  gallantry,  wit,  or  some  slight  knowledge  of  certain  Sciences,  Amusing 
Forfeits,  Fireside  Games  for  Winter  Evening  Amusement,  etc.  Paper  covers. 


price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  vfith  cloth  back 50  cts. 


"pARLOR  THEATRICALS  ; or,  Winter  Evenings’  En- 

tertainment.  Abridged  from  “The  Sociable.”  Containing  Acting  Proverbs. 
Dramatic  Charades,  Drawing-room  Pantomimes,  Musical  Burlesques,  &c.  ; with  In- 
structions for  Amateurs  ; how  to  construct  a Stage  and  Curtain  ; how  to  get  up  Cos- 
tumes and  Properties,  on  the  “ Making  up  ” of  Characters,  Exits  and  Entrances,  kc» 


Illustrated  with  cngra'rtngs.  Paper  covers,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back. 50  cts. 


|»ena  CasU  Orders  to  DICK  ^ FITZGKRADD,  New  York* 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 

]|f  AHACHE’S  MANUAL  OF  CHESS.  Oontainbg  a do- 

scription  of  t!ie  Board  and  t!ie  Pieces,  Chess  Notation,  Technical  Terms  with 
diagrams  illustrating  them,  Belativo  Value  of  the  Pieces,  Laws  of  the  Game,  General 
Observations  on  the  Pieces,  Preliminary  Games  for  Beginners,  Fifty  Openings  of 
Games,  giving  all  the  latest  discoveries  of  Modern  Masters,  with  best  games  and 
copious  notes.  Twenty  Endings  of  Games,  showing  easiest  ways  of  effecting  Check- 
mate. Thirty-six  ingenious  Diagram  Problems,  and  Sixteen  curious  Chess  Strata- 
gems. To  which  is  added  a Treatise  on  the  Games  of  Backgammon,  Bussian  Back- 
gammon and  Dominoes,  the  whole  being  one  of  the  best  Books  for  Beginners  ever 
published.  By  N.  Mabache,  Chess  Editor  of  “ Wilkes’  Spirit  of  the  Times.”  Bound 

in  boards,  cloth  back,  price 50  cts. 

Cloth,  gilt  side 75  cts, 

CFAYTH’S  AMEEICAN  BHAUGHT  PLAYER ; or, 

^ The  Theory  and  Practice  of  the  Scientific  Game  of  Checkers.  Simplified  and  il- 
lustrated with  practical  diagrams  ; containing  upwards  of  1,700  Games  and  Positions. 
By  IIenby  Spayth.  Third  edition,  wnth  over  two  hundred  corrections  and  improve- 
ments, containing  : The  Standard  Laws  of  the  Game,  Full  Instructions,  Draught 
Board  numbered.  Names  of  the  Games  and  how  formed.  The  “ Theory  of  the  Move 
and  its  Changes  ” practically  explained  and  illustrated  with  Diagrams,  Playing  Ta- 
bles for  Draught  Clubs,  New  Systems  of  Numbering  the  Board,  Prefixing  Signs  to 
the  Variations,  etc.  Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side  and  back,  price $3  00 

ePAYTH’S  GAME  OF  DRAUGHTS.  Oontainiag  up- 

^wards  of  Five  Hundred  Games  and  Positions,  full  Instructions,  the  Move  and  its 
Changes,  Laws  of  the  Game,  etc.  By  Henby  Spayth,  author  of  “The  American 
Draught  Player.”  This  book  is  entirely  new,  and  although  it  is  designed  as  an  ad- 
dition or  supplement  to  the  author’s  first  work,  “ The  American  Draught  Player,” 
it  is  complete  in  itself.  It  contains  lucid  Instructions  for  Beginners,  Laws  of  the 
Game,  Diagrams,  the  Score  of  3G1  games,  together  with  about  150  novel,  instructive, 
and  ingenious  “ critical  positions.”  Cloth,  gilt  back  and  side,  price $1  50 

ePAYTII’S  DRAUGHTS  or  Checkers  for  Be-iniiers. 

^ Being  a comprehensive  Guide  for  those  who  desire  to  learn  the  Game.  This 
treatise  was  written  by  Henky  Spayth,  the  celebrated  player,  and  is  by  far  the  most 
complete  and  instructive  elementary  work  on  Draughts  ever  published.  It  is  pro- 
fusely illustrated  with  diagrams  of  ingenious' stratagems,  curious  positions  and  per- 
plexing problems,  and  contains  a great  variety  of  interesting  and  instructive  Games, 
progressively  arranged  and  clearly  explained  with  notes  so  that  the  learner  may 
easily  comprehend  them.  V»hth  the  aid  of  this  valuable  Manual,  a beginner  may 
soon  master  the  theory  of  Checkers,  and  will  only  require  a little  practice  to  become 
proficient  in  the  Game.  Cloth,  gilt  side,  price 75  cts. 

^HE  GAME  OF  BILLIARDS.  By  Michael  Phelan. 

Eighth  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  Embellished  with  a Steel  Portrait  of  the 
Author  and  filty-one  Engravings  and  Diagrams.  *This  is  a complete  book,  and  ex- 
hausts all  that  can  be  said  about  Billiards.  It  contains  the  revised  Laws  of  all  the 
Games,  with  clear  directions  how  to  make  every  variety  of  Shot,  etc.  12mo.,  cloth, 
price ;... Cl  50 

WALKER’S  CRIBBAGE  MADE  EASY.  Being  a 

* * new  and  complete  Treatise  on  the  Game  in  all  varieties  ; including  the  whole 
of  Anthony  Pasquin’s  scientific  work  on  Five-Card  Cribbage.  By  Geoege  Walkeh, 
Esq.  This  is  a very  comprehensive  work  on  this  Game,  being  the  most  complete 
ever  written.  It  contains  over  500  examples  of  liow  to  discard,  for  your  own  and 
your  adversary’s  crib.  Small  octavo,  142  pages,  bound  in  boards,  with  muslin  back, 

pMce 75  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side 01  00 

The  game  of  whist  ; Ilulea,  Directions  and  Maxims 

to  be  Observed  in  playing  it.  Containing,  also.  Primary  Buies  for  Beginners, 
Explanations  and  Directions  for  Old  Players,  and  the  Laws  of  the  Game.  Compiled 
from  Hoylo  and  Matthews.  With  an  explanation  of  Marked  Cards,  etc 13  cts. 


Scud  Casii  Oraers  to  I>ICI£  & FETZGERAIii>,  Now  Yorlt, 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postag^e  at  the  Prices  annexed. 


THE  TWELTE  DECISIVE  BATTLES  OF  THE 

WAR.  A History  of  the  Eastern  and  Western  Campaigns,  in  relation  to  the 
actions  that  decided  their  issue.  By  William  Swinton,  author  of  “ The  Campaigns 
of  the  Army  of  the  Potomac.”  Illustrated  by  seven  steel  engravings  of  Generals 
Grant,  Sherman,  Sheridan,  McClellan,  Meade,  Eosecrans  and  Thomas  ; with  nine 
beautiful  maps  of  battle.  520  pages,  octavo.  Bound  in  extra  cloth,  beveled 

edge,  price 50 

Half  calf,  marbled  edge $GGO 


THE  MODERN  POCKET’  HOYLE.  Containing  all  the 

Games  of  Skill  and  Chance  as  played  in  this  country  at  the  present  time,  being 
“ an  authority  on  all  disputed  points.”  By  “Thumps.”  This  valuable  manual  is 
all  original,  or  thoroughly  revised  from  the  best  and  latest  authorities,  and  includes 
the  laws  and  complete  directions  for  inlaying  one  hundred  and  eleven  different 
Games,  comprising  Card  Games,  Chess,  Checkers,  Dominoes,  Backgammon,  Dice. 


Billiards,  and  all  the  Field  Games.  18mo.,  388  pp.  Paper  cover,  price 50  cf  s. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 75  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side  and  back ^1555 


FROST’S  ORIGINAL  LETTER-WRITER.  A com- 

plete  collection  of  Original  Letters  and  Notes,  upon  every  imaginable  subject 
of  Every-Day  Life,  with  plain.directions  about  everything  connected  with  writing  a 
Letter.  Containing  Letters  of  Introduction,  Letters  on  Business,  Letters  answering 
Advertisements,  Letters  of  Recommendation,  Applications  for  Employment,  Letters 
of  Congratulation,  of  Condolence,  of  Friendship  and  Relationship,  Love-Letters, 
Notes  of  Invitation,  Notes  accompanying  Gifts,  Letters  of  Favor,  of  Advice,  and 
Letters  of  Excuse,  together  v/ith  an  appropriate  answer  to  each.  The  v/hole  embrac- 
ing three  hundred  letters  and  notes.  By  S.  A.  FPvOST,  author  of  “ The  Parlor  Stage,” 
“ Dialogues  for  Young  Folks,”  etc.  To  which  is  added  a comprehensive  Table  of 
Synonyms  alone  worth  double  the  price  asked  for  the  book.  Bound  in  boards,  cloth 
back,  with  illuminated  sides,  price 50  cts. 

WORTH’S  BOOK  OF  LOVE-LETTERS.  With  directions 

how  to  write  them  and  when  to  use  them,  and  120  specimen  Letters,  suitable 
for  Lovers  of  any  age  and  condition,  and  under  all  circumstances,  interspersed  with 
the  author’s  comments  thereon.  The  whole  forming  a convenient  Hand-book  of 
valuable  information  and  counsel  for  the  use  of  those  who  need  friendly  guidance 
and  advice  in  matters  of  Love,  Courtshix>  and  Marriage.  By  Ingoldsby  North. 


Bound  in  cloth,  price 75  cts. 

Bound  iA  boards 50  cts 


ffOW  GAMBLERS  WIN;  or,  The  Secrets  of  Advantage 

Playing  Exposed.  Being  a complete  and  scientifle  expose  of  the  manner  of 
playing  ail  tne  various  advantages  in  the  Games  of  Poker,  All-Fours,  Euchre, 
Vingtun,  'Whist,  Cribbage,  etc.,  as  practiced  by  professional  gamblers  on  the  un- 
initiated, together  with  a brief  analysis  of  legitimate  play.  By  a Retired  Profession- 
al. This  little  work  is  designed  as  a warning  to  the  unwary,  and  a caution  to  self- 


confident  card-players.  16mo.,  paper  cover,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts. 


THE  FINGER  POST  TO  PUBLIC  BUSINESS. 

Containing  the  mode  of  forming  and  conducting  Societies,  Clubs  and  other 
Organized  Associations  ; full  Rules  of  Order  for  the  government  of  their  debates 
and  business  ; complete  directions  how  to  compose  Resolutions,  Reports  and 
Petitions ; and  the  manner  of  managing  Conventions,  Pubhc  Meetings,  Celebrations, 
Dinners,  Barbecues  and  Picnics ; Models  of  Constitutions  for  Lyceums,  Institutes 
and  other  Societies.  With  rules  of  Cricket,  Base  Ball,  Shinny,  Quoits,  Yachting 
and  Rowing,  and  Instructions  concerning  Incorporations,  Rules  for  Debating  and 
the  Composition  and  Delivery  of  Public  Addresses,  together  'with  other  valuable 
matter.  By  an  Ex-Member  of  the  Philadelphia  Bar.  12mo.,  cloth,  price....  50 

■PSOST’S  BOOK  OF  TABLEAUX.  Containing  one 

hundred  and  sixty  Tableaux  Vivants,  with  directions  for  arranging  the  stage, 
costuming  the  characters,  and  forming  appropriate  groups.  By  S.  Annie  I'rost. 
Author  of  “ The  Parlor  Stage,”  “ Amateur  Theatricals,”  etc.  To  those  who  desire 
to  get  up  an  evening’s  entertainment,  tins  book  v/ill  prove  an  invaluable  assistant. 


Paper  covers,  price 30  t is . 

Bound  in  boarus,  cloth  back 50  cts. 


Send  Caslt  Orders  to  J>1C1£  66  FITZGXIRAJLD,  New  Yorlti 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postag’e  at  tlie  Prices  annexed. 

SPENCER’S  BOOK  OF  COMIC  SPEECHES  AND 

^ HUMOROUS  RECITATIONS.  A collection  of  Comic  Speeches  and  Dialogues, 
Humorous  Prose  and  Poetical  Recitations,  Laughable  Dramatic  Scenes  and  Bur- 
lesques, and  Eccentric  Characteristics,  Soliloquies  and  Stories.  Suitable  for  School 
Exhibitions  and  Evening  Entertainments.  Edited  by  Albert  J.  Spencer.  This  is 
the  best  book  of  Comic  Recitations  that  has  ever  been  published,  and  will  command 
a large  sale  on  account  of  its  real  merit.  It  is  crammed  lull  of  Comic  Poetry.  Langh- 
able  Lectures,  Irish  and  Dutch  Stories,  Yankee  Yarns,  Negro  Burlesques,  Short 
Dramatic  Scenes,  Humorous  Dialogues,  and  all  kinds  of  Funny  Speeches.  Paper 

cover,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  cts. 

WIBSOFS  BOOK  OF  RECITATIONS  AND  DIA- 

* • LOOUES.  With  Instructions  in  Elocution  and  Declamation.  Containing 
a choice  selection  of  Poetical  and  Prose  Recitations  and  Original  Colloquies.  De- 
signed as  a Reading-Book  for  Classes,  and  as  an  Assistant  to  Teachers  and  Students 
in  preparing  Exhibitions.  By  Floyd  B.  Wilson,  Professor  of  Elocution.  This  col- 
lection has  been  prepared  with  a special  view  to  the  development  of  the  two  cardinal 
principles  of  true  elocution — Voice  and  Action — and  include  a large  proportion  of 
Recitations  and  Dialogues  which  appear  for  the  first  time  in  this  form.  The  Col- 
loquies are  entirely  original.  IGmo.,  188  pp.,  paper  cover,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  cts. 

AMATEUR  THEATRICALS,  and  Fairy-Tale  Dramas. 

A collection  of  original  Plays,  expressly  designed  for  drawing-room  perform- 
ances. By  Miss  S.  A.  Frost.  This  is  designed  to  meet  a want  v/hich  has  long  been 
felt,  of  short  and  amusing  pieces  suitable  to  the  limited  stage  of  the  private  parlor. 
The  old  friends  of  fairy  land  will  be  recognized  among  the  Fairy-Tale  Dramas,  newly 

clothed  and  arranged.  16mo.,  180  pp.,  paper  cover,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back. 50  cts. 

BARTON’S  COMIC  RECITATIONS  AND  HUMOR- 

OUS  DIALOGUES.  Containing  a variety  of  Comic  Recitations  in  Prose 
and  Poetry,  Amusing  Dialogues,  Burlesque  Scenes,  Eccentric  Orations,  Stump 
Speeches,  Humorous  Interludes  and  Laughable  Farces.  Designed  for  School  Com- 
mencments  and  Amateur  Theatricals.  Edited  by  Jerome  Barton.  This  is  the 
best  colleection  of  Humorous  Pieces,  especially  adapted  to  the  Parlor  Stage,  that 

has  ever  been  published.  16mo.,  180  pp.,  paper  cover,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts. 


TIRUDDER  BONES’  BOOK  OF  STUMP  SPEECHES 

AND  BURLESQUE  ORATIONS.  Also,  containing  Humorous  Lectures, 
Ethiopian  Dialogues,  Plantation  Scenes,  Negro  Farces  and  Burlesques,  Laughable 
Interludes  and  Comic  Recitations,  interspersed  with  Dutch,  Irish,  French,  and 
Yankee  Stories.  Compiled  and  Edited  by  John  F.  Scott.  This  book  contains  some 
of  the  best  hits  of  the  leading  negro  delineators  of  the  present  time,  as  well  as 
mirth-provoking  jokes  and  repartees  of  the  most  celebrated  End-Men  of  the  day, 
and  specially  designed  for  the  introdution  of  fun  in  an  evening’s  entertainment. 

16mo.,  188  pp.,  paper  cover,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  iRuminated 50  cts. 

PROST’S  DIALOGUES  FOR  YOUNG  FOLKS.  A 

collection  of  Original  Moral  and  Humorous  Dialogues.  Adapted  to  the  use 
of  School  and  Church  Exhibitions,  Family  Gatherings  and  Juvenile  Celebrations  on 
all  occasions.  By  S.  A.  Frost,  author  of  Frost’s  Original  Letter- Writer,”  etc. 
This  collection  of  Dialogues  is  just  v/hat  hes  long  been  wanted — it  contains  a variety 
that  will  suit  every  taste;  some  of  the  subjects  are  humorous,  some  satirical,  hitting 
at  the  follies  of  ^dee  and  fashion,  v/hile  others  are  pathetic,  and  ail  are  entertaining. 
A few  of  the  Dialogfies  are  long  enough  to  form  a sort  of  little  drama  that  v/ill 
interest  more  advanced  scholars,  while  short  and  easy  ones  abound  for  the  use  of 
quite  young  children.  Most  of  the  Dialogues  introduce  tv/o  or  three  characters 


only,  but  some  require  a greater  number.  Paper  cover,  price GO  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back,  side  in  colors 50  cts. 


Send  Caslt  Orders  to  DICK  & FITZGERALD,  New  Yorix. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  tlie  Prices  annexed. 
"ROOK  OF  HOUSEIIOLI)  PETS.  Containing  valuable 

instructions  about  the  Diseases,  Breeding,  Training  and  Management  of  the 
Canary,  Mocking  Bird,  Parrot,  and  other  domestic  pets  ; together  with  a Compre- 
hensive Treatise  oh  the  Principle  and  Management  of  the  Salt  and  Fresh  Water 
Aquarium.  Illustrated  with  123  fine  wood  cuts.  Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back, 

price 50  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side 75  cts. 

A THLETIC  SPORTS  FOR  BOYS.  A Repository  of 

Graceful  Recreations  for  Youth,  containing  clear  and  complete  instructions 
in  Gymnastic  and  Limb  Exercises,  and  the  manly  accomplishments  of  Skating, 
Swimming,  Rowing,  Sailing,  Horsemanship,  Riding,  Driving,  Angling,  Fencing  and 
Broadsword.  The  whole  splendidly  illustrated  with  191  fine  wood-cuts  and  diagrams. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back,  price 75  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side .$1  00 

fpiIE  PLAY-ROOM  ; or,  In-Door  Gaines  for  Boys  and 

Girls.  Including  Round  Games  and  Forfeits,  Slate  and  Board  Games  ; al&o 
numerous  Table  and  Toy  Games,  together  with  a large  collection  of  Evening  Amuse- 
ments, Comprehending  Comic  Diversions,  Parlor  Magic,  Tricks  with  Cards,  Scien- 
tific Recreations  and  Puzzles.  Profusely  illustrated  with  197  fine  wood-cuts.  Bound 

in  boards,  with  cloth  back,  price 50  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side 75  cts. 

^HE  PLAY-GKOUND  ; or,  Out-Door  Games  for  Boys. 

A Book  of  Healthy  Recreations  for  Youth,  containing  over  a hundred  Amuse- 
ments, including  Games  of  Activity  and  Speed,  Games  with  Toys,  Marbles,  Tops, 
Hoops,  Kites,  Archery,  Balls  ; with  Cricket,  Croquet  and  Base-Ball.  ' Splendidly  il- 
lustrated with  124  fine  wood-cuts.  Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back,  price 50  cts. 

Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side 75  cts. 

The  above  four  books  are  abridged  from  our  larger  and  more  complete  work,  entitled,  " The 
Amei  icau  Boy’s  Book  of  Sports  and  Games.”  All  of  them  have  rich  illuminated  covers. 

rTHE  PARLOR  3IAGICIAN ; or.  One  Hundred  Tricks 

for  the  Drawing-Room.  Abridged  from  our  larger  work  on  Tricks,  entitled, 
“ The  Secret  Out."  Containing  an  extensive  and  miscellaneous  Collection  of  Con- 
juring and  Legerdemain  ; Sleights  with  Dice,  Dominoes,  Cards,  Ribbons,  Rings, 
Fruit,  Coins,  Balls,  Handkerchiefs,  etc.,  all  which  may  be  Performed  in  the  Parlor 
or  Drawing-Room,  without  the  aid  of  any  apparatus  ; also,  embracing  a choice  vari- 
ety of  Curious  Deceptions,  which  may  be  performed  with  the  aid  of  simple  appa- 
ratus ; the  whole  illustrated  and  clearly  explained,  with  121  engravings.  Paper 

covers,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in- boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts. 

TJOOK  OF  RIDDLES  and  500  Home  Amuse- 

iiieiits.  Containing  a Choice  and  Curious  Collection  of  Riddles,  Charades, 
Enigmas,  Rebuses,  Anagrams,  Transpositions,  Conundrums,  Amusing  Puzzles," 
Queer  Sleights,  Recreations  in  Arithmetic,  Fireside  Games,  and  Natural  Magic,  em- 
bracing Entertaining  Amusements  in  Magnetism,  Chemistry,  Second  Sight,  and 
Simple  Recreations  in  Science,  for  Family  and  Social  Pastime,  iUustrated  with  sixty 

engravings.  Paper  covers,  price .30  ets. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts. 

HTHE  BOOK  OF  500  CURIOUS  PUZZLES.  Contain- 

ing  a large  collection  of  Entertaining  Paradoxes,  Perplexing  Deceptions  in 
Numbers,  and  Amusing  Tricks  in  Geometry.  Illustrated  with  a great  variety  of  en- 
gravings. This  book  will  have  a large  sale.  It  will  furnish  fun  and  amusement  for 

a whole  winter.  Paper  covers,  price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back .*  . 50  cts. 

"Y" ALE  COLLEGE  SCKAPES ; or,  How  the  Boys  Go  It 

atNew  Haven.  Containing  accounts  of  all  the  famous  " Scrapes  " and  " Sprees," 
of  which  students  of  old  Yale  have  been  guilty  for  the  last  quarter  of  a century. 
i'A’ice 25  cts. 


Send  CasU  Orders  to  DICK  & FITZGSRADD,  New  York, 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  tlie  Prices  annexed. 


F 


CONYESSE’S  COMPLETE  BANJO  IN- 

STllUCTOR,  VfITilOUT  A MASTER.  Containing  a choice  selection  of  Eanjo 
Solos,  Hornpipes,  Reels,  Jigs,  Walk-Arounds,  Songs  and  Banjo  Stories,  progressively 
arranged  and  plainly  explained,  enabling  the  learner  to  become  a proficient  banjoist 
without  the  aid  of  a teacher.  The  necessary  explanations  accompany  each  tune,  and 
are  placed  under  the  notes  on  each  page,  plainly  showing  the  string  required,  the 
finger  to  be  used  for  stopping  it,  the  manner  of  striking,  and  the  number  of  times 
it  must  be  sounded.  This  is  all  arranged  and  explained  in  so  clear  a manner,  and 
the  method  is  so  simple  and  easy  to  learn,  that  it  may  be  readily  comprehended  at 
a glance  by  any  person,  even  of  very  limited  uhder standing.  The  Instbuctor  is 
illustrated  with  diagrams  and  explanatory  symbols.  100  pages,  bound  in  boards, 
cloth  back,  price 50  cts. 

A ST  OF  DANCING  WITHOUT  A MASTEH ; or 

Ball  Room  Guide  and  Instructor.  To  which  is  added  Hints  on  Etiquette  ; also, 
the  Figures,  Music,  and  Necessary  Instructions  for  the  performance'  ci  the  most 
Modern  and  Improved  Dances.  By  Edwakd  Febrebo.  This  work  also  contains  105 
pages  of  the  Choicest  Musio>,  arranged  lor  the  piano-forte  by  the  most  celebrated 
professors.  The  music  alone,  if  purchased  in  separate  sheets  at  any  cf  the  music 
stores,  would  cost  ten  times  the  price  of  the  book.  Price $1  50. 

THE  LADIES’  COMPLETE  GUIDE  TO  CBOCHET, 

-®-FAN(;Y  knitting  and  KEEDMC-WORK.  Containing  an  explanalion  of  all  tAo 
technical  terms  and  characters  used  in  all  descriptions  of  Crochet  and  Fancy  Knit- 
ting Patterns — ^with  concise  directions  so  clearly  explained  that  any  one  can  learn, 
by  this  book  alone,  to  execute  the  most  difficult  kinds  of  Crochet  and  Knitting.  Al- 
so, fall  instructions  for  ail  kinds  of  fine  Needle-Work,  Edgings,  Insertions,  &c.,  &c. 
The  instructions  are  illustrated  by  engravings,  and  there  are  several  sheets  of  pat- 
terns for  Crochet,  Lace,  kc.  By  Mrs.  Ann  S.  Stephens.  Bound  in  cloth,  gilt  side, 
price $1  35. 

fpSE  B99K  OF  1,000  TALES  AND  AMUSING  AD- 

VENTURED.  Containing  over  800  engravings  and  450  pages.  This  book  is 
crammed  full  of  narratives  and  adventures  of  Travelers,  the  romantic  tiles  of  the 
Celebrated  Warriors,  Amusing  Stories  in'  Natural  History,  besides  a thousand  things 
relating  to  curious  tricks,  entertaining  sports,  pastimes  and  games.  In  this  capital 
work  we  have  onr  old  friend,  Peter  Parley,  again,  and  ho  tells  his  stories  as  well  as 
ever.  Price $1  50. 

THE  LADY’S  MANUAL  GF  FANCY  WOEK.  A 

Complete  Instructor  in  every  variety  of  Ornamental  Needle-Work,  with  a list  of 
materials  and  hints  for  their  selection  ; advice  on  making  up  and  trimming.  By 
Mrs.  PuLiiAN,  Director  of  the  Work-Table  of  Frank  Leslie’s  Magazine,  etc.  lllnstra- 
ted  with  over  300  engravings,  by  tiie  best  artists,  ^Ylth  eight  large  pattern  plates,  el- 
egantly printed  in  colors,  on  tinted  paper.  Largo  octavo,  beautifully  bound  in 
cloth,  with  gilt  side  and  back  stamp,  price $3  OJ 

Being  a true  account  of  the 

connected  with  the  History  of  Love  in  all  ages  and 
among  all  nations.  By  Lola  Montez.  These  romantic  and  surprising  anecdotes 
really  contain  all  the  most  tragic  and  comic  events  connected  with  the  history  of  the 
tender  passion  among  ail  nations  and  in  all  ages  of  the  world.  Large  12mo.,  cloth, 
price $1  50. 

TZIE  dictionary  of  LOYE.  Containing  a Defini- 
tion of  all  the  Terms  used  in  Courtshii),  with  rare  quotations  from  poets  of  all 
nations,  together  v/ith  specimens  of  curious  Model  Love  Letters,  and  many  other 
interesting  matters  appertaining  to  Love,  never  before  laublishcd.  12mo.,  cloth,  gilt 
side  and  back,  price $1  50. 

f^iJUSTSHIP  MADS  EASY ; or,  The  Art  of  Making 

^ Love  Fully  Explained.  Containing  Full  and  kUnutc  Directions  for  Conducting 
a Courtship  with  Ladies  of  every  Age  and  Position  in  Society,  and  Valuable  Infor- 
mation for"l?crso!i3  who  desire  to  enter  f.io  Married  State.  Also,  Forms  of  Love 


ANECDOTES  OF  LOVE. 

most  remarkable  events  connected 


Letters  to  be  used  on  certain  occasions.  G4  loagcs.  Price. 


.13  Ct3 


Seud  CasU  Orders  to  OICIS.  ^ FITZGERAIvD,  New  TcortK, 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 


rfllS  PEUFECT  GENTLEHAN.  A Book  of  Etiquette 

and  Eloquence.  Containin.q  information  and  instruction  for  those  who  deniro 
to  become  brilliant  or  conspicuous  in  General  Society,  or  at  Parties,  Dinners,  or  Pop- 
ular Gatherings,  &c.  It  gives  directions  hovf  to  use  wine  at  table,  with  Pules  for 
judging  the  quality  thereof.  Rules  for  Carving,  and  a complete  Etiquette  of  the 
Dinner  Table,  including  Dinner  Speeches,  Toasts  and  Sentiments,  Wit  and  Conver- 
sation at  Table,  &;c.  It  has  also  an  American  Code  of  Etiquette  and  Politeness  - for 
all  occasions.  Model  Speeches,  with  directions  how  to  deliver  them,  Duties  of  the 
Chairman  at  Public  Meetings,  Forms  of  Preambles  and  Resolutions,  &c.  In  short, 
this  book  will  give  a man  every  possible  information  he  may  desire  to  enable  him  to 
appear  to  good  advantage,  cither  in  public  or  private  life.  It  is  a handsomely  bound 
and  gilt  volume  of  335  pages.  Price $1  50 

^IIE  PARLOR  STAGE,  A Collection  of  Drawing-Room 

Proverbs,  Charades  and  Tableaux  Vivants.  By  Miss  S.  A.  Fhost.  The  author- 
ess of  this  attractive  volume  has.  performed  her  task  with  skill,  talent,  and  we  might 
say  with  genius  ; for  the  Acting  Charades  and  Proverbs  arc  really  minor  dramas  of 
a high  order  of  merit.  There  are  twenty-four  of  them  and  fourteen  tableaux,  all  of 
vrhich  are  excellent.  Any  parlor  with  folding  or  sliding  doors  is  suitable  for  their 
representation  (or,  if  there  are  no  sliding  or  folding  doors,  a temporary  curtain  wiU 
answer.)  The  dresses  are  all  those  of  modern  society,  and  the  scenery  and  proper- 
ties can  bo  easily  provided  from  the  resources  of  almost  any  family  residence  in 
town  or  country.  3G3  pages,  small  octavo,  cloth,  gilt  side  and  back,  beveled  edges. 
Price $1  50 

SOCIABLE  ; or,  One  Thousand  and  One  Home 

Amusements.  Containing  Acting  Proverbs,  Dramatic  Charades,  Acting  Cha- 
rades, or  Drawing-Room  Pantomimes,  Musical  Burlesques,  Tableaux  Vivants,  Par- 
lor Games,  Games  of  Action,  Forfeits,  Science  in  Sport  and  Parlor  Magic,  and  a 
choice  collection  of  curious  Mental  and  Mechanical  Puzzles,  kc.  Illustrated  Vvith 
numerous  engravings  and  diagrams.  The  whole  being  a fund  of  never-ending  en- 
tertainment. Nearly  400  pages,  12mo,  cloth,  gilt  side  stamp.  It  is  impossible  for 
any  company  to  exhan£;t  ail  the  sources  of  irreproachable  mirth  and  mutual  enjoy- 
ment produced  in  this  volume.  Price '. 50 

T IVE  AND  LEARN,  A Guide  for  all  those  who  wish  to 

speak  and  write  correctly  ; particularly  intended  as  a Book  of  Rcfci  once  for  the 
solution  of  diHicuitics  connected  with  Grammar,  Composition,  Punctuation,  &c., 
containing  examiiles  of  one  thousand  mistakes  of  daily  occurrence,  in  speaking, 
writing,  and  pronunciation.  So  few  loeople  speak  or  write  really  good  grammar, 
and  fewer  stiil  punctuate  decently,  that  a book  that  informs  them  how  to  do  so — 
and  not  only  that  indicates  their  faults,  but  shows  them  how  they  are  to  be  correct- 
ed— ciinnot  fail  to  be  popular  ; there  is  not  a person,  indeed,  who  might  not  learn 
something  from  it.  21u  pages,  cloth,  12mo.,  price 73  cts. 

^HE  SECRET  OUT  ; or,  1,000  Tricks  with  Cards,  and 

other  Recreations.  Illustrated  v/ith  over  300  engravings.  A book  which  ex- 
plains all  the  Tricks  and  Deceptions  with  Plajnng  Cards  ever  knovm,  and  gives,  be- 
sides, a great  many  new  ones.  The  whole  being  described  so  carefully,  with  en- 
gravings to  illnstrato  them,  that  anybody  can  easily  learn  how  to  perform  them. 
This  work  also  contains  240  of  the  best  Tricks  in  Legerdemain,  in  addition  to  the 
Card  Tricks.  12mo.,  400  pages,  bound  in  cloth,  with  gilt  side  and  back,  price  $1  50 

^'HE  AL-MA-KAN-TUR  CIRCLE  ; or.  How  to  Win  a 

Swei:;theart  or  Lover.  Containing  Facts  never  before  offered  to  the  Public. 
Being  of  the  greatest  importance  to  both  Married  and  Single  Persons  of  both 
Sexes.  By  M.  L.  Byrn,  M.  D.,  Graduate  of  the  University  of  the  City  of  New 
York.  Price ^^5  cts. 

^■’3  FSEE-MASONEY  Exposed  mid  Ex- 

plained.  Giving  a Clear  and  Correct  Yiev/  of  the  Manner  of  Conferring  the 
Different  Degrees,  as  practiced  in  all  Lodges  throughout  the  Globe.  Price.  ."^3  cts. 

■OLUNBESS  IN  BEHAYIOS  CORBECTED.  A Cou- 

cise  Code  of  Deportment  for  both  Sexes.  Price IS  cts 


CasU  Orders  to  DlCIi  ^ New  Yorls. 


Popular  Boolis  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 


TT OW  TO  MIX  DllINKS.  Containing  Recipes  for  Mix- 

in"  Amorican,  English,  French,  German,  Italian,  Spanish  and  Ilussian  Drinks 
^such  as  Juleps,  Punches,  Cobblers,  Slings,  Cocktails,  etc.  By  Jerry  Thomas,  lato 
Bar-Tender  at  the  Metropolitan  Hotel,  New  York,  and  Planters'  House,  St  Louis  ; to 
which  is  appended  a Manual  for  the  Manufacture  of  Cordials,  Liquors,  Fancy  Syr- 
ups, etc.,  containing  Recipes  after  the  most  approved  methods  now  used  in  Distilla- 
tion of  Liquors  and  Beverages,  designed  for  the  special  use  of  Manufacturers  and 
Dealers  in  Wines  and  Spirits,  Grocers,  Tavern  Keepers,  and  Private  Families— the 
same  being  adapted  to  the  trade  of  the  United  States  and  Canadas.  By  Prof. 
Christian  Schultz,  Practical  Chemist,  and  Manufacturer  of  Wines,  Liquors,  Cor- 
dials, etc.,  from  Berne,  Switzerland  : the  whole  work  containing  over  700  valuable 
recipes.  A large  book,  bound  in  cloth,  price 50 


DR.  VALENTINE’S  COMIC  LECTURES  ; or.  Morsels 

of  Mirth  for  the  Melancholy.  A Budget  of  Wit  and  Humor,  and  a certain  cure 
for  the  blues  and  all  other  serious  complaints.  Comprising  Comic  Lectures  on 
Heads,  Faces,  Noses,  Mouths,  Animal  Magnetism,  etc.,  with  Specimens  of  Eloquence, 
Transactions  of  Learned  Societies,  Delineations  of  Eccentric  Characters,  Comic 
Songs,  etc.,  etc.  By  Dr.  W.  Valentine,  the  favorite  delineator  of  eccentric  char- 
acters. Illustrated  with  twelve  portraits  of  Dr.  Valentine,  in  his  most  celebrated 


characters.  12mo.,  cloth,  gilt,  price $1  J55, 

Ornamented  paper  cover 75  cts. 


dm.  VALENTINE’S  COMIC  METAMORPHOSES. 

Being  the  second  series  of  Dr.  Valentine’s  Lectures,  with  characters  as  given 


by  the  late  Yankee  Hill.  Embellished  with  numerous  portraits.  Cloth  gilt, 

price $1  ^55. 

Paper  cover 75  cts. 


THE  BOOK  OF  1,000  COMICAL  STORIES  ; or,  End- 

less  Repast  of  Fun.  A rich  banquet  for  every  day  in  the  year,  with  several 
courses  and  a dessert.  Bill  of  Fare  : Comprising  Tales  of  Humor,  Laughable  An- 
ecdotes, Irresistible  Drolleries,  Jovial  Jokes,  Comical  Conceits,  Puns  and  Pickings, 
Quibbles  and  Queries,  Bon  Mots  and  Broadgrins,  Oddities,  Epigrams,  &c.,  &c. 
Appropriately  Illustrated  with  300  Comic  Engravings.  Large  12mo.,  cloth, 
price $1  50. 


Ilf  RS.  PARTINOTON’S  CARPET-BAH  OF  FUN.  A 

Collection  of  over  1,000  of  the  most  Comical  Stories,  Amusing  Adventures, 
Side-Splitting  Jokes,  Cheek-Extending  Poetry,  Funny  Conundrums,  Queer  Sayings 
of  Mrs.  Partington,  Heart-Rending  Puns,  Witty  Repartees,  etc.  The  whole  illus- 
trated by  about  150  comic  wood-cuts.  12mo.,  300  pages,  cloth,  gilt,  price. . .$1  ^5. 
Ornamented  paper  covers ^. . . . 75  cts. 


WARP  OF  A THOUSAND  STRINGS;  or.  Laughter 

for  a Lifetime.  A large  book  of  nearly  400  pages.  By  the  author  of  Mrs.  Par- 
tington’s Carpet-Bag  of  Fun.  Bound  in  a handsome  gilt  cover  ; containing  more 
than  a million  laughs,  and  crowded  full  of  funny  stories,  besides  being  illustrated 
with  over  200  comical  engravings,  by  Darley,  McLennan,  Bellew,  &c.  Price  $1  50. 


^UT  LOYINGOOD,  Yarns  spun  by  ‘'A  Natural  Bom 

^ Durn’d  Fool.”  Warped  and  Wove  for  Public  Wear.  By  George  W.  Harris. 
Illustrated  with  eight  fine  full-page  engravings  from  designs  by  Howard.  This 
book  is  crammed  full  of  the  most  laughable  stories  ever  published.  12mo.,  tinted 
paper,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  price $1  50. 


THE  COURTSHIP  AND  ADVENTURES  OF  JONA- 

THAN  II03IEBRED  ; or,  The  Scrapes  and  Escapes  of  a Live  Yankee.  Beautifully 
Illustrated.  12mo.,  cloth.  The  book  is  printed  in  handsome  style,  on  good  paper, 
and  with  amusing  engravings.  Price $1  50. 

DORDEAUX  WINE  & LIQUOR  DEALERS’  GUIDE. 

-®^A  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture  of  Liquors.  By  a Practical  Liquor  Manufactur- 
er. 12mo.,  cloth.  Price 50 


Send  Casli  Orders  to  DICK  ^ FlTZQIilliAliD*  New  Yorlc, 


\ 


\ 


4: . 


f,  . 


. ? 


\ 


i 


$ 


i 


i 


'S., 

' 


